Copyright © 2020 NR. All rights reserved.

NR, the NR logo are either registered trademarks or trademarks of NR Electric Co., Ltd. No NR
trademarks may be used without written permission. NR products appearing in this document may
be covered by P.R. China and foreign patents. NR Electric Co., Ltd. reserves all rights and benefits
afforded under P.R. China and international copyright and patent laws in its products, including but
not limited to software, firmware and documentation. NR Engineering Co., Ltd. is licensed to use
this document as well as all intellectual property rights owned or held by NR Electric Co., Ltd,
including but not limited to copyright, rights in inventions, patents, know-how, trade secrets,
trademarks and trade names, service marks, design rights, database rights and rights in data,
utility models, domain names and all similar rights.
The information in this document is provided for informational use only and does not constitute a
legal contract between NR and any person or entity unless otherwise specified. Information in this
document is subject to change without prior notice.
To the extent required the products described herein meet applicable IEC and IEEE standards, but
no such assurance is given with respect to local codes and ordinances because they vary greatly.
Although every reasonable effort is made to present current and accurate information, this
document does not purport to cover all details or variations in equipment nor provide for every
possible contingency to be met in connection with installation, operation, or maintenance. Should
further information be desired or should particular problems arise which are not covered
sufficiently for your purposes, please do not hesitate to contact us.
 Preface

Preface
About This Document
This document describes the setting and calculation principle with examples for protection settings
and other settings of the PCS-915SC Centralized Busbar Relay.
Instead of final commissioning or service settings, this guide aims to provide a reference of setting
principle and method.

Safety Information
This manual is not a complete index of all safety measures required for operation of the equipment
(module or device). However, it comprises important information that must be followed for
personal safety, as well as to avoid material damage. Information is highlighted and illustrated as
follows according to the degree of danger:

Indicates an imminently hazardous situation that, if not avoided, will result

in death or serious injury.

Indicates a potentially hazardous situation that, if not avoided, could result

in death or serious injury.

Indicates a potentially hazardous situation that, if not avoided, may result

in minor or moderate injury or equipment damage.

Indicates that property damage can result if the measures specified are

not taken.

Important information about the product, please pay attention to avoid

undesired result.

Instructions and Warnings

The following hazard statements apply to this device.

The firmware may be upgraded to add new features or enhance/modify

existing features, please MAKE SURE that the version of this manual is
compatible with the product in your hand.

Document Conventions
⚫ Menu path is connected with the right arrow "→" and bold.
For example: the access path of protection settings is: Main Menu → Settings → Protection
Settings.

PCS-9611S Feeder Relay I

Date: 2020-12-30
Preface

⚫ Settings out of list should be placed in brackets.

For example: the system setting [Opt_SysFreq]
⚫ Cross-references are presented in italics.
For example: refer to Figure 1.1-1, refer to Table 1.1-1, reference to Section 1.1
⚫ Binary input signals, binary output signals, analogue quantities, LED lights, buttons, and other
fixed meanings, should be written in double quotes and bold.
For example: press the "ENT" button.

Warranty
This product is covered by the standard NR 10-year warranty. For warranty details, please consult
the manufacturer or agent for warranty information.

Document Structure
This document is a comprehensive work covering calculation principle and method of all settings.
Read the sections that pertain to your application to gain valuable information about using the
device. To concentrate on the target sections of this manual as your job needs and responsibilities
dictate. An overview of each manual section and section topics follows.
1 Introduction
Introduction of the summarizes functions of the device.
2 Global Settings
Setting guide for the global settings of the device, which includes system settings, device
settings, disturbance fault recording settings, label settings, clock synchronization settings
and output map settings.
3 Protection Settings
Setting guide for the protection settings of the device, settings calculation example of
restricted earth fault protection is also provided.
4 Measurement and Control Settings
Setting guide for the control settings and DC analogue output settings of the device, the
control settings include function settings, synchronism check settings, double point status
settings, control settings and interlocking logic settings.
5 PMU Settings
Setting guide for the PMU function related settings of the device.
6 Supervision Settings
Setting guide for the VT circuit supervision and CT circuit supervision function.
Setting guide for the logic links of the device, which includes function Links, GOOSE sending
links, GOOSE receiving links and SV receiving links
7 Communication Settings
Setting guide for the communication settings of the device, which includes general
communication settings, IEC61850 communication settings, DNP communication settings,
IEC103 communication settings, Modbus communication settings and SV communication
settings.
8 Logic Links
Setting guide for the logic links of the device, which includes function Links, GOOSE sending

II PCS-9611S Feeder Relay

Date: 2020-12-30
 Preface

links, GOOSE receiving links and SV receiving links

Document Revision History

P/N: ZL_PCS-9611S_X_Setting Guide_EN_Overseas General_X

Current Version: R1.00

Version
Release Date Description of change
Document Firmware

R1.00 R1.17 2020-12-30 Form the original manual.

PCS-9611S Feeder Relay III

Date: 2020-12-30
Preface

IV PCS-9611S Feeder Relay

Date: 2020-12-30
 1 Introduction

1 Introduction 1
Table of Contents

1.1 Introduction ...................................................................................................... 1-1

1.2 Functions ......................................................................................................... 1-1

PCS-9611S Feeder Relay 1-a

Date: 2020-12-30
 1 Introduction

1-b PCS-9611S Feeder Relay

Date: 2020-12-30
 1 Introduction

1.1 Introduction 1
The PCS-9611S relay is a protection, control and monitoring unit for various primary equipment
(such as overhead line, underground cable and transformer etc.) on solidly grounded, impedance
grounded, Peterson coil grounded and ungrounded system. This relay is suitable for wall surface
mounted indoors or outdoors or flush mounted into a control panel.
The PCS-9611S is widely adopted not only for conventional substations, but also for digital
substations. It supports IEC 61850 Editions 1 and 2 and provides GOOSE and SV network
interfaces with high real-time performance. The process level network supports peer-to-peer (P2P)
mode and networking mode, including single network mode and dual network mode. The station
level network can also receive and send MMS messages (such as interlocking signals) or process
level GOOSE messages (such as circuit breakers or disconnectors positions and trip signals).

1.2 Functions
The protection function diagram of this relay is shown as below.

Busbar
3VTs

52

27P 59P 59Q VTS 59G 81U 81O 81R 25 79

1VT

67P 32R

3CTs
*

50P 51P 49 CTS 50BF 51Q 46BC 50L/NL

1CT
*

50G 51G SOTF 67G 37 64REF

1CT
*

51SEF 60/59 60/50 67SEF FR

1VT

Load

1 Protection functions

ANSI Protection Functions Remark

⚫ Up to 6 stages with independent logic

⚫ Voltage control element for each stage
⚫ Optional direction element for each stage, including
forward direction, reverse direction and non-direction
67P
Phase overcurrent protection ⚫ Optional definite-time characteristic and inverse-time
50/51P
characteristic for each stage
⚫ Selectable trip purpose or alarm purpose for each
stage
⚫ Harmonic control element for each stage

PCS-9611S Feeder Relay 1-1

Date: 2020-12-30
 1 Introduction

⚫ Up to 6 stages with independent logic

1 ⚫ Optional direction element for each stage, including
forward direction, reverse direction and non-direction
⚫ Optional measured zero-sequence current or
67G calculated zero-sequence current for each stage
Earth fault protection
50/51G ⚫ Optional definite-time characteristic and inverse-time
characteristic for each stage
⚫ Selectable trip purpose or alarm purpose for each
stage
⚫ Harmonic control element for each stage
⚫ Only measured zero-sequence current is supported
⚫ Up to 6 stages with independent logic
Another group of earth fault ⚫ Optional definite-time characteristic and inverse-time
A.50/51G
overcurrent protection characteristic for each stage
⚫ Selectable trip purpose or alarm purpose for each
stage
⚫ Up to 2 stages with independent logic
⚫ Optional direction element for each stage, including
forward direction, reverse direction and non-direction
Negative-sequence
50/51Q
overcurrent protection ⚫ Optional definite-time characteristic and inverse-time
characteristic for each stage
⚫ Selectable trip purpose or alarm purpose for each
stage
⚫ Adopt the ratio of negative-sequence current to
46BC Broken conductor protection positive-sequence current (Ι2/Ι1) to detect the broken
conductor.
⚫ The measured zero-sequence current from the
high-precision CT is adopted
⚫ Up to 6 stages with independent logic
⚫ Optional direction element for each stage, including
Sensitive earth fault
50/51SEF forward direction, reverse direction and non-direction
protection
⚫ Optional definite-time characteristic and inverse-time
characteristic for each stage
⚫ Selectable trip purpose or alarm purpose for each
stage
⚫ Up to 2 stages with independent logic
⚫ Full-current RMS value includes 2nd~11th harmonic
50/51R RMS overcurrent protection components
⚫ Selectable trip purpose or alarm purpose for each
stage
⚫ Optional blocking condition, including circuit breaker
position and current criterion
37 Undercurrent protection
⚫ Selectable trip purpose or alarm purpose for each
stage
⚫ Breaker failure protection and re-trip function
⚫ Optional current criterion (phase overcurrent element,
zero-sequence overcurrent element,
50BF Breaker failure protection negative-sequence overcurrent element)
⚫ It can be initiated by current, circuit breaker position or
external binary input
⚫ Two time delays

1-2 PCS-9611S Feeder Relay

Date: 2020-12-30
 1 Introduction

⚫ One stage of phase overcurrent SOTF protection

50PSOTF
⚫ One stage of earth fault overcurrent SOTF protection 1
Switch-on-to-fault protection ⚫ Harmonic control element
50GSOTF
⚫ Voltage control element for phase overcurrent SOTF
protection
⚫ Up to 2 stages with independent logic
⚫ Optional definite-time characteristic and inverse-time
characteristic for each stage
59P Overvoltage protection ⚫ Optional phase voltage or phase-to-phase voltage
⚫ Optional “1-out-of-3” logic or “3-out-of-3” logic
⚫ Selectable trip purpose or alarm purpose for each
stage
⚫ Up to 2 stages with independent logic
⚫ Optional definite-time characteristic and inverse-time
characteristic for each stage
⚫ Optional phase voltage or phase-to-phase voltage
⚫ Optional “1-out-of-3” logic or “3-out-of-3” logic
27P Undervoltage protection
⚫ Check mode using circuit breaker position and current
criterion
⚫ Blocked by instantaneous VT circuit failure
⚫ Selectable trip purpose or alarm purpose for each
stage
⚫ Up to 2 stages with independent logic
Negative-sequence
59Q
overvoltage protection ⚫ Selectable trip purpose or alarm purpose for each
stage

Positive-sequence ⚫ One stage of positive-sequence overvoltage protection

59Pos
overvoltage protection ⚫ Selectable trip purpose or alarm purpose
⚫ Up to 2 stages with independent logic
⚫ Optional measured zero-sequence voltage or
Residual overvoltage
59G calculated zero-sequence voltage
protection
⚫ Selectable trip purpose or alarm purpose for each
stage
⚫ Up to 6 stages with independent logic
81O Overfrequency protection
⚫ Voltage control element
⚫ Up to 6 stages with independent logic
81U Underfrequency protection
⚫ Voltage control element

Frequency rate-of-change ⚫ Up to 6 stages with independent logic

81R
protection ⚫ Voltage control element
⚫ Up to 2 stages with independent logic
32R Reverse power protection ⚫ Selectable trip purpose or alarm purpose for each
stage
⚫ Up to 2 stages with independent logic
60/50 Current unbalance protection ⚫ Selectable trip purpose or alarm purpose for each
stage
⚫ Up to 2 stages with independent logic
60/59 Voltage unbalance protection ⚫ Selectable trip purpose or alarm purpose for each
stage
⚫ It can be triggered by on-load signal or circuit breaker
CLP Cold load pickup position
⚫ Short resetting is supported

PCS-9611S Feeder Relay 1-3

Date: 2020-12-30
 1 Introduction

⚫ Independent logic for auto-reclosing and manually

1 25 Synchro-check
closing
⚫ Two stages of thermal overload protection, one stage
49 Thermal overload protection
for alarm purpose and the other stage for trip purpose
⚫ Optional direction element
Restricted earth-fault ⚫ CT transient characteristic difference detection
64REF
protection ⚫ CT saturation detection based on 2nd and 3rd
harmonics
⚫ The arc flash signal is acquired by an arc sensor
50L/NL Arc flash protection
⚫ It is combined with the auxiliary fault current criterion
⚫ One shot or multi-shot
⚫ 3-pole AR
79 Auto-reclosing ⚫ It can be triggered by protection operation signal or
external binary input signal
⚫ Supports synchronism check or dead charge check
⚫ Up to 6 stages with independent logic
⚫ Optional definite-time characteristic and inverse-time
Another group of phase
S2.50/51P characteristic for each stage
overcurrent protection
⚫ Selectable trip purpose or alarm purpose for each
stage
FL Fault location function Single-end fault location element
Current transformer
CTS
supervision
Voltage transformer
VTS
supervision
TCS Tripping circuit supervision

2 Control functions
⚫ Switchgear control
⚫ Double point status synthesis
⚫ Remote/Local control mode switch
⚫ Interlocking logic for control
⚫ Direct control
⚫ Closing synchronism check with voltage selection
⚫ Switchgear trip counter
3 Measurement and metering
⚫ U, I, P, Q, Cos
⚫ Positive, negative and zero sequences
⚫ Max.15th harmonics
⚫ Energy metering (active and reactive energies for import and export)
⚫ Power Quality Supervision (PQS) with Total Harmonic Distortion (THD), deviation and
unbalance
⚫ DC analogue outputs (4~20mA, 0~10V, 0~5V or 0~20mA)
4 Synchrophasor measurement
⚫ The integrated Phasor Measurement Unit (PMU) function of synchrophasor
measurement is compatible with IEEE C37.118-2005, IEEE C37.118.1-2011, IEEE

1-4 PCS-9611S Feeder Relay

Date: 2020-12-30
 1 Introduction

C37.118.2-2011 and IEEE C37.118.1a-2014.

⚫ Supporting time synchronization by IRIG-B signal 1
⚫ Supporting P Class or M Class measurement (user selectable)
⚫ Measurement of three-phase and single-phase voltage and current
⚫ Measurement of positive/negative/zero-sequence voltage and current
⚫ Calculation of active power, reactive power, system frequency, and rate-of-change of
frequency (ROCOF)
⚫ Measurement of up to 32 binary status (user configurable)
⚫ Output of synchrophasor with timestamp, support of multiple protocols (TCP, TCP-UDP,
UDP) and multiple data rates for maximum 4 clients (PDC)
5 Supervision functions
⚫ VT circuit supervision
⚫ CT circuit supervision
⚫ Self-diagnostic
⚫ DC power supply supervision
⚫ System frequency supervision
⚫ Event recorder including 1024 disturbance items, 1024 change-of-state events, 1024
supervision events, 256 control logs and 1024 device logs.
⚫ Disturbance recorder including 64 disturbance records with waveforms (The file format of
disturbance recorder is compatible with international COMTRADE file).
⚫ Single line diagram representation in display
6 Communication functions
⚫ Support of various protocols
➢ Modbus
➢ DNP3
➢ IEC 60870-5-103
➢ IEC 61850 Ed1 & Ed2
➢ IEC 62439 Parallel Redundancy Protocol (PRP)
➢ IEC 62439 High-availability Seamless Ring (HSR) Redundancy Protocol
➢ IEEE 802.1w Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP)

⚫ Support for digital substation

➢ Extendable quantity of communication interfaces
➢ Support of IEC 61850 MMS Server
➢ Support of IEC 61850-8-1 GOOSE
➢ Support of IEC 61850-9-2LE SV

⚫ Up to four 10Base-T/100Base-TX copper Ethernet ports

⚫ Up to four 100Base-FX optical Ethernet ports
⚫ Two RS-485 serial ports for communication or printer

PCS-9611S Feeder Relay 1-5

Date: 2020-12-30
 1 Introduction

⚫ One RS-485/TTL serial port for clock synchronization

1 ⚫ One BNC connector for clock synchronization
7 User Interfaces
⚫ Friendly HMI interface with LCD, easy-to-use keypad aids simple navigation and
set-point adjustment
⚫ Push buttons for open/close, switch for selection between local and remote control, and
user's login and logout authority management
⚫ 4 Programmable operator pushbuttons with user-configurable labels
⚫ Up to 15/18 (6U, 1/3 × 19" or 6U, 1/2 × 19" chassis) programmable target LEDs with
user-configurable labels
⚫ 1 RS-232 rear port for printer (by jumper)
⚫ Language switchover—English+ selected language
⚫ Configuration tool—PCS-Studio
8 Additional functions
⚫ User programmable logic
⚫ Fault location
⚫ Fault phase selection
⚫ System phase sequences rotation function (ABC or ACB)
⚫ Clock synchronization
 IRIG-B: IRIG-B via RS-485 differential level or TTL level
 PPS: Pulse per second (PPS) via RS-485 differential level or binary input
 PPM: Pulse per minute (PPM) via RS-485 differential level or binary input
 IEEE1588: Clock message based on IEEE1588 via Ethernet network
 SNTP (PTP): Unicast (point-to-point) SNTP mode via Ethernet network
 SNTP (BC): Broadcast SNTP mode via Ethernet network
 Message (IEC103/Modbus/DNP3): Clock messages through IEC103 protocol,
Modbus protocol and DNP3 protocol
⚫ Cyber security
 NERC CIP
 IEC 62351
 IEC 62443
 IEEE 1686

1-6 PCS-9611S Feeder Relay

Date: 2020-12-30
 2 Global Settings

2 Global Settings
Table of Contents

2.1 System Settings ............................................................................................... 2-1

2.2 Device Settings ................................................................................................ 2-4 2

2.3 Disturbance Fault Recording Settings ........................................................... 2-7

2.4 Label Settings .................................................................................................. 2-8

2.5 Clock Synchronization Settings ..................................................................... 2-9

2.6 OutMap Settings ............................................................................................ 2-12

PCS-9611S Feeder Relay 2-a

Date: 2020-12-30
 2 Global Settings

2-b PCS-9611S Feeder Relay

Date: 2020-12-30
 2 Global Settings

2.1 System Settings

Access path in device LCD:
MainMenuSettingsGlobal SettingsSystem Settings
Access path in PCS-Studio configuration tool:
Project NodeIED NodeSettingGlobalGlobal_SettingsSystem_Settings
No. Settings Range Unit Step 2
1 Active_Grp 1~20 - 1
2 PrimaryEquip_Name Max 20 characters - -
3 Opt_SysFreq 50, 60 Hz
4 Prot.I1n 0~9999 A 1
5 Prot.I2n 1, 5 A -
6 Neu.I1n 0~9999 A 1
7 Neu.I2n 1, 5 A -
8 Neu2.I1n 0~9999 A 1
9 Neu2.I2n 1, 5 A -
10 SEF.I1n 0~9999 A 1
11 SEF.I2n 1 A -
12 60/50.I1n 0~9999 A 1
13 60/50.I2n 1, 5 A -
14 S2.I1n 0~9999 A 1
15 S2.I2n 1, 5 A -
16 Prot.U1n 0~1100 kV 0.01
17 Prot.U2n 1~200 V 0.01
18 Syn.U1n 0~1100 kV 0.01
19 Syn.U2n 1~200 V 0.01
20 Delt.U1n 0~1100 kV 0.01
21 Delt.U2n 1~200 V 0.01
22 60/59.U1n 0~1100 kV 0.01
23 60/59.U2n 1~200 V 0.01
24 Prot.En_RevCT Disabled; Enabled - -
25 Neu.En_RevCT Disabled; Enabled - -
26 Neu2.En_RevCT Disabled; Enabled - -
27 SEF.En_RevCT Disabled; Enabled - -
28 60/50.En_RevCT Disabled; Enabled - -
29 S2.En_RevCT Disabled; Enabled - -
30 Opt_PhSeq ABC; ACB - -
31 En_VT Disabled; Enabled - -

1. [Active_Grp]

PCS-9611S Feeder Relay 2-1

Date: 2020-12-30
 2 Global Settings

Active setting group No. can be configured here. Up to 20 setting groups can be configured, but
only one is active at a time. The setting lists of all these setting groups are the same.
Settings in these groups can be changed to suit the needs of actual application. The default
settings have been chosen according to established practice but will usually require adjustment to
suit the requirements of individual applications.
Please configure this setting according to actual requirements.
2. [PrimaryEquip_Name]
2 It is designed to configure the name of corresponding primary equipment (transformer, busbar, line,
capacitor, etc.), e.g.: “Feeder”. It will be displayed in the printed result and the DFR (Disturbance
Fault Recording) file.
The maximum permissible length of this setting is 20 characters.
This setting is case sensitive.
All the allowed characters in this setting are listed as below:
“A”|“a”|“B”|“b”|“C”|“c”|“D”|“d”|“E”|“e”|“F”|“f”|“G”|“g”|“H”|“h”|“I”|“i”|“J”|“j”|“K”|“k”|“L”|“l”|“M”|“m”
|“N”|“n”|“O”|“o”|“P”|“p”|“Q”|“q”|“R”|“r”|“S”|“s”|“T”|“t”|“U”|“u”|“V”|“v”|“W”|“w”|“X”|“x”|“Y”|“y”|“Z”
|“z”|“_”|“0”|“1”|“2”|“3”|“4”|“5”|“6”|“7”|“8”|“9”
Please configure this setting according to actual requirements.
3. [Opt_SysFreq]
It is designed to configure the operating frequency of this device. It can be set to either 50Hz or
60Hz according to the system frequency.
Please configure this setting according to actual requirements.
4. [Prot.I1n]
The rated primary value of protection phase CT. It should be set according to the actual condition.
5. [Prot.I2n]
The rated secondary value of protection phase CT. It should be set according to the actual
condition.
6. [Neu.I1n]
The rated primary value of the No.1 zero-sequence CT. It should be set according to the actual
condition.
7. [Neu.I2n]
The rated secondary value of the No.1 zero-sequence CT. It should be set according to the actual
condition.
8. [Neu2.I1n]
The rated primary value of the No.2 zero-sequence CT. It should be set according to the actual
condition.
9. [Neu2.I2n]
The rated secondary value of the No.2 zero-sequence CT. It should be set according to the actual
condition.
10. [SEF.I1n]
The rated primary value of sensitive zero-sequence CT. It should be set according to the actual
condition.
11. [SEF.I2n]
The rated secondary value of sensitive zero-sequence CT. It should be set according to the actual

2-2 PCS-9611S Feeder Relay

Date: 2020-12-30
 2 Global Settings

condition.
12. [60/50.I1n]
The rated primary value of unbalance CT. It should be set according to the actual condition.
13. [60/50.I2n]
The rated secondary value of unbalance CT. It should be set according to the actual condition.
14. [S2.I1n]
The rated primary value of another group of three-phase CT. It should be set according to the 2
actual condition.
15. [S2.I2n]
The rated secondary value of another group of three-phase CT. It should be set according to the
actual condition.
16. [Prot.U1n]
The rated primary value of protection VT. It should be set according to the actual condition.
17. [Prot.U2n]
The rated secondary value of protection VT. It should be set according to the actual condition.
18. [Syn.U1n]
The rated primary value of synchro-check VT. It should be set according to the actual condition.
19. [Syn.U2n]
The rated secondary value of synchro-check VT. It should be set according to the actual condition.
20. [Delt.U1n]
The rated primary value of zero-sequence VT. It should be set according to the actual condition.
21. [Delt.U2n]
The rated secondary value of zero-sequence VT. It should be set according to the actual condition.
22. [60/59.U1n]
The rated primary value of the unbalance VT. It should be set according to the actual condition.
23. [60/59.U2n]
The rated secondary value of the unbalance VT. It should be set according to the actual condition.
24. [Prot.En_RevCT]
The logic setting determines that whether the CT polarity of the three-phase protection CT is
reversed.
It is used to adjust the current polarity, and the default value is “Disabled”.
When the current polarity of primary CT is different with the defined forward direction, the setting
can be set as “Enabled”. However, it is recommended to change the external wiring of primary CT.
25. [Neu.En_RevCT]
The logic setting determines that whether the CT polarity of the No.1 zero-sequence CT is
reversed.
It is used to adjust the current polarity, and the default value is “Disabled”.
When the current polarity of primary CT is different with the defined forward direction, the setting
can be set as “Enabled”. However, it is recommended to change the external wiring of primary CT.
26. [Neu2.En_RevCT]

PCS-9611S Feeder Relay 2-3

Date: 2020-12-30
 2 Global Settings

The logic setting determines that whether the CT polarity of the No.2 zero-sequence CT is
reversed.
It is used to adjust the current polarity, and the default value is “Disabled”.
When the current polarity of primary CT is different with the defined forward direction, the setting
can be set as “Enabled”. However, it is recommended to change the external wiring of primary CT.
27. [SEF.En_RevCT]
The logic setting determines that whether the CT polarity of the sensitive zero-sequence CT is
2 reversed.
It is used to adjust the current polarity, and the default value is “Disabled”.
When the current polarity of primary CT is different with the defined forward direction, the setting
can be set as “Enabled”. However, it is recommended to change the external wiring of primary CT.
28. [60/50.En_RevCT]
The logic setting determines that whether the CT polarity of the unbalance CT is reversed.
It is used to adjust the current polarity, and the default value is “Disabled”.
When the current polarity of primary CT is different with the defined forward direction, the setting
can be set as “Enabled”. However, it is recommended to change the external wiring of primary CT.
29. [S2.En_RevCT]
The logic setting determines that whether the CT polarity of another group of three-phase CT is
reversed.
It is used to adjust the current polarity, and the default value is “Disabled”.
When the current polarity of primary CT is different with the defined forward direction, the setting
can be set as “Enabled”. However, it is recommended to change the external wiring of primary CT.
30. [Opt_PhSeq]
This setting informs the device of the actual system phase sequence, either “ABC” or “ACB”. CT
and VT inputs on the device, labeled as A, B and C, must be connected to system phase A, B and
C for correct operation. This will affect the positive and negative sequence quantities calculated by
the device and will also affect functions that are dependent on phase quantities.
Please configure this setting according to actual requirements.
31. [En_VT]
Logic setting to put VT into service. If all the voltage related function is not needed, it can be set as
“Disabled”, otherwise, it should be set as “Enabled”.

2.2 Device Settings

Access path in device LCD:
MainMenuSettingsGlobal SettingsDevice Settings
Access path in PCS-Studio configuration tool:
Project NodeIED NodeSettingGlobalGlobal_SettingsDevice_Settings
No. Settings Range Unit Step
1 En_DebugPort Disabled; Enabled - -
2 En_TelnetPort Disabled; Enabled - -
3 En_VirtualLCDPort Disabled; Enabled - -
4 Ctrl_Password 000~999 - -

2-4 PCS-9611S Feeder Relay

Date: 2020-12-30
 2 Global Settings

No. Settings Range Unit Step

5 En_NoCtrlPwd Disabled; Enabled - -
6 En_PopupRecord_Blk Disabled; Enabled - -
7 Un_BinaryInput 24/30/48/110/125/220/AC110/AC220 V -
8 Opt_Pwr_BI DC; AC50Hz; AC60Hz - -
9 U_Pickup_BI 50%Un~80%Un % 0.1
10 U_Dropoff_BI 50%Un~80%Un % 0.1 2
11 Mon_Window_Jitter 0.000~500.000 0.001 s
12 Num_Blk_Jitter 2~500000 1 -
13 Blk_Window_Jitter 0.000~500.000 0.001 s
14 Num_Reblk_Jitter 1~500000 1 -
15 En_Jitter_Blk Disabled; Enabled - -
16 En_BICheckInstP Disabled; Enabled - -

1. [En_DebugPort]
It is designed to enable/disable the debugging port of this device.
The debugging port is used for debugging tool connection, program download, variable debugging,
etc. via PCS-Studio configuration tool.
If the debugging port needs to be used, please configure this setting as “Enabled”.
If all the unnecessary ports (including the debugging port) are required to be disabled to ensure
cyber security, please configure this setting as “Disabled”.
2. [En_TelnetPort]
It is designed to enable/disable the Telnet port of this device.
If the Telnet port needs to be used, please configure this setting as “Enabled”.
If all the unnecessary ports (including the Telnet port) are required to be disabled to ensure cyber
security, please configure this setting as “Disabled”.
3. [En_VirtualLCDPort]
It is designed to enable/disable the virtual LCD port of this device.
The virtual LCD port is used to simulate a virtual HMI to acquire device information via PCS-Studio
configuration tool.
If the virtual LCD port needs to be used, please configure this setting as “Enabled”.
If all the unnecessary ports (including the virtual LCD port) are required to be disabled to ensure
cyber security, please configure this setting as “Disabled”.
4. [Ctrl_Password]
It is designed to configure the control operation password via LCD of this device.
Only digits from “000” to “999” can be accepted.
If the setting [En_NoCtrlPwd] is configured as “Enabled”, this setting will be unnecessary to be
configured.
5. [En_NoCtrlPwd]
It is designed to disable/enable the control operation password via LCD of this device.
For control operation via LCD of this device, if password is not required, please configure this
setting as “Enabled”. If password is required, please configure this setting as “Disabled”.

PCS-9611S Feeder Relay 2-5

Date: 2020-12-30
 2 Global Settings

6. [En_PopupRecord_Blkd]
It is designed to enable/disable the event records automatic pop up blocking function.
If all the event records (including disturbance records, supervision events, IO events, control
events, etc.) are forbidden to pop up in the main graph of local LCD automatically, i.e.: they can
only be viewed by entering corresponding menus, please configure this setting as “Enabled”.
If all these event records are required to pop up in the main graph of local LCD automatically,
please configure this setting as “Disabled”.
2 7. [Un_BinaryInput]
It is designed to configure the voltage level of the binary input module of this device.
Value of this setting must be the same as the voltage level of the binary inputs which are
connected to this device.
8. [Opt_Pwr_BI]
It is designed to configure the power supply mode of binary input module of this device.
3 setting value options are available: DC, AC50Hz and AC60Hz.
Value of this setting must be the same as the power supply mode of the binary inputs which are
connected to this device.
9. [U_Pickup_BI]
It is designed to configure the pickup voltage of binary input module of this device.
This setting is expressed as a percentage value.
Value of this setting must be smaller than the minimum normal binary input voltage of the binary
inputs connected to this device.
Base on engineering experience, this setting is recommended to be configured as “63.0%”.
10. [U_Dropoff_BI]
It is designed to configure the drop-off voltage of binary input module of this device.
This setting is expressed as a percentage value.
Value of the setting [U_Dropoff_BI] must be smaller than value of the setting [U_Pickup_BI] in this
device.
Base on engineering experience, this setting is recommended to be configured as “55.0%”.
11. [Mon_Window_Jitter]
It is designed to configure the monitoring window of binary input jitter processing. In the time span
defined by this setting, the binary input state changes will be recorded.
If the binary input jitter processing is required, this setting must be configured as a value greater
than “0”.
If the setting [En_Jitter_Blk] is configured as “Disabled”, this setting will be unnecessary to be
configured.
12. [Num_Blk_Jitter]
It is designed to configure the times threshold to block binary input status change due to jitter
If the binary input jitter processing is required, this setting must be configured as a value greater
than “0”.
If the setting [Mon_Window_Jitter] is modified to a bigger value, the setting [Num_Blk_Jitter] is
recommended to be modified to a bigger value, too.
If the setting [En_Jitter_Blk] is configured as “Disabled”, this setting will be unnecessary to be
configured.

2-6 PCS-9611S Feeder Relay

Date: 2020-12-30
 2 Global Settings

13. [Blk_Window_Jitter]
It is designed to configure the blocking window of binary input status change due to jitter. In the
time span defined by this setting, the binary input state changes will be recorded.
If the binary input jitter processing is required, this setting must be configured as a value greater
than “0”.
If the setting [En_Jitter_Blk] is configured as “Disabled”, this setting will be unnecessary to be
configured.
14. [Num_Reblk_Jitter] 2
It is designed to configure the times threshold to initiate immediately another blocking window of
binary input status change due to continuous jitter.
If the binary input jitter processing is required, this setting must be configured as a value greater
than “0”.
If the setting [Blk_Window_Jitter] is modified to a bigger value, the setting [Num_Reblk_Jitter] is
recommended to be modified to a bigger value, too.
If the setting [En_Jitter_Blk] is configured as “Disabled”, this setting will be unnecessary to be
configured.
15. [En_Jitter_Blk]
It is designed to enable/disable the jitter processing function in case of binary input voltage
variation.
If binary input jitter processing is required, please configure this setting as “Enabled”. Otherwise,
please configure this setting as “Disabled”.
16. [En_BICheckInstP]
It is designed to enable/disable the high-power conducting mode of binary inputs
If the binary input is required to be considered as being energized only when the instantaneous
active power rises to a certain value together during this mode, so as to avoid mistaken signal and
improve the anti-interference ability, please configure this setting as “Enabled”.
Otherwise, please configure this setting as “Disabled”. Now the binary input will be considered to
be energized without checking the instantaneous active power.
This conducting mode is only available in the device equipped with some certain modules (e.g.:
NR6604A, NR6611A). If these modules are not equipped, this conducting mode will be
unavailable, so this setting will be hidden.
If this setting is configured as “Enabled”, the debouncing time of corresponding binary inputs must
be greater than 20ms.

2.3 Disturbance Fault Recording Settings

Access path in device LCD:
MainMenuSettingsGlobal SettingsDFR Settings
Access path in PCS-Studio configuration tool:
Project NodeIED NodeSettingGlobalGlobal_SettingsDFR_Settings
No. Settings Range Unit Step
1 RecDur_PreTrigDFR 0.000~1.000 s 0.001
2 RecDur_PostFault 0.000~10.000 s 0.001
3 MaxRecDur_PostTrigDFR 0.000~10.000 s 0.001

PCS-9611S Feeder Relay 2-7

Date: 2020-12-30
 2 Global Settings

1. [RecDur_PreTrigDFR]
It is designed to configure the waveform recorded duration before the trigger element operates.
Please configure this setting according to actual requirements:
If this setting is configured as a too big value, the waveform file size will be too large, and more
storage space and transmission bandwidth will be required.
If this setting is configured as a too small value, the waveform file may be insufficient for fault
analysis.
2 Base on engineering experience, this setting is recommended to be configured as “0.100s”.
2. [RecDur_PostFault]
It is designed to configure the waveform recorded duration after the DFR trigger element drops off
If there are 2 or more DFR trigger elements, this setting refers to the waveform recorded duration
after the last trigger element drops off.
Please configure this setting according to actual requirements:
If this setting is configured as a too big value, the waveform file size will be too large, and more
storage space and transmission bandwidth will be required.
If this setting is configured as a too small value, the waveform file may be insufficient for fault
analysis.
Base on engineering experience, this setting is recommended to be configured according to the
DFR trigger mode as shown in the following table.
No. DFR trigger mode Recommended setting value

1 “Level trigger” (Including high-level trigger, low-level trigger) 0.100s

“Edge trigger” (Including falling-edge trigger, rising-edge trigger,
2 1.000s
bilateral-edge trigger)
3 Combination of “Level trigger” and “Edge trigger” 1.000s

3. [MaxRecDur_PostTrigDFR]
It is designed to configure the maximum waveform recorded duration after the trigger element
operates.
If there are 2 or more DFR trigger elements, this setting refers to the maximum waveform recorded
duration after the 1st trigger element operates.
Please configure this setting according to actual requirements:
If this setting is configured as a too big value, the waveform file size will be too large, and more
storage space and transmission bandwidth will be required.
If this setting is configured as a too small value, the waveform file may be insufficient for fault
analysis.
Base on engineering experience, this setting is recommended to be configured as “1.000s”.

2.4 Label Settings

Access path in device LCD:
MainMenuSettingsGlobal SettingsLabel Settings
Access path in PCS-Studio configuration tool:
Project NodeIED NodeSettingGlobalGlobal_SettingsLabel_Settings

2-8 PCS-9611S Feeder Relay

Date: 2020-12-30
 2 Global Settings

No. Symbol Default value Description

Label setting of GOOSE communication link 00 of the

1 Bx.Name_00_GCommLink GOOSE_Link0
module located in slot No.x.

2 …… …… ……

GOOSE_Link23 Label setting of GOOSE communication link 07 of the

3 Bx.Name_07_GCommLink
module located in slot No.x.

4 Bx.Name_00_SVCommLink SV_Link00
Label setting of SV communication link 00 of the
module located in slot No.x. 2
5 …… …… ……

Label setting of SV communication link 03 of the

6 Bx.Name_03_SVCommLink SV_Link11
module located in slot No.x.

These settings are used to definite the label of GOOSE/SV communication link. The label setting
should be set not more than 30 characters. The label of GOOSE/SV communication link will
influence the displayed contents of all reports, settings and metering that related with GOOSE/SV
communication link.
These settings are case sensitive.
All the allowed characters in these settings are listed as below:
“A”|“a”|“B”|“b”|“C”|“c”|“D”|“d”|“E”|“e”|“F”|“f”|“G”|“g”|“H”|“h”|“I”|“i”|“J”|“j”|“K”|“k”|“L”|“l”|“M”|“m”
|“N”|“n”|“O”|“o”|“P”|“p”|“Q”|“q”|“R”|“r”|“S”|“s”|“T”|“t”|“U”|“u”|“V”|“v”|“W”|“w”|“X”|“x”|“Y”|“y”|“Z”
|“z”|“_”|“0”|“1”|“2”|“3”|“4”|“5”|“6”|“7”|“8”|“9”
Please configure this setting according to actual requirements.

2.5 Clock Synchronization Settings

Access path in device LCD:
MainMenuSettingsGlobal SettingsClockSyn Settings
Access path in PCS-Studio configuration tool:
Project NodeIED NodeSettingGlobalGlobal_SettingsClockSyn_Settings
No. Settings Range Unit Step
1 Opt_TimeSyn Conventional; SAS; NoTimeSyn - 1
2 OffsetHour_UTC -12~12 - -
3 OffsetMinute_UTC 0~60 - -
4 IP_Server_SNTP 0.0.0.0~255.255.255.255 - -
5 IP_StandbyServer_SNTP 0.0.0.0~255.255.255.255 - -
6 DST.En Disabled; Enabled - 1
7 DST.OffsetMinute 0~255 - 1
Jan, Feb, Mar, Apr, May, Jun, Jul, Aug,
8 DST.MonthInYear_Start - 1
Sep, Oct, Nov, Dec
9 DST.WeekInMonth_Start 1st, 2nd, 3nd, 4th, Last - 1
Sunday, Monday, Tuesday,
10 DST.DayInWeek_Start Wednesday, Thursday, Friday, - 1
Saturday
11 DST.HourInDay_Start 0~23 - 1
Jan, Feb, Mar, Apr, May, Jun, Jul, Aug,
12 DST.MonthInYear_End - 1
Sep, Oct, Nov, Dec

PCS-9611S Feeder Relay 2-9

Date: 2020-12-30
 2 Global Settings

No. Settings Range Unit Step

13 DST.WeekInMonth_End 1st, 2nd, 3nd, 4th, Last - 1
Sunday, Monday, Tuesday,
14 DST.DayInWeek_End Wednesday, Thursday, Friday, - 1
Saturday
15 DST.HourInDay_End 0~23 - 1

1. [Opt_TimeSyn]
2 It is designed to select the clock synchronization mode of the device.
3 setting value options are available as shown in the following table.
No. Setting value option Description
If this option is selected, the “Conventional” clock synchronization mode will be
enabled. Now the following clock synchronization signals can be accepted by this
device. If none of the following signals is received, an alarm signal named
“Alm_TimeSyn” will be issued, and the clock synchronization mode will change to
the “SAS” mode automatically.
IRIG-B (RS-485): IRIG-B via RS-485 differential level.
1 Conventional PPS (RS-485): Pulse per second (PPS) via RS-485 differential level.
IRIG-B (Fibre): IRIG-B via optical-fibre interface.
PPS (Fibre): Pulse per second (PPS) via optical-fibre interface.
IEEE 1588 (Copper or Fibre): Clock message via IEEE 1588.
PPM (DIN): Pulse per minute (PPM) via the binary input [BI_TimeSyn].
PPS (DIN): Pulse per second (PPS) via the binary input [BI_TimeSyn].
If this option is selected, the “SAS” clock synchronization mode will be enabled.
Now the following clock synchronization signals can be accepted by this device. If
none of the following signals is received, an alarm signal named “Alm_TimeSyn”
will be issued.
2 SAS SNTP (PTP): Unicast (point to point) SNTP mode via Ethernet network.
SNTP (BC): Broadcast SNTP mode via Ethernet network.
IEC103: Clock messages through IEC 60870-5-103 protocol.
Modbus: Clock messages through Modbus protocol.
If the time synchronization function is not required, please select “NoTimeSyn”.
3 NoTimeSyn
No clock synchronization alarm will be issued in this mode.

2. [OffsetHour_UTC]
The settings [OffsetHour_UTC] and [OffsetMinute_UTC] cooperate to determine the local time
zone of this device.
The setting [OffsetHour_UTC] is designed to configure the offset hour of local time from UTC.
Please configure this setting according to actual requirements.
3. [OffsetMinute_UTC]
The settings [OffsetHour_UTC] and [OffsetMinute_UTC] cooperate to determine the local time
zone of this device.
The setting [OffsetMinute_UTC] is designed to configure the offset minute of local time from UTC.
Please configure this setting according to actual requirements.
4. [IP_Server_SNTP]
It is designed to configure the IP address of the server when SNTP time synchronization mode is
selected.
This setting adopts dotted-decimal notation of IPv4.
Value of this setting must be the same as corresponding setting value of the SNTP server.

2-10 PCS-9611S Feeder Relay

Date: 2020-12-30
 2 Global Settings

If there is no SNTP server, please configure this setting as “0.0.0.0”.

5. [IP_StandbyServer_SNTP]
It is designed to configure the IP address of the standby server when SNTP time synchronization
mode is selected.
If this device failed to connect the SNTP server, it will try to connect the standby SNTP server.
This setting adopts dotted-decimal notation of IPv4.
Value of this setting must be the same as corresponding setting value of the standby SNTP server.
2
If there is no standby SNTP server, please configure this setting as “0.0.0.0”.
6. [DST.En]
It is designed to enable/disable the Daylight Saving Time (DST).
If DST is required, please configure this setting as “Enabled”. Otherwise, please configure this
setting as “Disabled”.
7. [DST.OffsetMinute]
It is designed to configure the minute offset of DST, i.e. the difference between DST time and local
time.
If the setting [DST.En] is configured as “Disabled”, this setting will be unnecessary to be
configured.
Please configure this setting according to actual requirements.
8. [DST.MonthInYear_Start]
It is designed to configure the month in year when daylight time starts.
If the setting [DST.En] is configured as “Disabled”, this setting will be unnecessary to be
configured.
Please configure this setting according to actual requirements.
9. [DST.WeekInMonth_Start]
It is designed to configure the week in month when daylight time starts.
If the setting [DST.En] is configured as “Disabled”, this setting will be unnecessary to be
configured.
Please configure this setting according to actual requirements.
10. [DST.DayInWeek_Start]
It is designed to configure the day in week when daylight time starts.
If the setting [DST.En] is configured as “Disabled”, this setting will be unnecessary to be
configured.
Please configure this setting according to actual requirements.
11. [DST.HourInDay_Start]
It is designed to configure the hour in day when daylight time starts.
If the setting [DST.En] is configured as “Disabled”, this setting will be unnecessary to be
configured.
Please configure this setting according to actual requirements.
12. [DST.MonthInYear_End]
It is designed to configure the month in year when daylight time ends.
If the setting [DST.En] is configured as “Disabled”, this setting will be unnecessary to be

PCS-9611S Feeder Relay 2-11

Date: 2020-12-30
 2 Global Settings

configured.
Please configure this setting according to actual requirements.
13. [DST.WeekInMonth_End]
It is designed to configure the week in month when daylight time ends.
If the setting [DST.En] is configured as “Disabled”, this setting will be unnecessary to be
configured.

2 Please configure this setting according to actual requirements.

14. [DST.DayInWeek_End]
It is designed to configure the day in week in when daylight time ends.
If the setting [DST.En] is configured as “Disabled”, this setting will be unnecessary to be
configured.
Please configure this setting according to actual requirements.
15. [DST.HourInDay_End]
It is designed to configure the hour in day when daylight time ends.
If the setting [DST.En] is configured as “Disabled”, this setting will be unnecessary to be
configured.
Please configure this setting according to actual requirements.

2.6 OutMap Settings

Access path in device LCD:
MainMenuSettingsGlobal SettingsOutMap Settings
Access path in PCS-Studio configuration tool:
Project NodeIED NodeSettingGlobalGlobal_SettingsOutMap_Settings

No. Name Range Unit Step

1 OutMapxxx (xxx=001, 002…032) 00000000~ FFFFFFFF - -

2 t_Dwell_xxx_OutMap (xxx=001, 002…032) 0.000~0.500 s -

1. [OutMapxxx]
It is the tripping logic setting of programmable trip output map xxx.
Tripping logic settings are used to specify which breakers will be tripped when some protection
element operates. This logic setting comprises 32 binary bits as follows and is expressed by a
hexadecimal number of 8 digits from 00000000H to FFFFFFFFH. The tripping logic setting is
specified as follows:
Bit Definition Bit Definition
0 Output001 16 Output017
1 Output002 17 Output018
2 Output003 18 Output019
3 Output004 19 Output020
4 Output005 20 Output021
5 Output006 21 Output022
6 Output007 22 Output023

2-12 PCS-9611S Feeder Relay

Date: 2020-12-30
 2 Global Settings

7 Output008 23 Output024
8 Output009 24 Output025
9 Output010 25 Output026
10 Output011 26 Output027
11 Output012 27 Output028
12 Output013 28 Output029
13 Output014 29 Output030
2
14 Output015 30 Output031
15 Output016 31 Output032

“Output001” just means to drive the 1st group of tripping output contacts. The tripping outputs are
recorded as “Output001_OutMap ~ Output032_OutMap” by the device when they operate, and
“Outputxxx” (xxx=001, 002…032) represents “trip output xxx” (xxx=001, 002…032). The circuit
breaker corresponding with bit which is set as “1” will be tripped. Tripping output logic settings
should be set on basis of application-specific drawings.
For example, [OutMap01] is configured as the tripping output logic setting of phase overvoltage
protection, then if phase overvoltage protection operates to make “Output001”, “Output002”,
“Output003” contacts pickup, bit “0”, bit “1” and bit “2” shall be filled with “1” and other bits shall be
filled with “0”. Then a hexadecimal number 00000007H is formed as the tripping output logic
setting, i.e. [OutMap01] shall be set as “00000007H”.
2. [t_Dwell_xxx_OutMap]
It is the pulse width setting of programmable trip output map xxx.
When the energized quantity maintains more than this setting value, once the energized quantity
resets, the trip output will reset immediately. When the energized quantity maintains less than this
setting value, the operating holding time of the trip output is the value of this setting.
The setting must be longer than the reliable operating time of the circuit breaker. If the circuit
breaker can reliably complete the opening and closing operations within 40ms, the value of this
setting can be appropriately increased with a little margin, for example, it can be set as 60ms.

PCS-9611S Feeder Relay 2-13

Date: 2020-12-30
 2 Global Settings

2-14 PCS-9611S Feeder Relay

Date: 2020-12-30
 3 Protection Settings

3 Protection Settings
Table of Contents

3.1 Phase Overcurrent Protection ........................................................................ 3-1

3.2 Earth Fault Overcurrent Protection .............................................................. 3-14

3.3 Another Group of Earth Fault Overcurrent Protection ............................... 3-27

3.4 Negative-sequence Overcurrent Protection ................................................ 3-36

3.5 Broken Conductor Protection (46BC) .......................................................... 3-44

3.6 Sensitive Earth Fault Protection (50/51SEF) ............................................... 3-45

3
3.7 RMS Overcurrent Protection ........................................................................ 3-56

3.8 Overvoltage Protection ................................................................................. 3-62

3.9 Residual Overvoltage Protection ................................................................. 3-67

3.10 Negative-sequence Overvoltage Protection .............................................. 3-69

3.11 Positive-sequence Overvoltage Protection ............................................... 3-72

3.12 Undervoltage Protection ............................................................................. 3-73

3.13 Overfrequency Protection ........................................................................... 3-79

3.14 Underfrequency Protection ........................................................................ 3-80

3.15 Frequency Rate-of-change Protection ....................................................... 3-81

3.16 Reverse Power Protection .......................................................................... 3-82

3.17 Cold Load Pickup Logic .............................................................................. 3-84

3.18 Undercurrent Protection ............................................................................. 3-87

3.19 Breaker Failure Protection (50BF) .............................................................. 3-88

3.20 Switch-on-to-Fault Protection (SOTF) ........................................................ 3-91

3.21 Thermal Overload Protection (49) .............................................................. 3-93

3.22 Restricted Earth Fault Protection (64REF) ................................................ 3-95

3.22.1 Setting Guideline .............................................................................................................. 3-95

PCS-9611S Feeder Relay 3-a

Date: 2020-12-30
 3 Protection Settings

3.22.2 Setting Example ............................................................................................................... 3-97

3.23 Arc Flash Protection (50L/NL) .................................................................... 3-98

3.24 Current Unbalance Protection .................................................................... 3-99

3.25 Voltage Unbalance Protection .................................................................. 3-101

3.26 Automatic Reclosure (79).......................................................................... 3-104

3.27 Another Group of Phase Overcurrent Protection (S2.50/51P) ............... 3-109

3.28 Fault Location (FL) ..................................................................................... 3-111

3-b PCS-9611S Feeder Relay

Date: 2020-12-30
 3 Protection Settings

3.1 Phase Overcurrent Protection

Access path in device LCD:
MainMenuSettingsProtection SettingsOC Settings
Access path in PCS-Studio configuration tool:
Project NodeIED NodeSettingGroupXProtection_SettingsOC_Settings

No. Name Range Unit Step

1 50/51P.VCE.Upp 10~100 V 0.001

2 50/51P.VCE.U2 2~57 V 0.001

3 50/51P.VCE.3U0 2~57 V 0.001

4 50/51P.DIR.RCA -180~179 deg 1

5 50/51P.DIR.RCA_NegOC -180~179 deg 1

3
6 50/51P.DIR.phi_Min_Fwd 10~90 deg 1

7 50/51P.DIR.phi_Max_Fwd 10~90 deg 1

8 50/51P.DIR.phi_Min_Rev 10~90 deg 1

9 50/51P.DIR.phi_Max_Rev 10~90 deg 1

10 50/51P.DIR.Opt_PolarizedVolt Upp; Up; U1 - -

11 50/51P.DIR.I_Min (0.05~1)In - 0.001

12 50/51P.DIR.U_Min 1~10 V 0.001

13 50/51P.En_VTS_Blk Disabled; Enabled - -

14 50/51P.HMB.K_Hm2 0.1~1 - 0.001

15 50/51P.HMB.I_Rls 2~150 A 0.001

16 50/51P.HMB.Opt_Blk PhaseBlk; CrossBlk; MaxPhaseBlk - -

17 50/51P1.I_Set 0.05~200 A 0.001

18 50/51P1.t_Op 0 ~100 s 0.001

19 50/51P1.t_DropOut 0 ~100 s 0.001

20 50/51P1.En_Volt_Blk Disabled; Enabled - -

21 50/51P1.Opt_Dir Non_Directional; Forward Reverse - -

22 50/51P1.En_Hm_Blk Disabled; Enabled - -

23 50/51P1.En Disabled; Enabled - -

24 50/51P1.Opt_Trp/Alm Trp; Alm - -

ANSIE; ANSIV; ANSIN; ANSIM;

ANSIDefTime; ANSILTE; ANSILTV;
25 50/51P1.Opt_Curve ANSILT; IECN; IECV; IEC; IECE; - -
IECST; IECLT; IECDefTime; Resv;
UserDefine
26 50/51P1.Opt_Curve_DropOut Inst; DefTime; IDMT - -

PCS-9611S Feeder Relay 3-1

Date: 2020-12-30
 3 Protection Settings

27 50/51P1.TMS 0.04~ 20 - 0.001

28 50/51P1.tmin 0 ~10 s 0.001

29 50/51P1.K 0.001~120 - 0.0001

30 50/51P1.Alpha 0.01 ~3 - 0.0001

31 50/51P1.C 0 ~1 - 0.0001

32 50/51P2.I_Set 0.05~200 A 0.001

33 50/51P2.t_Op 0 ~100 s 0.001

34 50/51P2.t_DropOut 0 ~100 s 0.001

35 50/51P2.En_Volt_Blk Disabled; Enabled - -

36 50/51P2.Opt_Dir Non_Directional; Forward Reverse - -

3 37 50/51P2.En_Hm_Blk Disabled; Enabled - -

38 50/51P2.En Disabled; Enabled - -

39 50/51P2.Opt_Trp/Alm Trp; Alm - -

ANSIE; ANSIV; ANSIN; ANSIM;

ANSIDefTime; ANSILTE; ANSILTV;
40 50/51P2.Opt_Curve ANSILT; IECN; IECV; IEC; IECE; - -
IECST; IECLT; IECDefTime; Resv;
UserDefine
41 50/51P2.Opt_Curve_DropOut Inst; DefTime; IDMT - -

42 50/51P2.TMS 0.04~ 20 - 0.001

43 50/51P2.tmin 0 ~10 s 0.001

44 50/51P2.K 0.001~120 - 0.0001

45 50/51P2.Alpha 0.01 ~3 - 0.0001

46 50/51P2.C 0 ~1 - 0.0001

47 50/51P3.I_Set 0.05~200 A 0.001

48 50/51P3.t_Op 0 ~100 s 0.001

49 50/51P3.t_DropOut 0 ~100 s 0.001

50 50/51P3.En_Volt_Blk Disabled; Enabled - -

51 50/51P3.Opt_Dir Non_Directional; Forward Reverse - -

52 50/51P3.En_Hm_Blk Disabled; Enabled - -

53 50/51P3.En Disabled; Enabled - -

54 50/51P3.Opt_Trp/Alm Trp; Alm - -

ANSIE; ANSIV; ANSIN; ANSIM;

ANSIDefTime; ANSILTE; ANSILTV;
55 50/51P3.Opt_Curve ANSILT; IECN; IECV; IEC; IECE; - -
IECST; IECLT; IECDefTime; Resv;
UserDefine
56 50/51P3.Opt_Curve_DropOut Inst; DefTime; IDMT - -

3-2 PCS-9611S Feeder Relay

Date: 2020-12-30
 3 Protection Settings

57 50/51P3.TMS 0.04~ 20 - 0.001

58 50/51P3.tmin 0 ~10 s 0.001

59 50/51P3.K 0.001~120 - 0.0001

60 50/51P3.Alpha 0.01 ~3 - 0.0001

61 50/51P3.C 0 ~1 - 0.0001

62 50/51P4.I_Set 0.05~200 A 0.001

63 50/51P4.t_Op 0 ~100 s 0.001

64 50/51P4.t_DropOut 0 ~100 s 0.001

65 50/51P4.En_Volt_Blk Disabled; Enabled - -

66 50/51P4.Opt_Dir Non_Directional; Forward Reverse - -

67 50/51P4.En_Hm_Blk Disabled; Enabled - - 3

68 50/51P4.En Disabled; Enabled - -

69 50/51P4.Opt_Trp/Alm Trp; Alm - -

ANSIE; ANSIV; ANSIN; ANSIM;

ANSIDefTime; ANSILTE; ANSILTV;
70 50/51P4.Opt_Curve ANSILT; IECN; IECV; IEC; IECE; - -
IECST; IECLT; IECDefTime; Resv;
UserDefine
71 50/51P4.Opt_Curve_DropOut Inst; DefTime; IDMT - -

72 50/51P4.TMS 0.04~ 20 - 0.001

73 50/51P4.tmin 0 ~10 s 0.001

74 50/51P4.K 0.001~120 - 0.0001

75 50/51P4.Alpha 0.01 ~3 - 0.0001

76 50/51P4.C 0 ~1 - 0.0001

77 50/51P5.I_Set 0.05~200 A 0.001

78 50/51P5.t_Op 0 ~100 s 0.001

79 50/51P5.t_DropOut 0 ~100 s 0.001

80 50/51P5.En_Volt_Blk Disabled; Enabled - -

81 50/51P5.Opt_Dir Non_Directional; Forward Reverse - -

82 50/51P5.En_Hm_Blk Disabled; Enabled - -

83 50/51P5.En Disabled; Enabled - -

84 50/51P5.Opt_Trp/Alm Trp; Alm - -

ANSIE; ANSIV; ANSIN; ANSIM;

ANSIDefTime; ANSILTE; ANSILTV;
85 50/51P5.Opt_Curve ANSILT; IECN; IECV; IEC; IECE; - -
IECST; IECLT; IECDefTime; Resv;
UserDefine
86 50/51P5.Opt_Curve_DropOut Inst; DefTime; IDMT - -

PCS-9611S Feeder Relay 3-3

Date: 2020-12-30
 3 Protection Settings

87 50/51P5.TMS 0.04~ 20 - 0.001

88 50/51P5.tmin 0 ~10 s 0.001

89 50/51P5.K 0.001~120 - 0.0001

90 50/51P5.Alpha 0.01 ~3 - 0.0001

91 50/51P5.C 0 ~1 - 0.0001

92 50/51P6.I_Set 0.05~200 A 0.001

93 50/51P6.t_Op 0 ~100 s 0.001

94 50/51P6.t_DropOut 0 ~100 s 0.001

95 50/51P6.En_Volt_Blk Disabled; Enabled - -

96 50/51P6.Opt_Dir Non_Directional; Forward Reverse - -

3 97 50/51P6.En_Hm_Blk Disabled; Enabled - -

98 50/51P6.En Disabled; Enabled - -

99 50/51P6.Opt_Trp/Alm Trp; Alm - -

ANSIE; ANSIV; ANSIN; ANSIM;

ANSIDefTime; ANSILTE; ANSILTV;
100 50/51P6.Opt_Curve ANSILT; IECN; IECV; IEC; IECE; - -
IECST; IECLT; IECDefTime; Resv;
UserDefine
101 50/51P6.Opt_Curve_DropOut Inst; DefTime; IDMT - -

102 50/51P6.TMS 0.04~ 20 - 0.001

103 50/51P6.tmin 0 ~10 s 0.001

104 50/51P6.K 0.001~120 - 0.0001

105 50/51P6.Alpha 0.01 ~3 - 0.0001

106 50/51P6.C 0 ~1 - 0.0001

Phase overcurrent protection is provided with six stages, each stage has independent current
setting, time delay and control logic. Generally, stage 1 of phase overcurrent protection requires
no time limit operation, and the protection area shall not be less than 20% of the total line. Stage 2
of phase overcurrent protection shall protect the whole protection line. Stage 3 and stage 4 of
phase overcurrent protection can be backup protection for the line, and also can be remote
backup protection for the adjacent line.
1. [50/51P.VCE.Upp]
The voltage control element is set according to the phase-to-phase voltage; the low voltage
blocking setting can be set based on the following formula.
𝑈𝑚𝑖𝑛
[50/51𝑃. 𝑉𝐶𝐸. 𝑈𝑝𝑝] =
𝐾𝑟𝑒𝑙
Where:
Umin is the possible minimum phase-to-phase voltage during normal operation, which can be
normally taken as 0.9Un (Un is secondary value of the rated phase-to-phase voltage);
Krel is the reliability coefficient, 1.1~1.2;
In the practice, it is constantly set as 0.6~0.8Un.

3-4 PCS-9611S Feeder Relay

Date: 2020-12-30
 3 Protection Settings

2. [50/51P.VCE.U2]
The negative-sequence voltage blocking setting shall be larger than the unbalance voltage during
normal operation, the unbalance voltage value can be determined through actual measurement.
Generally, it is 4%~8% of the rated phase-to-ground voltage.
3. [50/51P.VCE.3U0]
The residual voltage setting should be larger than the maximum residual voltage during normal
operation.

4. [50/51P.DIR.RCA]
It is the characteristic angle of directional phase overcurrent element.
By setting the characteristic angle to determine the most sensitive forward angle of phase current,
using phase current with phase polarized voltage to determine the direction of phase current in
forward direction or reverse direction.
This parameter defines the system impedance angle of positive-sequence circuit. The default
value is 45 degree. 3
Ua

[50/51P.DIR.phi_Min_Fwd]

Non-operating Ia
area

Operating area in
[50/51P.DIR.phi_Max_Rev] forward direction

[50/51P.DIR.RCA]

Operating area in
reverse direction

[50/51P.DIR.phi_Max_Fwd]

[50/51P.DIR.phi_Min_Rev] Non-operating
area

5. [50/51P.DIR.RCA_NegOC]
It is the characteristic angle of directional negative-sequence overcurrent element.
By setting the characteristic angle to determine the most sensitive forward angle of
negative-sequence current, using negative-sequence current with negative-sequence voltage to
determine the direction of negative-sequence current in forward direction or reverse direction. The
default value is 45 degree.
6. [50/51P.DIR.phi_Min_Fwd]
The minimum boundary of the forward direction element of phase overcurrent protection, the
recommended value is 90 degree.
7. [50/51P.DIR.phi_Max_Fwd]
The maximum boundary of the forward direction element of phase overcurrent protection, the
recommended value is 90 degree.

PCS-9611S Feeder Relay 3-5

Date: 2020-12-30
 3 Protection Settings

8. [50/51P.DIR.phi_Min_Rev]
The minimum boundary of the reverse direction element of phase overcurrent protection, the
recommended value is 90 degree.
9. [50/51P.DIR.phi_Max_Rev]
The maximum boundary of the reverse direction element of phase overcurrent protection, the
recommended value is 90 degree.
10. [50/51P.DIR.Opt_PolarizedVolt]
The voltage polarization mode for direction control element of phase overcurrent protection
Upp: phase-to-phase voltage polarized
Up: phase-to-ground voltage polarized
U1: positive-sequence voltage polarized
11. [50/51P.DIR.I_Min]
3 The minimum operating current setting for the direction control element of phase overcurrent
protection, the recommended value is 0.05In.
12. [50/51P.DIR.U_Min]
The minimum operating voltage setting for the direction control element of phase overcurrent
protection, the recommended value is 4V.
13. [50/51P.En_VTS_Blk]
It is a logic setting, which is used to enable or disable the blocking for phase overcurrent protection
during VT circuit abnormal.
When VT circuit fails, phase overcurrent protection will be blocked if the setting is set as “Enabled”,
and phase overcurrent protection is not controlled by direction element and voltage control
element if the setting is set as “Disabled”.
14. [50/51P.HMB.K_Hm2]
It is the percent setting of the harmonic control element of phase overcurrent protection.
In order to prevent mal-operation of the phase overcurrent protection due to the energizing of
transformer, second harmonic element can be used to block phase overcurrent protection. When
the percentage of second harmonic component to fundamental component of phase current is
larger than the percent setting, harmonic blocking element operates to block phase overcurrent
protection if corresponding logic setting is enabled ([50/51Px.En_Hm_Blk] is set as "Enabled").
If second harmonic component of phase current is lower than the minimum operating current
(0.04In) then harmonic calculation is not carried out and harmonic blocking element does not
operate.
The recommended value is 0.15.
15. [50/51P.HMB.I_Rls]
It is the current setting for releasing the harmonic control element of phase overcurrent protection.
It shall be larger than the maximum possible inrush current of the transformer. It is recommended
to be set as 20In.
16. [50/51P.HMB.Opt_Blk]
The setting is used to select the harmonic blocking mode of phase overcurrent protection.
PhaseBlk: phase blocking
CrossBlk: cross blocking
MaxPhaseBlk: maximum phase blocking

3-6 PCS-9611S Feeder Relay

Date: 2020-12-30
 3 Protection Settings

17. [50/51Px.I_Set]
It is the current setting of stage x (x=1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6) of phase overcurrent protection.
⚫ For line protection:
1) In order to guarantee selectivity, the operating range of instantaneous overcurrent protection
shall not exceed the end of protected line. The operating current of instantaneous overcurrent
protection shall be larger than the maximum short-circuit current when a fault happens at the
end of the protected line.
(3)
[50/51𝑃𝑥. 𝐼_𝑆𝑒𝑡] = 𝐾𝑟𝑒𝑙 × 𝐼𝑘.𝑚𝑎𝑥
Where:
Ik.max is the maximum short-circuit current value measured at the location where the device is
installed in case of short-circuit fault happens at the end of the protected line.
Krel is the reliability coefficient, considering the relay setting value error, the short-circuit current
calculation error, as well as the influence of non-periodic component on protection in short-circuit
current, taking 1.2~1.3 or above. 3
2) Phase overcurrent protection with definite-time delay need to protect the whole line and
cooperate with phase overcurrent protection of the adjacent line. According to the specific
condition of the adjacent line protection, the setting calculation principle is as follows:
In coordination with instantaneous overcurrent protection of the adjacent lines
𝐼
[50/51𝑃𝑥. 𝐼_𝑆𝑒𝑡] = 𝐾𝑟𝑒𝑙 × 𝐾𝑏.𝑚𝑎𝑥 × 𝐼𝑜𝑝.1
Where:
𝐾𝑏.𝑚𝑎𝑥 is the branch coefficient of current, which is equal to the ratio of the current passing
through the device to the current passing through the faulty line during an earth fault at the end of
the protected zone of the coordinated stage of overcurrent protection of the power line.
𝐼
𝐼𝑜𝑝.1 is the operating current of instantaneous overcurrent protection of the adjacent lines.
Krel is the reliability coefficient, taking 1.1 or above.
3) When the next stage is transformer with differential protection, the definite-time overcurrent
protection shall be set and calculated according to the following formula.
(3)
[50/51𝑃𝑥. 𝐼_𝑆𝑒𝑡] = 𝐾𝑜𝑝 × 𝐼𝑘.𝑚𝑎𝑥
Where:
Ik.max: for the overcurrent protection which is allowed to deeper into transformer, when it represents
fault at other sides of transformer, the maximum three-phase short-circuit current of the line.
Kop: the coordination coefficient, Kop ≥ 1.3.
4) Due to the operation time is longer if the fault is closer to the power supply source, the IDMT
overcurrent protection is used to shorten the operation time, the setting calculation principle is
as follows:
𝐾𝑟𝑒𝑙 × 𝐾𝑠𝑠
[50/51𝑃𝑥. 𝐼_𝑆𝑒𝑡] = 𝐼𝐿.𝑚𝑎𝑥
𝐾𝑟𝑒
Where:
Krel: the reliability coefficient (coordination coefficient), taking 1.2;
Kre: the returning coefficient, taking 0.9~0.95;
Kss: the self-starting coefficient, determined by specific connection and load property via network;
IL.max: the maximum load current through the protected area.
5) To be used as overload alarm

PCS-9611S Feeder Relay 3-7

Date: 2020-12-30
 3 Protection Settings

It can be taken as 1.1 times of the rated current.

⚫ For transformer protection:
1) The setting is set according to the rated current of transformer.
It shall be greater than the rated current of the transformer:
𝐾𝑟𝑒𝑙
[50/51𝑃𝑥. 𝐼_𝑆𝑒𝑡] = 𝐼
𝐾𝑟 2𝑛
Where:
𝐾𝑟𝑒𝑙 is the reliability coefficient, which can be taken as 1.2.
𝐾𝑟 is the drop-off coefficient, which can be taken as 0.95.
𝐼2𝑛 is the rated current of the transformer (secondary value).
2) The setting is set in coordination with other overcurrent protection.
[50/51𝑃𝑥. 𝐼_𝑆𝑒𝑡] = 𝐾𝑝 × 𝐾𝑏𝑟 × 𝐼𝑑𝑧
3
Where:
𝐾𝑝 is the coordination coefficient, which can be taken as 1.15-1.25.
𝐾𝑏𝑟 is the branch coefficient of current, which is equal to the ratio of the current passing through
the device to the current passing through the faulty line during a fault at the end of protection
section of the coordinated stage of overcurrent protection of the power line.
𝐼𝑑𝑧 is the current setting of overcurrent protection to be coordinated.
3) The setting should be sensitive enough during a busbar fault at local end.
𝐼𝑚𝑖𝑛
[50/51𝑃𝑥. 𝐼_𝑆𝑒𝑡] =
𝐾𝑠𝑒𝑛
Where:
𝐾𝑠𝑒𝑛 is the sensitivity coefficient, which can be set as 1.5.
𝐼𝑚𝑖𝑛 is the minimum current value during a short-circuit fault at the local busbar.
When the coordination is not considered, the recommended value is:
𝐾𝑟𝑒𝑙
[50/51𝑃𝑥. 𝐼_𝑆𝑒𝑡] = × 𝐼𝑛
𝐾𝑟
Where:
𝐾𝑟𝑒𝑙 =1.2
𝐾𝑟 =0.95
4) For inverse-time characteristic
The setting is set according to the rated current of transformer, which can be set equal to the
minimum current value of definite-time phase overcurrent protection.
When it coordinates with other overcurrent protection, the recommended value is:
[50/51𝑃𝑥. 𝐼_𝑆𝑒𝑡] = 𝐾𝑝 × 𝐼𝑑𝑧
Where:
𝐾𝑝 is the coordinating coefficient, which can be taken as 1.15~1.25.
𝐼𝑑𝑧 is the current setting of overcurrent protection to be coordinated.
5) To be used as overload alarm
It can be taken as 1.1 times of the rated current.

3-8 PCS-9611S Feeder Relay

Date: 2020-12-30
 3 Protection Settings

18. [50/51Px.t_Op]
It is the time delay for stage x (x=1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6) of definite-time phase overcurrent protection.
⚫ For line protection:
1) When the primary operating current is in coordination with instantaneous overcurrent
protection of adjacent line, the operating time of definite-time phase overcurrent protection is:
[50/51Px.t_Op]＝t1+Δt
Where:
t1 is the fixed operating time of instantaneous overcurrent protection of adjacent line, about
0.06~0.1s, or neglected sometimes
Δt is the time difference, it usually takes 0.3s.
2) When the operating current is in coordination with coordinated stage of phase overcurrent
protection of adjacent line, the operating time of definite-time phase overcurrent protection is:
[50/51Px.t_Op]＝t2+Δt 3
Where:
t2 is the fixed operating time of the coordinated stage of phase overcurrent protection of adjacent
line.
Δt is the time difference, it usually takes 0.3s.
⚫ For transformer protection:
1) In coordination with the main protection of the transformer:
[50/51Px.t_Op]=0.5s
2) In coordination with phase-to-phase overcurrent protection of the line:
[50/51Px.t_Op]=tmax+Δt
Where:
tmax is the maximum time delay for line protection.
Δt is the time difference which can be taken as 0.3~0.5.
3) For the time delays of the different stage, the following formula is recommended.
tn+1=tn+Δt
Where:
tn+1 is the time delay of stage n+1.
tn is the time delay of stage n.
Δt is the time difference which can be taken as 0.3~0.5s.
19. [50/51Px.t_DropOut]
The drop-out time setting of stage x (x=1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6) of phase overcurrent protection, the default
value is 0.
This setting is valid when definite-time drop-out characteristic is selected. When 𝐼<0.95*𝐼𝑝 , the
protection drops out with a time delay of tdr, and the drop-out characteristic curve is shown in the
following figure:

PCS-9611S Feeder Relay 3-9

Date: 2020-12-30
 3 Protection Settings

Start time

I>Ip

Start
signal

Operating
signal

Protection

3 Operating threshold operate

Operating
counter

t dr t dr t dr
Dropout time setting
Dropout time
Dropout time

20. [50/51Px.En_Volt_Blk]
It is a logic setting, which is used to enable or disable voltage control element for stage x (x=1, 2, 3,
4, 5, 6) of phase overcurrent protection.
21. [50/51Px.Opt_Dir]
It is used to select the direction mode for stage x of phase overcurrent protection. (x=1, 2, 3, 4, 5,
6)
Non_Directional: no direction
Forward: forward direction
Reverse: reverse direction
22. [50/51Px.En_Hm_Blk]
It is a logic setting, which is used to enable or disable second harmonic blocking for stage x (x=1, 2,
3, 4, 5, 6) of phase overcurrent protection.
23. [50/51Px.En]
It is a logic setting, which is used to enable or disable stage x (x=1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6) of phase
overcurrent protection.
24. [50/51Px.Opt_Trp/Alm]
It is a logic setting, which is used to enable stage x (x=1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6) of phase overcurrent
protection operate to trip or alarm.
Trp: for tripping purpose
Alm: for alarm purpose.
25. [50/51Px.Opt_Curve]
It is used to select the characteristic curve for stage x (x=1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6) of phase overcurrent

3-10 PCS-9611S Feeder Relay

Date: 2020-12-30
 3 Protection Settings

protection.
Because the operating time is longer if the fault is closer to opposite power supply source,
inverse-time phase overcurrent protection is used to shorten the operating time.
The user can select the operating characteristic from various inverse-time characteristic curves by
the setting [50/51Px.Opt_Curve], and parameters of available characteristics for selection are
shown in the following table.

50/51Px.Opt_Curve Time Characteristic k α c tr

ANSIE ANSI Extremely Inverse 28.2 2.0 0.1217 29.1

ANSIV ANSI Very inverse 19.61 2.0 0.491 21.6

ANSIN ANSI Normal Inverse 0.0086 0.02 0.0185 0.46

ANSIM ANSI Moderately Inverse 0.0515 0.02 0.114 4.85

ANSIDefTime ANSI Definite Time - - - -

3
ANSILTE ANSI Long Time Extremely Inverse 64.07 2.0 0.25 30

ANSILTV ANSI Long Time Very Inverse 28.55 2.0 0.712 13.46

ANSILT ANSI Long Time Inverse 0.086 0.02 0.185 4.6

IECN IEC Normal Inverse 0.14 0.02 0 -

IECV IEC Very inverse 13.5 1.0 0 -

IEC IEC Inverse 0.14 0.02 0 -

IECE IEC Extremely inverse 80.0 2.0 0 -

IECST IEC Short-time inverse 0.05 0.04 0 -

IECLT IEC Long-time inverse 120.0 1.0 0 -

IECDefTime IEC Definite Time - - - -

UserDefine Programmable

If all available curves do not comply with user application, user may configure
[50/51Px.Opt_Curve] as “UserDefine” to customize the inverse-time curve characteristic, and
constants “K”, “α” and “C”.
26. [50/51Px.Opt_Curve_DropOut]
The setting for selecting the drop-out characteristic curve of stage x (x=1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6) of phase
overcurrent protection.
Inst: instantaneous drop-out
DefTime: definite-time drop-out
IDMT: inverse-time drop-out
When the operating curve is selected as definite-time, IEC inverse-time or user-defined
inverse-time characteristic, the drop-out characteristic can only be selected as instantaneous
drop-out or definite-time drop-out. If inverse-time drop-out is selected, the alarm signal
"Fail_Settings" will be issued and the device will be blocked.
When the operating curve is selected as ANSI inverse-time characteristic, the drop-out
characteristic can be selected as instantaneous drop-out, definite-time drop-out and ANSI
inverse-time drop-out.
⚫ Instantaneous drop-out

PCS-9611S Feeder Relay 3-11

Date: 2020-12-30
 3 Protection Settings

When 𝐼<0.95*𝐼𝑝 , the protection drops out immediately.

⚫ Definite-time drop-out
When 𝐼<0.95*𝐼𝑝 , the protection drops out with a time delay of tdr (i.e. the value of the setting
[50/51Px.t_DropOut]), and the drop-out characteristic curve is shown in the following figure:

Start time

I>Ip

Start
signal

3 Operating
signal

Protection
Operating threshold operate

Operating
counter

t dr t dr t dr
Dropout time setting
Dropout time
Dropout time

⚫ Inverse-time drop-out
When 𝐼>𝐼𝑝 , the inverse-time operating accumulator begins to accumulate, the accumulated value
after 𝑡𝑝 (Assuming 𝑡𝑝 is less than the theoretical operating time) is calculated according to the
following equation:
𝑡𝑝
1
𝐼𝑡𝑝 = ∫ 𝑑𝑡
𝑡(𝐼)
0

At this time, if 𝐼<0.95*𝐼𝑝 , the protection element starts drop-out, and the drop-out characteristic
meets the following equation:
𝑇𝑅
1
𝐼𝑡𝑝 − ∫ 𝑑𝑡 = 0
𝑡𝑅 (𝐼)
0

Where:
𝑇𝑅 is the drop-out time;
𝑡𝑅 (𝐼) is the drop-out characteristic equation
When 𝐼<0.95*𝐼𝑝 , the inverse-time drop-out characteristic equation is as follows:
𝑡𝑟
𝑡𝑅 = { } × 𝑇𝑀𝑆
1 − (𝐼/𝐼𝑝 )2

3-12 PCS-9611S Feeder Relay

Date: 2020-12-30
 3 Protection Settings

Where:
𝐼𝑝 is the current setting [50/51Px.I_Set];
TMS is the inverse-time factor, i.e. the setting [50/51Px.TMS];
𝑡𝑟 is the drop-out time coefficient, it is the drop-out time required for the current to drop to 0 after
the protection operates.
𝐼 is the measured current.
When 0.95*𝐼𝑝 < 𝐼 <𝐼𝑝 , the accumulator will neither accumulate nor drop out
The inverse time drop-out characteristic curve is shown in the figure below.

tr

IP I

The correspondence between the start signal, operating signal, and operating accumulator in the
inverse-time drop-out characteristic is shown in the figure below:
Start time

I>Ip

Start
signal

Operating
signal

Protection
Operating threshold operate

Operating
counter

tr Dropout time coefficient

Dropout time
Dropout time

PCS-9611S Feeder Relay 3-13

Date: 2020-12-30
 3 Protection Settings

27. [50/51Px.TMS]
It is the time multiplier setting for stage x (x=1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6) of inverse-time phase overcurrent
protection.
This setting can be deduced according to the operating time required for the inverse-time
overcurrent protection.
28. [50/51Px.tmin]
It is minimum operating time for stage x (x=1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6) of inverse-time phase overcurrent
protection.
When inverse-time characteristic is selected, if the calculated operating time is less than the
setting [50/51Px.tmin], then the operating time changes to the value of the setting [50/51Px.tmin]
automatically.
If it coordinates with other protections, it can be set as “tmin+Δt”.
Where:
3 tmin is the minimum operation time of other protections.
Δt is the time difference which can be taken as 0.3~0.5.
If it is used independently, the recommended value is 0.02s.
29. [50/51Px.K]
It is constant “K” for stage x (x=1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6) of customized inverse-time characteristic phase
overcurrent protection.
It shall be set according to the characteristic of inverse-time phase overcurrent protection.
Only when the setting [50/51Px.Opt_Curve] is set as “UserDefine”, i.e. the user-defined
inverse-time characteristic is selected, the setting [50/51Px.K] is useful.
30. [50/51Px.Alpha]
It is constant “α” for stage x (x=1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6) of customized inverse-time characteristic phase
overcurrent protection.
It shall be set according to the characteristic of inverse-time phase overcurrent protection.
Only when the setting [50/51Px.Opt_Curve] is set as “UserDefine”, i.e. the user-defined
inverse-time characteristic is selected, the setting [50/51Px. Alpha] is useful.
31. [50/51Px.C]
It is constant “C” for stage x (x=1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6) of customized inverse-time characteristic phase
overcurrent protection.
It shall be set according to the characteristic of inverse-time phase overcurrent protection.
Only when the setting [50/51Px.Opt_Curve] is set as “UserDefine”, i.e. the user-defined
inverse-time characteristic is selected, the setting [50/51Px.C] is useful.

3.2 Earth Fault Overcurrent Protection

Access path in device LCD:
MainMenuSettingsProtection SettingsROC Settings
Access path in PCS-Studio configuration tool:
Project NodeIED NodeSettingGroupXProtection_SettingsROC_Settings

No. Name Range Unit Step

1 50/51G.DIR.RCA -180~179 deg 1

3-14 PCS-9611S Feeder Relay

Date: 2020-12-30
 3 Protection Settings

2 50/51G.DIR.phi_Min_Fwd 10~90 deg 1

3 50/51G.DIR.phi_Max_Fwd 10~90 deg 1

4 50/51G.DIR.phi_Min_Rev 10~90 deg 1

5 50/51G.DIR.phi_Max_Rev 10~90 deg 1

6 50/51G.DIR.3I0_Min (0.05~1)In - 0.001

7 50/51G.DIR.3U0_Min 1~10 V 0.001

8 50/51G.En_VTS_Blk Disabled; Enabled - -

9 50/51G.HMB.K_Hm2 0.1~1 - 0.001

10 50/51G.HMB.I_Rls 2~150 A 0.001

Ext;
11 50/51G1.Opt_3I0 - -
Cal

12 50/51G1.3I0_Set 0.05~200 A 0.001

3
13 50/51G1.t_Op 0 ~100 s 0.001

14 50/51G1.t_DropOut 0 ~100 s 0.001

15 50/51G1.Opt_Dir Non_Directional; Forward; Reverse - -

16 50/51G1.En_Hm_Blk Disabled; Enabled - -

17 50/51G1.En Disabled; Enabled - -

18 50/51G1.Opt_Trp/Alm Trp; Alm - -

ANSIE; ANSIV; ANSIN; ANSIM;

ANSIDefTime; ANSILTE; ANSILTV;
19 50/51G1.Opt_Curve ANSILT; IECN; IECV; IEC; IECE; - -
IECST; IECLT; IECDefTime; Resv;
UserDefine
20 50/51G1.Opt_Curve_DropOut Inst; DefTime; IDMT - -

21 50/51G1.TMS 0.04~ 20 - 0.001

22 50/51G1.tmin 0 ~10 s 0.001

23 50/51G1.K 0.001~120 - 0.0001

24 50/51G1.Alpha 0.01 ~3 - 0.0001

25 50/51G1.C 0 ~1 - 0.0001
Ext;
26 50/51G2.Opt_3I0 - -
Cal
27 50/51G2.3I0_Set 0.05~200 A 0.001

28 50/51G2.t_Op 0 ~100 s 0.001

29 50/51G2.t_DropOut 0 ~100 s 0.001

30 50/51G2.Opt_Dir Non_Directional; Forward; Reverse - -

31 50/51G2.En_Hm_Blk Disabled; Enabled - -

32 50/51G2.En Disabled; Enabled - -

33 50/51G2.Opt_Trp/Alm Trp; Alm - -

PCS-9611S Feeder Relay 3-15

Date: 2020-12-30
 3 Protection Settings

ANSIE; ANSIV; ANSIN; ANSIM;

ANSIDefTime; ANSILTE; ANSILTV;
34 50/51G2.Opt_Curve ANSILT; IECN; IECV; IEC; IECE; - -
IECST; IECLT; IECDefTime; Resv;
UserDefine
35 50/51G2.Opt_Curve_DropOut Inst; DefTime; IDMT - -

36 50/51G2.TMS 0.04~ 20 - 0.001

37 50/51G2.tmin 0 ~10 s 0.001

38 50/51G2.K 0.001~120 - 0.0001

39 50/51G2.Alpha 0.01 ~3 - 0.0001

40 50/51G2.C 0 ~1 - 0.0001
Ext;
41 50/51G3.Opt_3I0 - -
3 Cal
42 50/51G3.3I0_Set 0.05~200 A 0.001

43 50/51G3.t_Op 0 ~100 s 0.001

44 50/51G3.t_DropOut 0 ~100 s 0.001

45 50/51G3.Opt_Dir Non_Directional; Forward; Reverse - -

46 50/51G3.En_Hm_Blk Disabled; Enabled - -

47 50/51G3.En Disabled; Enabled - -

48 50/51G3.Opt_Trp/Alm Trp; Alm - -

ANSIE; ANSIV; ANSIN; ANSIM;

ANSIDefTime; ANSILTE; ANSILTV;
49 50/51G3.Opt_Curve ANSILT; IECN; IECV; IEC; IECE; - -
IECST; IECLT; IECDefTime; Resv;
UserDefine
50 50/51G3.Opt_Curve_DropOut Inst; DefTime; IDMT - -

51 50/51G3.TMS 0.04~ 20 - 0.001

52 50/51G3.tmin 0 ~10 s 0.001

53 50/51G3.K 0.001~120 - 0.0001

54 50/51G3.Alpha 0.01 ~3 - 0.0001

55 50/51G3.C 0 ~1 - 0.0001
Ext;
56 50/51G4.Opt_3I0 - -
Cal
57 50/51G4.3I0_Set 0.05~200 A 0.001

58 50/51G4.t_Op 0 ~100 s 0.001

59 50/51G4.t_DropOut 0 ~100 s 0.001

60 50/51G4.Opt_Dir Non_Directional; Forward; Reverse - -

61 50/51G4.En_Hm_Blk Disabled; Enabled - -

62 50/51G4.En Disabled; Enabled - -

3-16 PCS-9611S Feeder Relay

Date: 2020-12-30
 3 Protection Settings

63 50/51G4.Opt_Trp/Alm Trp; Alm - -

ANSIE; ANSIV; ANSIN; ANSIM;

ANSIDefTime; ANSILTE; ANSILTV;
64 50/51G4.Opt_Curve ANSILT; IECN; IECV; IEC; IECE; - -
IECST; IECLT; IECDefTime; Resv;
UserDefine
65 50/51G4.Opt_Curve_DropOut Inst; DefTime; IDMT - -

66 50/51G4.TMS 0.04~ 20 - 0.001

67 50/51G4.tmin 0 ~10 s 0.001

68 50/51G4.K 0.001~120 - 0.0001

69 50/51G4.Alpha 0.01 ~3 - 0.0001

70 50/51G4.C 0 ~1 - 0.0001

71 50/51G5.Opt_3I0
Ext;
- -
3
Cal
72 50/51G5.3I0_Set 0.05~200 A 0.001

73 50/51G5.t_Op 0 ~100 s 0.001

74 50/51G5.t_DropOut 0 ~100 s 0.001

75 50/51G5.Opt_Dir Non_Directional; Forward; Reverse - -

76 50/51G5.En_Hm_Blk Disabled; Enabled - -

77 50/51G5.En Disabled; Enabled - -

78 50/51G5.Opt_Trp/Alm Trp; Alm - -

ANSIE; ANSIV; ANSIN; ANSIM;

ANSIDefTime; ANSILTE; ANSILTV;
79 50/51G5.Opt_Curve ANSILT; IECN; IECV; IEC; IECE; - -
IECST; IECLT; IECDefTime; Resv;
UserDefine
80 50/51G5.Opt_Curve_DropOut Inst; DefTime; IDMT - -

81 50/51G5.TMS 0.04~ 20 - 0.001

82 50/51G5.tmin 0 ~10 s 0.001

83 50/51G5.K 0.001~120 - 0.0001

84 50/51G5.Alpha 0.01 ~3 - 0.0001

85 50/51G5.C 0 ~1 - 0.0001
Ext;
86 50/51G6.Opt_3I0 - -
Cal
87 50/51G6.3I0_Set 0.05~200 A 0.001

88 50/51G6.t_Op 0 ~100 s 0.001

89 50/51G6.t_DropOut 0 ~100 s 0.001

90 50/51G6.Opt_Dir Non_Directional; Forward; Reverse - -

91 50/51G6.En_Hm_Blk Disabled; Enabled - -

PCS-9611S Feeder Relay 3-17

Date: 2020-12-30
 3 Protection Settings

92 50/51G6.En Disabled; Enabled - -

93 50/51G6.Opt_Trp/Alm Trp; Alm - -

ANSIE; ANSIV; ANSIN; ANSIM;

ANSIDefTime; ANSILTE; ANSILTV;
94 50/51G6.Opt_Curve ANSILT; IECN; IECV; IEC; IECE; - -
IECST; IECLT; IECDefTime; Resv;
UserDefine
95 50/51G6.Opt_Curve_DropOut Inst; DefTime; IDMT - -

96 50/51G6.TMS 0.04~ 20 - 0.001

97 50/51G6.tmin 0 ~10 s 0.001

98 50/51G6.K 0.001~120 - 0.0001

99 50/51G6.Alpha 0.01 ~3 - 0.0001

3 100 50/51G6.C 0 ~1 - 0.0001

Earth fault overcurrent protection is provided with six stages, each stage has independent current
setting, time delay and control logic.
1. [50/51G.DIR.RCA]
It is the characteristic angle of directional earth fault element.
By setting the characteristic angle to determine the most sensitive forward angle of zero-sequence
current, using zero-sequence current with zero-sequence voltage to determine the direction of
zero-sequence current in forward direction or reverse direction. For line protection, when the CT
polarity is on the busbar side, the default characteristic angle is 45 degrees.
-U0

[50/51G.DIR.phi_Min_Fwd]

Non-operating I0
area

Operating area in
[50/51G.DIR.phi_Max_Rev] forward direction

[50/51G.DIR.RCA]

Operating area in
reverse direction

[50/51G.DIR.phi_Max_Fwd]

Non-operating
area
[50/51G.DIR.phi_Min_Rev]

2. [50/51G.DIR.phi_Min_Fwd]
The minimum boundary of the forward direction element of earth fault overcurrent protection, the
recommended value is 90 degree.
3. [50/51G.DIR.phi_Max_Fwd]

3-18 PCS-9611S Feeder Relay

Date: 2020-12-30
 3 Protection Settings

The maximum boundary of the forward direction element of earth fault overcurrent protection, the
recommended value is 90 degree.
4. [50/51G.DIR.phi_Min_Rev]
The minimum boundary of the reverse direction element of earth fault overcurrent protection, the
recommended value is 90 degree.
5. [50/51G.DIR.phi_Max_Rev]
The maximum boundary of the reverse direction element of earth fault overcurrent protection, the
recommended value is 90 degree.
6. [50/51G.DIR.3I0_Min]
The minimum operating current setting for the direction control element of earth fault overcurrent
protection, the recommended value is 0.05In.
7. [50/51G.DIR.3U0_Min]
The minimum operating voltage setting for the direction control element of earth fault overcurrent
protection, the recommended value is 4V. If the sensitivity of high resistance grounding fault needs 3
to be considered, the recommended value is 0.5~2V. If it is necessary to cooperate with other
protection with direction element, it is recommended to be 0.5~1V higher than other protection.
8. [50/51G.En_VTS_Blk]
It is a logic setting, which is used to enable or disable the blocking for earth fault overcurrent
protection during VT circuit abnormal.
When VT circuit fails, earth fault overcurrent protection will be blocked if the setting is set as
“Enabled”, and earth fault overcurrent protection is not controlled by direction element if the setting
is set as “Disabled”.
9. [50/51G.HMB.K_Hm2]
It is the percent setting of the harmonic control element of earth fault overcurrent protection.
When the percentage of the second harmonic component to fundamental component of residual
current is larger than the setting [50/51G.HMB.K_Hm2], harmonic blocking element operates to
block earth fault overcurrent protection if corresponding logic setting [50/51Gx.En_Hm_Blk] is set
as “enabled”.
If second harmonic component of residual current is lower than the minimum operating current
(0.04In) then harmonic calculation is not carried out and harmonic blocking element does not
operate.
The recommended value is 0.15.
10. [50/51G.HMB.I_Rls]
It is the current setting of releasing harmonic blocking function of earth fault overcurrent protection.
It shall be larger than the possible maximum inrush current of the transformer. It is recommended
to be set as 20In.
11. [50/51Gx.Opt_3I0]
The setting is used to select the residual current that used for stage x (x=1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6) of earth
fault overcurrent protection.
Ext: the measured residual current
Cal: the calculated residual current
12. [50/51Gx.3I0_Set]
It is the current setting for stage x (x=1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6) of earth fault overcurrent protection.
⚫ For line protection:

PCS-9611S Feeder Relay 3-19

Date: 2020-12-30
 3 Protection Settings

1) When stage x of earth fault overcurrent protection is used as fast protection, the following
conditions should be considered.
⚫ It shall be larger than the maximum residual current under pole disagreement condition.
⚫ It shall be larger than the maximum residual current when internal fault happens at the end of
the line.
Its calculation principle is
[50/51𝐺𝑥. 3𝐼0_𝑆𝑒𝑡] = 𝐾𝑟𝑒𝑙 × 3𝐼0.𝑚𝑎𝑥
Where:
I0.max is the maximum zero-sequence current for an external fault
Krel is the reliability coefficient, it usually takes 1.3 or above
2) When stage x of directional earth fault overcurrent protection is used as definite-time
protection, it should coordinate with the protection of other adjacent line.

3 ⚫ It shall be larger than the maximum residual current under pole disagreement condition.
⚫ It shall coordinate with the measurement element of the adjacent line and ensure enough
sensitivity for the fault happens at the end of the line.
[50/51𝐺𝑥. 3𝐼0_𝑆𝑒𝑡] = 𝐾𝑟𝑒𝑙 × 𝐾𝑏𝑟 × 𝐼0.𝐴𝑑𝑗
Where:
Krel is the reliability coefficient, it usually takes 1.1~1.3
Kbr is the branching coefficient of residual current, which is equal to the ratio of residual current
passing through the device to passing through the faulty line during an earth fault happens at the
end of the protected zone of the coordinated stage of earth fault overcurrent protection of the line.
The maximum value among various operation conditions can be taken.
I0.Adj is the current setting of the coordinated stage of the adjacent line
3) When the earth fault overcurrent protection is used as the standby protection for earth fault of
this line through resistor and earth fault of adjacent elements, and its primary current value
should be not larger than 300A. Under the condition of avoidance from the maximum
unbalance current of three-phase short circuit at other sides of the transformer at the end of
this line, it is necessary to meet the requirement that the fault at the end of the adjacent lines
has enough sensitivity; it is necessary to check the coordination condition between the
definite-time earth fault overcurrent protections of adjacent lines, and the operating time is set
according to the coordination relation.
(3)
[50/51𝐺𝑥. 3𝐼0_𝑆𝑒𝑡] = 𝐾𝑟𝑒𝑙 × 𝐾𝑎𝑝𝑒𝑟 × 𝐾𝑠𝑡 × 𝑓𝑖 × 𝐼𝑜𝑝.1
Where:
𝐾𝑟𝑒𝑙 : the reliability coefficient, it usually takes 1.1 or above;
𝐾𝑎𝑝𝑒𝑟 : the periodic component coefficient, taken as 1.5~2.0;
𝐾𝑠𝑡 : the same type coefficient, taken as 0.5 when the transformer is of the same type;
𝑓𝑖 : amplitude error of transformer, generally it is taken as 0.1;
(3)
𝐼𝑜𝑝.1 : three-phase short circuit current at the end of the line.
4) When the earth fault overcurrent protection is used as inverse-time protection, the calculation
principle is
[50/51𝐺𝑥. 3𝐼0_𝑆𝑒𝑡] = 𝐾𝑝 × 𝐼𝑑𝑧
Where:
𝐾𝑝 is the coordinating coefficient, which can be taken as 1.15~1.25

3-20 PCS-9611S Feeder Relay

Date: 2020-12-30
 3 Protection Settings

𝐼𝑑𝑧 is the current setting of the inverse-time earth fault overcurrent protection to be coordinated
⚫ For transformer protection:
1) Earth fault overcurrent protection of the transformer normally coordinates with the earth fault
overcurrent protection of the line.
[50/51𝐺𝑥. 3𝐼0_𝑆𝑒𝑡] = 𝐾𝑟𝑒𝑙 × 𝐾𝑏𝑟 × 𝐼𝑜𝑝.𝑜
Where:
𝐾𝑏𝑟 is the branching coefficient of residual current, which is equal to ratio of residual current
passing through the device to passing through the faulty line during an earth fault at the end of
protected section of coordinated stage of earth fault protection of the line. Maximum value among
various operation conditions can be taken.
𝐾𝑟𝑒𝑙 is the reliability factor, which is taken as 1.1.
𝐼𝑜𝑝.𝑜 is the setting (secondary value) of the coordinated stage of residual protection of line.
2) The setting should be sensitive enough during a busbar fault at local end.
𝐼𝑚𝑖𝑛
3
[50/51𝐺𝑥. 3𝐼0_𝑆𝑒𝑡] =
𝐾𝑠𝑒𝑛
Where:
𝐾𝑠𝑒𝑛 is the sensitivity coefficient, which can be set as 1.5.
𝐼𝑚𝑖𝑛 is the minimum residual current value during a busbar short-circuit fault at the end.
3) If it is used independently, it should be greater than maximum unbalanced current of the
system. The recommended value is (0.3~0.5)p.u. (p.u. is secondary rated current at relative
side of the transformer.)
4) When it is used as inverse-time protection, the calculation principle is
[50/51𝐺𝑥. 3𝐼0_𝑆𝑒𝑡] = 𝐾𝑝 × 𝐼𝑑𝑧
Where:
𝐾𝑝 is coordinating coefficient, which can be taken as 1.15~1.25.
𝐼𝑑𝑧 is the current setting of inverse-time ROC to be coordinated
5) When it is used for a grounding transformer, it should be larger than the line capacitive current.
13. [50/51Gx.t_Op]
It is the time delay for stage x (x=1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6) of earth fault overcurrent protection.
⚫ For line protection:
1) When definite-time earth fault overcurrent protection coordinates with the adjacent line, this
setting should coordinate with the time delay of earth fault overcurrent protection of the
subordinate line.
Its calculation principle is
[50/51Gx.t_Op] = t 0.Adj + Δt
Where:
t0.Adj is the time delay of the coordinated stage of the adjacent line
Δt is extra time delay, it usually takes 0.3~0.5s
2) If it is used independently, it should be larger than the maximum operation time of system pole
discrepancy.
⚫ For transformer protection:

PCS-9611S Feeder Relay 3-21

Date: 2020-12-30
 3 Protection Settings

1) It coordinates with the corresponding earth fault overcurrent protection of the line.
[50/51Gx.t_Op]=tmax+Δt
Where:
tmax is the maximum operating time delay of coordinated stage of earth fault overcurrent protection
of the line.
Δt is the time difference which can be taken as 0.3~0.5.
2) If it is used independently, it should be greater than the maximum operating time delay of
system pole discrepancy.
3) For the time delays of the different stage, the following formula is recommended.
tn+1=tn+Δt
Where:
tn+1 is the time delay of stage n+1.
3 tn is the time delay of stage n.
Δt is the time difference which can be taken as 0.3~0.5.
14. [50/51Gx.t_DropOut]
The drop-out time setting of stage x (x=1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6) of earth fault overcurrent protection, the
default value is 0.
This setting is valid when definite-time drop-out characteristic is selected. When 𝐼0<0.95*𝐼𝑜𝑝 , the
protection drops out with a time delay of 𝑡𝑑𝑟 (i.e. the value of the setting [50/51Gx.t_DropOut]),
the drop-out characteristic curve is shown in the following figure:

Start time

I0>I0p

Start
signal

Operating
signal

Protection
Operating threshold operate

Operating
counter

t dr t dr t dr
Dropout time setting
Dropout time
Dropout time

15. [50/51Gx.Opt_Dir]
It is used to select the direction mode for stage x (x=1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6) of earth fault overcurrent

3-22 PCS-9611S Feeder Relay

Date: 2020-12-30
 3 Protection Settings

protection.
Non_Directional: no direction
Forward: forward direction
Reverse: reverse direction
16. [50/51Gx.En_Hm_Blk]
It is a logic setting, which is used to enable or disable second harmonic blocking for stage x (x=1, 2,
3, 4, 5, 6) of earth fault overcurrent protection.
17. [50/51Gx.En]
It is a logic setting, which is used to enable or disable stage x (x=1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6) of earth fault
overcurrent protection.
18. [50/51Gx.Opt_Trp/Alm]
It is a logic setting, which is used to enable stage x (x=1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6) of earth overcurrent
protection operate to trip or alarm. 3
Trp: for tripping purpose
Alm: for alarm purpose.
19. [50/51Gx.Opt_Curve]
It is used to select the characteristic curve for stage x (x=1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6) of earth overcurrent
protection.
Earth fault overcurrent protection can support definite-time limit, IEC & ANSI standard inverse time
limit and user-defined inverse-time limit, users can select the wanted operating curve by the
setting [50/51Gx.Opt_Curve], the relationship between the value of the setting and the curve is
shown in the table below.
50/51Gx.Opt_Curve Time Characteristic k α c tr
ANSIE ANSI Extremely Inverse 28.2 2.0 0.1217 29.1
ANSIV ANSI Very inverse 19.61 2.0 0.491 21.6
ANSIN ANSI Normal Inverse 0.0086 0.02 0.0185 0.46
ANSIM ANSI Moderately Inverse 0.0515 0.02 0.114 4.85
ANSIDefTime ANSI Definite Time - - - -
ANSILTE ANSI Long Time Extremely Inverse 64.07 2.0 0.25 30
ANSILTV ANSI Long Time Very Inverse 28.55 2.0 0.712 13.46
ANSILT ANSI Long Time Inverse 0.086 0.02 0.185 4.6
IECN IEC Normal Inverse 0.14 0.02 0 -
IECV IEC Very inverse 13.5 1.0 0 -
IEC IEC Inverse 0.14 0.02 0 -
IECE IEC Extremely inverse 80.0 2.0 0 -
IECST IEC Short-time inverse 0.05 0.04 0 -
IECLT IEC Long-time inverse 120.0 1.0 0 -
IECDefTime IEC Definite Time - - - -
UserDefine Programmable

If all available curves do not comply with user application, user may configure
[50/51Gx.Opt_Curve] as “UserDefine” to customize the inverse-time curve characteristic, and
constants “K”, “α” and “C”.

PCS-9611S Feeder Relay 3-23

Date: 2020-12-30
 3 Protection Settings

20. [50/51Gx.Opt_Curve_DropOut]
The setting is used to select the drop-out characteristic curve of stage x (x=1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6) of earth
fault overcurrent protection.
Inst: instantaneous drop-out
DefTime: definite-time drop-out
IDMT: inverse-time drop-out
When the operating curve is selected as definite-time, IEC inverse-time or user-defined
inverse-time characteristic, the drop-out characteristic can only be selected as instantaneous
drop-out or definite-time drop-out, if inverse-time drop-out is selected, the alarm signal
"Fail_Settings" will be issued and the device will be blocked.
When the operating curve is selected as ANSI inverse-time characteristic, the drop-out
characteristic can be selected as instantaneous drop-out, definite-time drop-out and ANSI
inverse-time drop-out.

3 ⚫ Instantaneous drop-out
When 𝐼0 <0.95*𝐼𝑜𝑝 , the protection drops out immediately.
⚫ Definite-time drop-out
When 𝐼0 <0.95*𝐼𝑜𝑝 , the protection drops out with a time delay of 𝑡𝑑𝑟 (i.e. the value of the setting
[50/51Gx.t_DropOut]), the drop-out characteristic curve is shown in the following figure:

Start time

I0>I0p

Start
signal

Operating
signal

Protection
Operating threshold operate

Operating
counter

t dr t dr t dr
Dropout time setting
Dropout time
Dropout time

⚫ Inverse-time drop-out
When 𝐼0 >𝐼𝑜𝑝 , the inverse-time operating accumulator begins to accumulate, the accumulated
value after 𝑡𝑝 (Assuming 𝑡𝑝 is less than the theoretical operating time) is calculated according to
the following equation:

3-24 PCS-9611S Feeder Relay

Date: 2020-12-30
 3 Protection Settings
𝑡𝑝
1
𝐼𝑡𝑝 = ∫ 𝑑𝑡
𝑡(𝐼0 )
0

At this time, if 𝐼0 <0.95*𝐼𝑜𝑝 , the protection element starts drop-out, and the drop-out characteristic
meets the following equation:
𝑇𝑅
1
𝐼𝑡𝑝 − ∫ 𝑑𝑡 = 0
𝑡𝑅 (𝐼)
0

Where:
𝑇𝑅 is the drop-out time;
𝑡𝑅 (𝐼) is the drop-out characteristic equation
When 𝐼0 <0.95*𝐼𝑜𝑝 , the inverse-time drop-out characteristic equation is as follows:

𝑡𝑅 = {
𝑡𝑟
1 − (𝐼0 /𝐼0𝑝 )2
} × 𝑇𝑀𝑆 3
Where:
I0P is the current setting [50/51Gx.3I0_Set];
TMS is the inverse-time factor, i.e. the setting [50/51Gx.TMS];
𝑡𝑟 is the drop-out time coefficient, it is the drop-out time required for the current to drop to 0 after
the protection operates.
𝐼0 is the measured current.
When 0.95*𝐼𝑜𝑝 <𝐼0 <𝐼𝑜𝑝 , the accumulator will neither accumulate nor drop out
The inverse time drop-out characteristic curve is shown in the figure below.

tr

I0 P I0

The correspondence between the start signal, operating signal, and operating accumulator in the
inverse-time drop-out characteristic is shown in the figure below:

PCS-9611S Feeder Relay 3-25

Date: 2020-12-30
 3 Protection Settings

Start time

I0>I0p

Start
signal

Operating
signal

Protection
Operating threshold operate

Operating

3 counter

tr Dropout time coefficient

Dropout time
Dropout time

21. [50/51Gx.TMS]
It is the time multiplier setting for stage x (x=1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6) of inverse-time earth fault overcurrent
protection.
This setting can be deduced according to the operating time required for the inverse-time earth
fault overcurrent protection.
22. [50/51Gx.tmin]
It is the minimum operating time for stage x (x=1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6) of inverse-time earth fault
overcurrent protection.
When inverse-time characteristic is selected, if the calculated operating time is less than the
setting [50/51Gx.tmin], then the operating time changes to the value of the setting [50/51Gx.tmin]
automatically.
If it coordinates with other protections, it can be set as “tmin+Δt”.
Where:
tmin is the minimum operation time of other protections.
Δt is the time difference which can be taken as 0.3~0.5.
If it is used independently, the recommended value is 0.02s.
23. [50/51Gx.K]
It is constant “K” for stage x (x=1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6) of customized inverse-time characteristic earth fault
overcurrent protection.
It shall be set according to the characteristic of inverse-time earth fault overcurrent protection.
Only when the setting [50/51Gx.Opt_Curve] is set as “UserDefine”, i.e. the user-defined
inverse-time characteristic is selected, the setting [50/51Gx.K] is useful.
24. [50/51Gx.Alpha]
It is constant “α” for stage x (x=1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6) of customized inverse-time characteristic earth fault
overcurrent protection.

3-26 PCS-9611S Feeder Relay

Date: 2020-12-30
 3 Protection Settings

It shall be set according to the characteristic of inverse-time earth fault overcurrent protection.
Only when the setting [50/51Gx.Opt_Curve] is set as “UserDefine”, i.e. the user-defined
inverse-time characteristic is selected, the setting [50/51Gx.Alpha] is useful.
25. [50/51Gx.C]
It is constant “C” for stage x (x=1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6) of customized inverse-time characteristic earth fault
overcurrent protection.
It shall be set according to the characteristic of inverse-time earth fault overcurrent protection.
Only when the setting [50/51Gx.Opt_Curve] is set as “UserDefine”, i.e. the user-defined
inverse-time characteristic is selected, the setting [50/51Gx.C] is useful.

3.3 Another Group of Earth Fault Overcurrent Protection

Access path in device LCD:
MainMenuSettingsProtection SettingsROC2 Settings
Access path in PCS-Studio configuration tool: 3
Project NodeIED NodeSettingGroupXProtection_SettingsROC2_Settings

No. Name Range Unit Step

1 A.50/51G1.3I0_Set 0.05~200 A 0.001

2 A.50/51G1.t_Op 0 ~100 s 0.001

3 A.50/51G1.t_DropOut 0 ~100 s 0.001

4 A.50/51G1.En Disabled; Enabled - -

5 A.50/51G1.Opt_Trp/Alm Trp; Alm - -

ANSIE; ANSIV; ANSIN; ANSIM;

ANSIDefTime; ANSILTE; ANSILTV;
6 A.50/51G1.Opt_Curve ANSILT; IECN; IECV; IEC; IECE; - -
IECST; IECLT; IECDefTime; Resv;
UserDefine

7 A.50/51G1.Opt_Curve_DropOut Inst; DefTime; IDMT - -

8 A.50/51G1.TMS 0.04~ 20 - 0.001

9 A.50/51G1.tmin 0 ~10 s 0.001

10 A.50/51G1.K 0.001~120 - 0.0001

11 A.50/51G1.Alpha 0.01 ~3 - 0.0001

12 A.50/51G1.C 0 ~1 - 0.0001

13 A.50/51G2.3I0_Set 0.05~200 A 0.001

14 A.50/51G2.t_Op 0 ~100 s 0.001

15 A.50/51G2.t_DropOut 0 ~100 s 0.001

16 A.50/51G2.En Disabled; Enabled - -

17 A.50/51G2.Opt_Trp/Alm Trp; Alm - -

ANSIE; ANSIV; ANSIN; ANSIM;

18 A.50/51G2.Opt_Curve ANSIDefTime; ANSILTE; ANSILTV; - -
ANSILT; IECN; IECV; IEC; IECE;

PCS-9611S Feeder Relay 3-27

Date: 2020-12-30
 3 Protection Settings

IECST; IECLT; IECDefTime; Resv;

UserDefine

19 A.50/51G2.Opt_Curve_DropOut Inst; DefTime; IDMT - -

20 A.50/51G2.TMS 0.04~ 20 - 0.001

21 A.50/51G2.tmin 0 ~10 s 0.001

22 A.50/51G2.K 0.001~120 - 0.0001

23 A.50/51G2.Alpha 0.01 ~3 - 0.0001

24 A.50/51G2.C 0 ~1 - 0.0001

25 A.50/51G3.3I0_Set 0.05~200 A 0.001

26 A.50/51G3.t_Op 0 ~100 s 0.001

27 A.50/51G3.t_DropOut 0 ~100 s 0.001

3 28 A.50/51G3.En Disabled; Enabled - -

29 A.50/51G3.Opt_Trp/Alm Trp; Alm - -

ANSIE; ANSIV; ANSIN; ANSIM;

ANSIDefTime; ANSILTE; ANSILTV;
30 A.50/51G3.Opt_Curve ANSILT; IECN; IECV; IEC; IECE; - -
IECST; IECLT; IECDefTime; Resv;
UserDefine
31 A.50/51G3.Opt_Curve_DropOut Inst; DefTime; IDMT - -

32 A.50/51G3.TMS 0.04~ 20 - 0.001

33 A.50/51G3.tmin 0 ~10 s 0.001

34 A.50/51G3.K 0.001~120 - 0.0001

35 A.50/51G3.Alpha 0.01 ~3 - 0.0001

36 A.50/51G3.C 0 ~1 - 0.0001

37 A.50/51G4.3I0_Set 0.05~200 A 0.001

38 A.50/51G4.t_Op 0 ~100 s 0.001

39 A.50/51G4.t_DropOut 0 ~100 s 0.001

40 A.50/51G4.En Disabled; Enabled - -

41 A.50/51G4.Opt_Trp/Alm Trp; Alm - -

ANSIE; ANSIV; ANSIN; ANSIM;

ANSIDefTime; ANSILTE; ANSILTV;
42 A.50/51G4.Opt_Curve ANSILT; IECN; IECV; IEC; IECE; - -
IECST; IECLT; IECDefTime; Resv;
UserDefine
43 A.50/51G4.Opt_Curve_DropOut Inst; DefTime; IDMT - -

44 A.50/51G4.TMS 0.04~ 20 - 0.001

45 A.50/51G4.tmin 0 ~10 s 0.001

46 A.50/51G4.K 0.001~120 - 0.0001

3-28 PCS-9611S Feeder Relay

Date: 2020-12-30
 3 Protection Settings

47 A.50/51G4.Alpha 0.01 ~3 - 0.0001

48 A.50/51G4.C 0 ~1 - 0.0001

49 A.50/51G5.3I0_Set 0.05~200 A 0.001

50 A.50/51G5.t_Op 0 ~100 s 0.001

51 A.50/51G5.t_DropOut 0 ~100 s 0.001

52 A.50/51G5.En Disabled; Enabled - -

53 A.50/51G5.Opt_Trp/Alm Trp; Alm - -

ANSIE; ANSIV; ANSIN; ANSIM;

ANSIDefTime; ANSILTE; ANSILTV;
54 A.50/51G5.Opt_Curve ANSILT; IECN; IECV; IEC; IECE; - -
IECST; IECLT; IECDefTime; Resv;

55 A.50/51G5.Opt_Curve_DropOut
UserDefine
Inst; DefTime; IDMT - -
3
56 A.50/51G5.TMS 0.04~ 20 - 0.001

57 A.50/51G5.tmin 0 ~10 s 0.001

58 A.50/51G5.K 0.001~120 - 0.0001

59 A.50/51G5.Alpha 0.01 ~3 - 0.0001

60 A.50/51G5.C 0 ~1 - 0.0001

61 A.50/51G6.3I0_Set 0.05~200 A 0.001

62 A.50/51G6.t_Op 0 ~100 s 0.001

63 A.50/51G6.t_DropOut 0 ~100 s 0.001

64 A.50/51G6.En Disabled; Enabled - -

65 A.50/51G6.Opt_Trp/Alm Trp; Alm - -

ANSIE; ANSIV; ANSIN; ANSIM;

ANSIDefTime; ANSILTE; ANSILTV;
66 A.50/51G6.Opt_Curve ANSILT; IECN; IECV; IEC; IECE; - -
IECST; IECLT; IECDefTime; Resv;
UserDefine
67 A.50/51G6.Opt_Curve_DropOut Inst; DefTime; IDMT - -

68 A.50/51G6.TMS 0.04~ 20 - 0.001

69 A.50/51G6.tmin 0 ~10 s 0.001

70 A.50/51G6.K 0.001~120 - 0.0001

71 A.50/51G6.Alpha 0.01 ~3 - 0.0001

72 A.50/51G6.C 0 ~1 - 0.0001

Another group of earth fault overcurrent protection is provided with six stages, each stage has
independent current setting, time delay and control logic.
1. [A.50/51Gx.3I0_Set]
It is the current setting for stage x (x=1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6) of another group of earth fault overcurrent
protection.

PCS-9611S Feeder Relay 3-29

Date: 2020-12-30
 3 Protection Settings

For line protection:

1) When stage x of another group of earth fault overcurrent protection is used as fast protection,
the following conditions should be considered.
⚫ It shall be larger than the maximum residual current under pole disagreement condition.
⚫ It shall be larger than the maximum residual current when internal fault happens at the end of
the line.
Its calculation principle is
[𝐴. 50/51𝐺𝑥. 3𝐼0_𝑆𝑒𝑡] = 𝐾𝑟𝑒𝑙 × 3𝐼0.𝑚𝑎𝑥
Where:
I0.max is the maximum zero-sequence current for an external fault
Krel is the reliability coefficient, it usually takes 1.3 or above
2) When stage x of another group of earth fault overcurrent protection is used as definite-time
3 protection, it should coordinate with the protection of other adjacent line.
⚫ It shall be larger than the maximum residual current under pole disagreement condition.
⚫ It shall coordinate with the measurement element of the adjacent line and ensure enough
sensitivity for the fault happens at the end of the line.
[𝐴.50/51Gx.3I0_Set] = 𝐾rel × 𝐾br × 𝐼0.Adj

Where:
Krel is the reliability coefficient, it usually takes 1.1~1.3
Kbr is the branching coefficient of residual current, which is equal to the ratio of residual current
passing through the device to passing through the faulty line during an earth fault happens at the
end of the protected zone of the coordinated stage of earth fault overcurrent protection of the line.
The maximum value among various operation conditions can be taken
I0.Adj is the current setting of the coordinated stage of the adjacent line
3) When another group of earth fault overcurrent protection is used as inverse-time protection,
the calculation principle is
[𝐴. 50/51𝐺𝑥. 3𝐼0_𝑆𝑒𝑡] = 𝐾𝑝 × 𝐼𝑑𝑧
Where:
𝐾𝑝 is the coordinating coefficient, which can be taken as 1.15~1.25
𝐼𝑑𝑧 is the current setting of the inverse-time earth fault overcurrent protection to be coordinated
For transformer protection:
1) Earth fault protection of the transformer normally coordinates with the earth fault protection of
the line.
[𝐴.50/51Gx.3I0_Set] = 𝐾rel × 𝐾br × 𝐼op.0
Where:
Kbr is the branching coefficient of residual current, which is equal to ratio of residual current
passing through the device to passing through the faulty line during an earth fault at the end of
protected section of coordinated stage of earth fault protection of the line. Maximum value among
various operation conditions can be taken.
𝐾rel is the reliability factor, which is taken as 1.1.
𝐼op.0 is the setting (secondary value) of the coordinated stage of residual protection of line.
2) The setting should be sensitive enough during a busbar fault at local end.

3-30 PCS-9611S Feeder Relay

Date: 2020-12-30
 3 Protection Settings

𝐼min
[𝐴.50/51Gx.3I0_Set] =
𝐾sen
Where:
𝐾sen is the sensitivity coefficient, which can be set as 1.5.
𝐼min is the minimum residual current value during a busbar short-circuit fault at the end.
3) If it is used independently, it should be greater than maximum unbalanced current of the
system. The recommended value is (0.3~0.5)p.u. (p.u. is secondary rated current at relative
side of the transformer.)
4) When it is used as inverse-time protection, the calculation principle is
[𝐴. 50/51𝐺𝑥. 3𝐼0_𝑆𝑒𝑡] = 𝐾𝑝 × 𝐼𝑑𝑧
Where:
𝐾𝑝 is coordinating coefficient, which can be taken as 1.15~1.25.
𝐼𝑑𝑧 is the current setting of inverse-time earth fault overcurrent protection to be coordinated 3
5) If it is used for a grounding transformer, it should be larger than the line capacitor current.
6) If it is used for transformer gap residual current protection, the operating current is related to
the zero-sequence impedance of the transformer and the arc of the gap discharge. Generally,
the primary operating current of the protection takes 100A.
[𝐴. 50/51𝐺𝑥. 3𝐼0_𝑆𝑒𝑡] = 100/(𝐼1𝑛 /𝐼2𝑛 )
2. [A.50/51Gx.t_Op]
It is the time delay for stage x (x=1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6) of another group of earth fault overcurrent
protection.
⚫ For line protection:
1) When definite-time another group of earth fault overcurrent protection coordinates with the
adjacent line, this setting should coordinate with the time delay of earth fault overcurrent
protection of the subordinate line.
Its calculation principle is:
[𝐴.50/51Gx.t_Op] = 𝑡0.Adj + Δt
Where:
t0.Adj is the time delay of the coordinated stage of the adjacent line
Δt is extra time delay, it usually takes 0.3~0.5s
2) If it is used independently, it should be larger than the maximum operation time of system pole
discrepancy.
⚫ For transformer protection:
1) It coordinates with the corresponding earth fault protection of the line.
[A.50/51Gx.t_Op]=tmax+Δt
Where:
tmax is the maximum operation time delay of coordinated stage of earth fault protection of the line.
Δt is the time difference which can be taken as 0.3~0.5.
2) If it is used independently, it should be greater than the maximum operation time of system
pole discrepancy.
3) For the time delays of the different stage, the following formula is recommended.

PCS-9611S Feeder Relay 3-31

Date: 2020-12-30
 3 Protection Settings

tn+1=tn+Δt
Where:
tn+1 is the time delay of stage n+1.
tn is the time delay of stage n.
Δt is the time difference which can be taken as 0.3~0.5.
3. [A.50/51Gx.t_DropOut]
The drop-out time setting of stage x (x=1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6) of another group of earth fault overcurrent
protection, the default value is 0.
This setting is valid when definite-time drop-out characteristic is selected. When 𝐼0 <0.95*𝐼𝑜𝑝 , the
protection drops out with a time delay of 𝑡𝑑𝑟 (i.e. the value of the setting [A.50/51Gx.t_DropOut]),
the drop-out characteristic curve is shown in the following figure:

Start time

3 I0>I0p

Start
signal

Operating
signal

Protection
Operating threshold operate

Operating
counter

t dr t dr t dr
Dropout time setting
Dropout time
Dropout time

4. [A.50/51Gx.En]
It is a logic setting, which is used to enable or disable stage x (x=1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6) of another group
of earth fault overcurrent protection.
5. [A.50/51Gx.Opt_Trp/Alm]
It is a logic setting, which is used to enable stage x (x=1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6) of another group of earth
overcurrent protection operate to trip or alarm.
Trp: for tripping purpose
Alm: for alarm purpose.
6. [A.50/51Gx.Opt_Curve]
It is used to select the characteristic curve for stage x (x=1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6) of another group of earth
overcurrent protection.

3-32 PCS-9611S Feeder Relay

Date: 2020-12-30
 3 Protection Settings

Another group of earth fault overcurrent protection can support definite-time limit, IEC & ANSI
standard inverse time limit and user-defined inverse-time limit, users can select the wanted
operating curve by the setting [A.50/51Gx.Opt_Curve], the relationship between the value of the
setting and the curve is shown in the table below.
A.50/51Gx.Opt_Curve Time Characteristic k α c tr
ANSIE ANSI Extremely Inverse 28.2 2.0 0.1217 29.1
ANSIV ANSI Very inverse 19.61 2.0 0.491 21.6
ANSIN ANSI Normal Inverse 0.0086 0.02 0.0185 0.46
ANSIM ANSI Moderately Inverse 0.0515 0.02 0.114 4.85
ANSIDefTime ANSI Definite Time - - - -
ANSILTE ANSI Long Time Extremely Inverse 64.07 2.0 0.25 30
ANSILTV ANSI Long Time Very Inverse 28.55 2.0 0.712 13.46
ANSILT
IECN
ANSI Long Time Inverse
IEC Normal Inverse
0.086
0.14
0.02
0.02
0.185
0
4.6
-
3
IECV IEC Very inverse 13.5 1.0 0 -
IEC IEC Inverse 0.14 0.02 0 -
IECE IEC Extremely inverse 80.0 2.0 0 -
IECST IEC Short-time inverse 0.05 0.04 0 -
IECLT IEC Long-time inverse 120.0 1.0 0 -
IECDefTime IEC Definite Time - - - -
UserDefine Programmable

If all available curves do not comply with user application, user may configure
[A.50/51Gx.Opt_Curve] as “UserDefine” to customize the inverse-time curve characteristic, and
constants “K”, “α” and “C”.
7. [A.50/51Gx.Opt_Curve_DropOut]
The setting is used to select the drop-out characteristic curve of stage x (x=1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6) of
another group of earth fault overcurrent protection.
Inst: instantaneous drop-out
DefTime: definite-time drop-out
IDMT: inverse-time drop-out
When the operating curve is selected as definite-time, IEC inverse-time or user-defined
inverse-time characteristic, the drop-out characteristic can only be selected as instantaneous
drop-out or definite-time drop-out, if inverse-time drop-out is selected, the alarm signal
"Fail_Settings" will be issued and the device will be blocked.
When the operating curve is selected as ANSI inverse-time characteristic, the drop-out
characteristic can be selected as instantaneous drop-out, definite-time drop-out and ANSI
inverse-time drop-out.
⚫ Instantaneous drop-out
When I 0 <0.95* I 0 p , the protection drops out immediately.
⚫ Definite-time drop-out
When I 0 <0.95* I 0 p , the protection drops out with a time delay of tdr (i.e. the value of the setting
[A.50/51Gx.t_DropOut]), the drop-out characteristic curve is shown in the following figure:

PCS-9611S Feeder Relay 3-33

Date: 2020-12-30
 3 Protection Settings

Start time

I0>I0p

Start
signal

Operating
signal

Protection
Operating threshold operate

3
Operating
counter

t dr t dr t dr
Dropout time setting
Dropout time
Dropout time

⚫ Inverse-time drop-out
When I 0 > I 0 p , the inverse-time operating accumulator begins to accumulate, the accumulated
value after t p (Assuming t p is less than the theoretical operating time) is calculated according
to the following equation:
tp
1
Itp =  t(I
0
0
dt
)
At this time, if I 0 <0.95* I 0 p , the protection element starts drop-out, and the drop-out
characteristic meets the following equation:
TR
1
I tp −  dt = 0
t (I )
0 R

Where:
T R is the drop-out time;
tR( I ) is the drop-out characteristic equation
When I 0 <0.95* I 0 p , the inverse-time drop-out characteristic equation is as follows:

 tr 
tR =  2
 TMS
1 − ( I 0 / I 0 P ) 
Where:
I0P is the current setting [A.50/51Gx.3I0_Set];
TMS is the inverse-time factor, i.e. the setting [A.50/51Gx.TMS];

3-34 PCS-9611S Feeder Relay

Date: 2020-12-30
 3 Protection Settings

tr is the drop-out time coefficient, it is the drop-out time required for the current to drop to 0 after
the protection operates.
I 0 is the measured current.
When 0.95* I 0 p < I 0 < I 0 p , the accumulator will neither accumulate nor drop out
The inverse time drop-out characteristic curve is shown in the figure below.

3
tr

I0 P I0

The correspondence between the start signal, operating signal, and operating accumulator in the
inverse-time drop-out characteristic is shown in the figure below:
Start time

I0>I0p

Start
signal

Operating
signal

Protection
Operating threshold operate

Operating
counter

tr Dropout time coefficient

Dropout time
Dropout time

8. [A.50/51Gx.TMS]
It is the time multiplier setting for stage x (x=1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6) of inverse-time another group of earth
fault overcurrent protection.

PCS-9611S Feeder Relay 3-35

Date: 2020-12-30
 3 Protection Settings

This setting can be deduced according to the operating time required for the inverse-time another
group of earth fault overcurrent protection.
9. [A.50/51Gx.tmin]
It is the minimum operating time for stage x (x=1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6) of inverse-time another group of
earth fault overcurrent protection.
When inverse-time characteristic is selected, if the calculated operating time is less than the
setting [A.50/51Gx.tmin], then the operating time changes to the value of the setting
[A.50/51Gx.tmin] automatically.
If it coordinates with other protections, it can be set as “tmin+Δt”.
Where:
tmin is the minimum operation time of other protections.
Δt is the time difference which can be taken as 0.3~0.5.
If it is used independently, the recommended value is 0.02s.
3 10. [A.50/51Gx.K]
It is constant “K” for stage x (x=1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6) of customized inverse-time characteristic another
group of earth fault overcurrent protection.
It shall be set according to the characteristic of another group of inverse-time earth fault
overcurrent protection.
Only when the setting [A.50/51Gx.Opt_Curve] is set as “UserDefine”, i.e. the user-defined
inverse-time characteristic is selected, the setting [A.50/51Gx.K] is useful.
11. [A.50/51Gx.Alpha]
It is constant “α” for stage x (x=1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6) of customized inverse-time characteristic another
group of earth fault overcurrent protection.
It shall be set according to the characteristic of inverse-time another group of earth fault
overcurrent protection.
Only when the setting [A.50/51Gx.Opt_Curve] is set as “UserDefine”, i.e. the user-defined
inverse-time characteristic is selected, the setting [A.50/51Gx.Alpha] is useful.
12. [A.50/51Gx.C]
It is constant “C” for stage x (x=1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6) of customized inverse-time characteristic another
group of earth fault overcurrent protection.
It shall be set according to the characteristic of inverse-time another group of earth fault
overcurrent protection.
Only when the setting [A.50/51Gx.Opt_Curve] is set as “UserDefine”, i.e. the user-defined
inverse-time characteristic is selected, the setting [A.50/51Gx.C] is useful.

3.4 Negative-sequence Overcurrent Protection

Access path in device LCD:
MainMenuSettingsProtection SettingsNegOC Settings
Access path in PCS-Studio configuration tool:
Project NodeIED NodeSettingGroupXProtection_SettingsNegOC_Settings

No. Name Range Unit Step

1 50/51Q.DIR.RCA -180~179 deg 1

3-36 PCS-9611S Feeder Relay

Date: 2020-12-30
 3 Protection Settings

2 50/51Q.DIR.phi_Min_Fwd 10~90 deg 1

3 50/51Q.DIR.phi_Max_Fwd 10~90 deg 1

4 50/51Q.DIR.phi_Min_Rev 10~90 deg 1

5 50/51Q.DIR.phi_Max_Rev 10~90 deg 1

6 50/51Q.DIR.I2_Min (0.05~1)In - 0.001

7 50/51Q.DIR.U2_Min 1.0~10.0 V 0.001

8 50/51Q.En_VTS_Blk Disabled; Enabled - -

9 50/51Q1.I2_Set 0.05~200 A 0.001

10 50/51Q1.t_Op 0.03 ~100 s 0.001

11 50/51Q1.t_DropOut 0 ~100 s 0.001

12 50/51Q1.Opt_Dir Non_Directional; Forward Reverse - - 3

13 50/51Q1.En Disabled; Enabled - -

14 50/51Q1.Opt_Trp/Alm Trp; Alm - -

ANSIE; ANSIV; ANSIN; ANSIM;

ANSIDefTime; ANSILTE; ANSILTV;
15 50/51Q1.Opt_Curve ANSILT; IECN; IECV; IEC; IECE; - -
IECST; IECLT; IECDefTime; Resv;
UserDefine
16 50/51Q1.Opt_Curve_DropOut Inst; DefTime; IDMT - -

17 50/51Q1.TMS 0.04~ 20 - 0.001

18 50/51Q1.tmin 0 ~10 s 0.001

19 50/51Q1.K 0.001~120 - 0.0001

20 50/51Q1.Alpha 0.01 ~3 - 0.0001

21 50/51Q1.C 0 ~1 - 0.0001

22 50/51Q2.I2_Set 0.05~200 A 0.001

23 50/51Q2.t_Op 0.03 ~100 s 0.001

24 50/51Q2.t_DropOut 0 ~100 s 0.001

25 50/51Q2.Opt_Dir Non_Directional; Forward Reverse - -

26 50/51Q2.En Disabled; Enabled - -

27 50/51Q2.Opt_Trp/Alm Trp; Alm - -

ANSIE; ANSIV; ANSIN; ANSIM;

ANSIDefTime; ANSILTE; ANSILTV;
28 50/51Q2.Opt_Curve ANSILT; IECN; IECV; IEC; IECE; - -
IECST; IECLT; IECDefTime; Resv;
UserDefine
29 50/51Q2.Opt_Curve_DropOut Inst; DefTime; IDMT - -

30 50/51Q2.TMS 0.04~ 20 - 0.001

31 50/51Q2.tmin 0 ~10 s 0.001

PCS-9611S Feeder Relay 3-37

Date: 2020-12-30
 3 Protection Settings

32 50/51Q2.K 0.001~120 - 0.0001

33 50/51Q2.Alpha 0.01 ~3 - 0.0001

34 50/51Q2.C 0 ~1 - 0.0001

Negative-sequence overcurrent protection is provided with two stages, each stage has
independent current setting, time delay and control logic.
1. [50/51Q.DIR.RCA]
It is the characteristic angle of directional negative-sequence overcurrent element.
By setting the characteristic angle to determine the most sensitive forward angle of
negative-sequence current, using negative-sequence current with negative-sequence voltage to
determine the direction of negative-sequence current in forward direction or reverse direction. The
default value is 45 degree.
-U2

3
[50/51Q.DIR.phi_Min_Fwd]

Non-operating I2
area
[50/51Q.DIR.phi_Max_Rev]
Operating area in
forward direction

[50/51Q.DIR.RCA]

Operating area in
reverse direction

[50/51Q.DIR.phi_Max_Fwd]
Non-operating
area

[50/51Q.DIR.phi_Min_Rev]

2. [50/51Q.DIR.phi_Min_Fwd]
The minimum boundary of the forward direction element of negative-sequence overcurrent
protection, the recommended value is 90 degree.
3. [50/51Q.DIR.phi_Max_Fwd]
The maximum boundary of the forward direction element of negative-sequence overcurrent
protection, the recommended value is 90 degree.
4. [50/51Q.DIR.phi_Min_Rev]
The minimum boundary of the reverse direction element of negative-sequence overcurrent
protection, the recommended value is 90 degree.
5. [50/51Q.DIR.phi_Max_Rev]
The maximum boundary of the reverse direction element of negative-sequence overcurrent
protection, the recommended value is 90 degree.
6. [50/51Q.DIR.I2_Min]
The minimum operating current setting for the direction control element of negative-sequence

3-38 PCS-9611S Feeder Relay

Date: 2020-12-30
 3 Protection Settings

overcurrent protection, the recommended value is 0.05In.

7. [50/51Q.DIR.U2_Min]
The minimum operating voltage setting for the direction control element of negative-sequence
overcurrent protection, the recommended value is 4V.
8. [50/51Q.DIR.En_VTS_Blk]
It is a logic setting, which is used to enable or disable the blocking for earth fault overcurrent
protection during VT circuit abnormal.
When VT circuit fails, negative-sequence overcurrent protection will be blocked if the setting is set
as “Enabled”, and negative-sequence overcurrent protection is not controlled by direction element
if the setting is set as “Disabled”.
9. [50/51Qx.I2_Set]
It is the current setting for stage x (x=1, 2) of negative-sequence overcurrent protection.
For line protection:
When two-phase short circuit fault happens, the following formula is satisfied.
3
(2) 1
𝐼2 = 𝐼 (3)
2
Where:
(2)
𝐼2 is the negative-sequence component of the two-phase short-circuit current;
𝐼 (3) is the three-phase short-circuit current;
For the line protection, only when the pickup current of the negative-sequence overcurrent
element is equal to 0.5 times of the pickup setting of phase overcurrent element fixedly, the
relative sensitivity coefficient of two-phase short circuit is equal to 1. During the setting calculation,
the coordination of sensitivity can be carried out only according to the three-phase short circuit and
the overcurrent protection with adjacent lines.
The setting of negative-sequence overcurrent protection can be referred to the phase overcurrent
setting.
[50/51𝑄𝑥. 𝐼2_𝑆𝑒𝑡] = 𝐾𝑛 × 𝐼𝐿.𝑚𝑎𝑥
Where:
𝐼𝐿.𝑚𝑎𝑥 is the maximum value of three-phase short circuit current of this line;
𝐾𝑛 is the negative-sequence coefficient, it can be taken as 0.5.
10. [50/51Qx.t_Op]
It is the time delay for stage x (x=1, 2) of negative-sequence overcurrent protection.
For line protection:
It should be identical with the time delay setting of the phase overcurrent protection.
For phase overcurrent protection and negative sequence overcurrent protection, if a fault happens
at the same point, the protection with high sensitivity and short operating time will take precedence
to trip.
11. [50/51Qx.t_DropOut]
The drop-out time setting of stage x (x=1, 2) of negative-sequence overcurrent protection, the
default value is 0.

This setting is valid when definite-time drop-out characteristic is selected. When I 2 <0.95* I 2 p ,
the protection drops out with a time delay of tdr (i.e. the value of the setting [50/51Qx.t_DropOut]),
and the drop-out characteristic curve is shown in the following figure:

PCS-9611S Feeder Relay 3-39

Date: 2020-12-30
 3 Protection Settings

Start time

I2>I2p

Start
signal

Operating
signal

Protection
Operating threshold
3 operate

Operating
counter

t dr t dr t dr
Dropout time setting
Dropout time
Dropout time

12. [50/51Qx.Opt_Dir]
It is used to select the direction mode for stage x (x=1, 2) of negative-sequence overcurrent
protection.
Non_Directional: no direction
Forward: forward direction
Reverse: reverse direction
13. [50/51Qx.En]
It is a logic setting, which is used to enable or disable stage x (x=1, 2) of negative-sequence
overcurrent protection.
14. [50/51Qx.Opt_Trp/Alm]
It is a logic setting, which is used to enable stage x (x=1, 2) of negative-sequence overcurrent
protection operate to trip or alarm.
Trp: for tripping purpose
Alm: for alarm purpose.
15. [50/51Qx.Opt_Curve]
It is used to select the characteristic curve for stage x of negative-sequence overcurrent protection.
(x=1, 2)
Negative-sequence overcurrent protection can support definite-time limit, IEC & ANSI standard
inverse time limit and user-defined inverse-time limit, users can select the wanted operating curve
by the setting [50/51Qx.Opt_Curve] (x=1 or 2), the relationship between the value of the setting
and the curve is shown in the table below.

3-40 PCS-9611S Feeder Relay

Date: 2020-12-30
 3 Protection Settings

50/51Qx.Opt_Curve Time Characteristic k α c tr

ANSIE ANSI Extremely Inverse 28.2 2.0 0.1217 29.1
ANSIV ANSI Very inverse 19.61 2.0 0.491 21.6
ANSIN ANSI Normal Inverse 0.0086 0.02 0.0185 0.46
ANSIM ANSI Moderately Inverse 0.0515 0.02 0.114 4.85
ANSIDefTime ANSI Definite Time - - - -
ANSILTE ANSI Long Time Extremely Inverse 64.07 2.0 0.25 30
ANSILTV ANSI Long Time Very Inverse 28.55 2.0 0.712 13.46
ANSILT ANSI Long Time Inverse 0.086 0.02 0.185 4.6
IECN IEC Normal Inverse 0.14 0.02 0 -
IECV IEC Very inverse 13.5 1.0 0 -
IEC
IECE
IEC Inverse
IEC Extremely inverse
0.14
80.0
0.02
2.0
0
0
-
-
3
IECST IEC Short-time inverse 0.05 0.04 0 -
IECLT IEC Long-time inverse 120.0 1.0 0 -
IECDefTime IEC Definite Time - - - -
UserDefine Programmable

Only when the setting [50/51Qx.Opt_Curve] is set as “UserDefine”, i.e. the user-defined
inverse-time characteristic is selected, the settings [50/51Qx.K], [50/51Qx.C] and [50/51Qx.Alpha]
are useful, the inverse-time operating curve is determined by the three settings.
16. [50/51Qx.Opt_Curve_DropOut]
It is used to select the drop-out characteristic curve of stage x (x=1, 2) of negative-sequence
overcurrent protection.
Inst: instantaneous drop-out
DefTime: definite-time drop-out
IDMT: inverse-time drop-out
When the operating curve is selected as definite-time, IEC inverse-time or user-defined
inverse-time characteristic, the drop-out characteristic can only be selected as instantaneous
drop-out or definite-time drop-out, if inverse-time drop-out is selected, the alarm signal
"Fail_Settings" will be issued and the device will be blocked.
When the operating curve is selected as ANSI inverse-time characteristic, the drop-out
characteristic can be selected as instantaneous drop-out, definite-time drop-out and ANSI
inverse-time drop-out.
⚫ Instantaneous drop-out
When I 2 <0.95* I 2 p , the protection drops out immediately.
⚫ Definite-time drop-out
When I 2 <0.95* I 2 p , the protection drops out with a time delay of tdr (i.e. the value of the setting
[50/51Qx.t_DropOut]), and the drop-out characteristic curve is shown in the following figure:

PCS-9611S Feeder Relay 3-41

Date: 2020-12-30
 3 Protection Settings

Start time

I2>I2p

Start
signal

Operating
signal

Protection
Operating threshold
3 operate

Operating
counter

t dr t dr t dr
Dropout time setting
Dropout time
Dropout time

⚫ Inverse-time drop-out
When I 2 > I 2 p , the inverse-time operating accumulator begins to accumulate, the accumulated
value after t p (Assuming t p is less than the theoretical operating time) is calculated according
to the following equation:
tp
1
I tp =  dt
0
t(I2 )

At this time, if I 2 <0.95* I 2 p , the protection element starts drop-out, and the drop-out
characteristic meets the following equation:
TR
1
I tp −  dt = 0
0
tR ( I 2 )
Where:
T R is the drop-out time;
tR( I 2 ) is the drop-out characteristic equation
When I 2 <0.95* I 2 p , the inverse-time drop-out characteristic equation is as follows:
tr
t R (I2 ) = { 2 } × TMS
1 − (I2 /I2p )
Where:
I 2 p is the current setting [50/51Qx.I2_Set];
TMS is the inverse-time factor, i.e. the setting [50/51Qx.TMS];

3-42 PCS-9611S Feeder Relay

Date: 2020-12-30
 3 Protection Settings

tr is the drop-out time coefficient, it is the drop-out time required for the current to drop to 0 after
the protection operates.
I 2 is the measured negative-sequence current.
When 0.95* I 2 p < I 2 < I 2 p , the accumulator will neither accumulate nor drop out
The inverse time drop-out characteristic curve is shown in the figure below.

tr

The correspondence between the start signal, operating signal, and operating accumulator in the
inverse-time drop-out characteristic is shown in the figure below:
Start time

I2>I2p

Start
signal

Operating
signal

Protection
Operating threshold operate

Operating
counter

tr Dropout time coefficient

Dropout time
Dropout time

17. [50/51Qx.TMS]
It is the time multiplier setting for stage x (x=1, 2) of inverse-time negative-sequence overcurrent
protection.

PCS-9611S Feeder Relay 3-43

Date: 2020-12-30
 3 Protection Settings

This setting can be deduced according to the operating time required for the inverse-time
negative-sequence overcurrent protection.
18. [50/51Qx.tmin]
It is minimum operating time for stage x (x=1, 2) of inverse-time negative-sequence overcurrent
protection.
When inverse-time characteristic is selected, if calculated operating time is less than setting
[50/51Qx.tmin], then the operating time of the protection changes to the value of the setting
[50/51Qx.tmin] automatically.
The recommended value is 0.02s.
19. [50/51Qx.K]
It is the constant “K” for stage x (x=1, 2) of customized inverse-time characteristic
negative-sequence overcurrent protection.
It shall be set according to the characteristic of inverse-time negative-sequence overcurrent
3 protection.
Only when the setting [50/51Qx.Opt_Curve] is set as “UserDefine”, i.e. the user-defined
inverse-time characteristic is selected, the setting [50/51Qx.K] is useful.
20. [50/51Qx.Alpha]
It is constant “α” for stage x (x=1, 2) of customized inverse-time characteristic negative-sequence
overcurrent protection.
It shall be set according to the characteristic of inverse-time negative-sequence overcurrent
protection.
Only when the setting [50/51Qx.Opt_Curve] is set as “UserDefine”, i.e. the user-defined
inverse-time characteristic is selected, the setting [50/51Qx. Alpha] is useful.
21. [50/51Qx.C]
It is constant “C” for stage x (x=1, 2) of customized inverse-time characteristic negative-sequence
overcurrent protection.
It shall be set according to the characteristic of inverse-time negative-sequence overcurrent
protection.
Only when the setting [50/51Qx.Opt_Curve] is set as “UserDefine”, i.e. the user-defined
inverse-time characteristic is selected, the setting [50/51Qx. C] is useful.

3.5 Broken Conductor Protection (46BC)

Access path in device LCD:
MainMenuSettingsProtection SettingsBCP Settings
Access path in PCS-Studio configuration tool:
Project NodeIED NodeSettingGroupXProtection_SettingsBCP_Settings

No. Name Range Unit Step

1 46BC.I_Min (0.05~40) In A 0.001

2 46BC.I2/I1_Set 0~5 - 0.001

3 46BC.t_Op 0~10 s 0.001

4 46BC.En Disabled; Enabled - -

5 46BC.Opt_Trp/Alm Trp; Alm - -

3-44 PCS-9611S Feeder Relay

Date: 2020-12-30
 3 Protection Settings

1. [46BC.I_Min]
It is the minimum operating current setting of broken conductor protection.
Its recommended value is 1A.
2. [46BC.I2/I1_Set]
It is the ratio setting (negative-sequence current to positive-sequence current) of broken conductor
protection
The network of single-phase broken condition is similar to that of two-phases earthing fault,
positive-sequence, negative-sequence and zero-sequence network is connected in parallel,
I2/I1=Z0/(Z0+Z2), generally, zero-sequence impedance is larger than positive-sequence
impedance, i.e., I2/I1>0.5. The network of two-phases broken condition is similar to that of
single-phase earthing fault, positive-sequence, negative-sequence and zero-sequence network is
connected in series, so I2/I1=1. Hence, broken conductor protection based on the ratio of
negative-sequence current to positive-sequence current can detect the broken-conductor fault.
Its recommended value is 0.5.
3. [46BC.t_Op]
3
It is used to set the time delay of broken conductor protection.
Its recommended value is 1s.
4. [46BC.En]
It is used to enable/disable broken conductor protection.
5. [46BC.Opt_Trp/Alm]
It is used to enable/disable broken conductor protection operate to trip or alarm.
Trp: for tripping purpose
Alm: for alarm purpose

3.6 Sensitive Earth Fault Protection (50/51SEF)

Access path in device LCD:
MainMenuSettingsProtection SettingsSEF Settings
Access path in PCS-Studio configuration tool:
Project NodeIED NodeSettingGroupXProtection_SettingsSEF_Settings

No. Name Range Unit Step

1 50/51SEF.DIR.RCA -180~179 deg 1

2 50/51SEF.DIR.phi_Min_Fwd 10~90 deg 1

3 50/51SEF.DIR.phi_Max_Fwd 10~90 deg 1

4 50/51SEF.DIR.phi_Min_Rev 10~90 deg 1

5 50/51SEF.DIR.phi_Max_Rev 10~90 deg 1

6 50/51SEF.DIR.3I0_Min (0.005~1)In - 0.001

7 50/51SEF.DIR.3U0_Min 1.0~10.0 V 0.001

8 50/51SEF.En_VTS_Blk Disabled; Enabled - -

9 50/51SEF1.3I0_Set 0.005~2 A 0.001

10 50/51SEF1.t_Op 0 ~100 s 0.001

PCS-9611S Feeder Relay 3-45

Date: 2020-12-30
 3 Protection Settings

11 50/51SEF1.t_DropOut 0 ~100 s 0.001

12 50/51SEF1.Opt_Dir Non_Directional; Forward Reverse - -

13 50/51SEF1.En Disabled; Enabled - -

14 50/51SEF1.Opt_Trp/Alm Trp; Alm - -

ANSIE; ANSIV; ANSIN; ANSIM;

ANSIDefTime; ANSILTE; ANSILTV;
15 50/51SEF1.Opt_Curve ANSILT; IECN; IECV; IEC; IECE; - -
IECST; IECLT; IECDefTime; Resv;
UserDefine
16 50/51SEF1.Opt_Curve_DropOut Inst; DefTime; IDMT - -

17 50/51SEF1.TMS 0.04~ 20 - 0.001

18 50/51SEF1.tmin 0 ~10 s 0.001

3 19 50/51SEF1.K 0.001~120 - 0.0001

20 50/51SEF1.Alpha 0.01 ~3 - 0.0001

21 50/51SEF1.C 0 ~1 - 0.0001

22 50/51SEF2.3I0_Set 0.005~2 A 0.001

23 50/51SEF2.t_Op 0 ~100 s 0.001

24 50/51SEF2.t_DropOut 0 ~100 s 0.001

25 50/51SEF2.Opt_Dir Non_Directional; Forward Reverse - -

26 50/51SEF2.En Disabled; Enabled - -

27 50/51SEF2.Opt_Trp/Alm Trp; Alm - -

ANSIE; ANSIV; ANSIN; ANSIM;

ANSIDefTime; ANSILTE; ANSILTV;
28 50/51SEF2.Opt_Curve ANSILT; IECN; IECV; IEC; IECE; - -
IECST; IECLT; IECDefTime; Resv;
UserDefine
29 50/51SEF2.Opt_Curve_DropOut Inst; DefTime; IDMT - -

30 50/51SEF2.TMS 0.04~ 20 - 0.001

31 50/51SEF2.tmin 0 ~10 s 0.001

32 50/51SEF2.K 0.001~120 - 0.0001

33 50/51SEF2.Alpha 0.01 ~3 - 0.0001

34 50/51SEF2.C 0 ~1 - 0.0001

35 50/51SEF3.3I0_Set 0.005~2 A 0.001

36 50/51SEF3.t_Op 0 ~100 s 0.001

37 50/51SEF3.t_DropOut 0 ~100 s 0.001

Non_Directional
38 50/51SEF3.Opt_Dir - -
Forward Reverse
39 50/51SEF3.En Disabled; Enabled - -

40 50/51SEF3.Opt_Trp/Alm Trp; Alm - -

3-46 PCS-9611S Feeder Relay

Date: 2020-12-30
 3 Protection Settings

ANSIE; ANSIV; ANSIN; ANSIM;

ANSIDefTime; ANSILTE; ANSILTV;
41 50/51SEF3.Opt_Curve ANSILT; IECN; IECV; IEC; IECE; - -
IECST; IECLT; IECDefTime; Resv;
UserDefine
42 50/51SEF3.Opt_Curve_DropOut Inst; DefTime; IDMT - -

43 50/51SEF3.TMS 0.04~ 20 - 0.001

44 50/51SEF3.tmin 0 ~10 s 0.001

45 50/51SEF3.K 0.001~120 - 0.0001

46 50/51SEF3.Alpha 0.01 ~3 - 0.0001

47 50/51SEF3.C 0 ~1 - 0.0001

48 50/51SEF4.3I0_Set 0.005~2 A 0.001

49 50/51SEF4.t_Op 0 ~100 s 0.001

3
50 50/51SEF4.t_DropOut 0 ~100 s 0.001

51 50/51SEF4.Opt_Dir Non_Directional; Forward Reverse - -

52 50/51SEF4.En Disabled; Enabled - -

53 50/51SEF4.Opt_Trp/Alm Trp; Alm - -

ANSIE; ANSIV; ANSIN; ANSIM;

ANSIDefTime; ANSILTE; ANSILTV;
54 50/51SEF4.Opt_Curve ANSILT; IECN; IECV; IEC; IECE; - -
IECST; IECLT; IECDefTime; Resv;
UserDefine
55 50/51SEF4.Opt_Curve_DropOut Inst; DefTime; IDMT - -

56 50/51SEF4.TMS 0.04~ 20 - 0.001

57 50/51SEF4.tmin 0 ~10 s 0.001

58 50/51SEF4.K 0.001~120 - 0.0001

59 50/51SEF4.Alpha 0.01 ~3 - 0.0001

60 50/51SEF4.C 0 ~1 - 0.0001

61 50/51SEF5.3I0_Set 0.005~2 A 0.001

62 50/51SEF5.t_Op 0 ~100 s 0.001

63 50/51SEF5.t_DropOut 0 ~100 s 0.001

64 50/51SEF5.Opt_Dir Non_Directional; Forward Reverse - -

65 50/51SEF5.En Disabled; Enabled - -

66 50/51SEF5.Opt_Trp/Alm Trp; Alm - -

ANSIE; ANSIV; ANSIN; ANSIM;

ANSIDefTime; ANSILTE; ANSILTV;
67 50/51SEF5.Opt_Curve ANSILT; IECN; IECV; IEC; IECE; - -
IECST; IECLT; IECDefTime; Resv;
UserDefine

PCS-9611S Feeder Relay 3-47

Date: 2020-12-30
 3 Protection Settings

68 50/51SEF5.Opt_Curve_DropOut Inst; DefTime; IDMT - -

69 50/51SEF5.TMS 0.04~ 20 - 0.001

70 50/51SEF5.tmin 0 ~10 s 0.001

71 50/51SEF5.K 0.001~120 - 0.0001

72 50/51SEF5.Alpha 0.01 ~3 - 0.0001

73 50/51SEF5.C 0 ~1 - 0.0001

74 50/51SEF6.3I0_Set 0.005~2 A 0.001

75 50/51SEF6.t_Op 0 ~100 s 0.001

76 50/51SEF6.t_DropOut 0 ~100 s 0.001

77 50/51SEF6.Opt_Dir Non_Directional; Forward Reverse - -

3 78 50/51SEF6.En Disabled; Enabled - -

79 50/51SEF6.Opt_Trp/Alm Trp; Alm - -

ANSIE; ANSIV; ANSIN; ANSIM;

ANSIDefTime; ANSILTE; ANSILTV;
80 50/51SEF6.Opt_Curve ANSILT; IECN; IECV; IEC; IECE; - -
IECST; IECLT; IECDefTime; Resv;
UserDefine
81 50/51SEF6.Opt_Curve_DropOut Inst; DefTime; IDMT - -

82 50/51SEF6.TMS 0.04~ 20 - 0.001

83 50/51SEF6.tmin 0 ~10 s 0.001

84 50/51SEF6.K 0.001~120 - 0.0001

85 50/51SEF6.Alpha 0.01 ~3 - 0.0001

86 50/51SEF6.C 0 ~1 - 0.0001

Sensitive earth fault overcurrent protection is provided with six stages, each stage has
independent current setting, time delay and control logic.
1. [50/51SEF.DIR.RCA]
It is the characteristic angle of directional sensitive earth fault overcurrent protection.
By setting the characteristic angle to determine the most sensitive forward angle of sensitive earth
fault current, using sensitive earth fault current with zero-sequence voltage to determine the
direction of sensitive earth fault current in forward direction or reverse direction. For line protection,
when the CT polarity is on the busbar side, the default characteristic angle is 45 degrees.

3-48 PCS-9611S Feeder Relay

Date: 2020-12-30
 3 Protection Settings

-U0

[50/51SEF.DIR.phi_Min_Fwd]

Non-operating Isef
area

Operating area in
[50/51SEF.DIR.phi_Max_Rev] forward direction

[50/51SEF.DIR.RCA]

Operating area in
reverse direction

3
[50/51SEF.DIR.phi_Max_Fwd]

Non-operating
area
[50/51SEF.DIR.phi_Min_Rev]

Figure 3.6-1 The direction element operation characteristics when zero-sequence voltage is polarized
2. [50/51SEF.DIR.phi_Min_Fwd]
The minimum boundary of the forward direction element of sensitive earth fault overcurrent
protection, the recommended value is 90 degree.
3. [50/51SEF.DIR.phi_Max_Fwd]
The maximum boundary of the forward direction element of sensitive earth fault overcurrent
protection, the recommended value is 90 degree.
4. [50/51SEF.DIR.phi_Min_Rev]
The minimum boundary of the reverse direction element of sensitive earth fault overcurrent
protection, the recommended value is 90 degree.
5. [50/51SEF.DIR.phi_Max_Rev]
The maximum boundary of the reverse direction element of sensitive earth fault overcurrent
protection, the recommended value is 90 degree.
6. [50/51SEF.DIR.3I0_Min]
The minimum operating current setting for the direction control element of sensitive earth fault
overcurrent protection, the recommended value is 0.01In.
7. [50/51SEF.DIR.3U0_Min]
The minimum operating voltage setting for the direction control element of sensitive earth fault
overcurrent protection, the recommended value is 4V. If the sensitivity of high resistance
grounding fault needs to be considered, the recommended value is 0.5~2V. If it is necessary to
cooperate with other protection with direction element, it is recommended to be 0.5~1V higher
than other protection.
8. [50/51SEF.En_VTS_Blk]
It is a logic setting, which is used to enable or disable the blocking for sensitive earth fault
overcurrent protection during VT circuit abnormal.

PCS-9611S Feeder Relay 3-49

Date: 2020-12-30
 3 Protection Settings

When VT circuit fails, sensitive earth fault overcurrent protection will be blocked if the setting is set
as “Enabled”, and sensitive earth fault overcurrent protection is not controlled by direction element
if the setting is set as “Disabled”.
9. [50/51SEFx.3I0_Set]
It is the current setting for stage x (x=1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6) of sensitive earth fault overcurrent protection.
For line protection:
1) When stage x of sensitive earth fault overcurrent protection is used as fast protection, the
following conditions should be considered.
⚫ It shall be larger than the maximum residual current under pole disagreement condition.
⚫ It shall be larger than the maximum residual current when internal fault happens at the end of
the line.
Its calculation principle is
[50/51𝑆𝐸𝐹𝑥. 3𝐼0_𝑆𝑒𝑡 = 𝐾𝑟𝑒𝑙 × 3𝐼0𝑚𝑎𝑥
3 Where:
I0.max is the maximum zero-sequence current for an external fault
Krel is the reliability coefficient, it usually takes 1.3 or above
2) When stage x of directional sensitive earth fault overcurrent protection is used as definite-time
protection, it should coordinate with the protection of other adjacent line.
⚫ It shall be larger than the maximum residual current under pole disagreement condition.
⚫ It shall coordinate with the measurement element of the adjacent line and ensure enough
sensitivity for the fault happens at the end of the line.
[50/51𝑆𝐸𝐹𝑥. 3𝐼0_𝑆𝑒𝑡 = 𝐾𝑟𝑒𝑙 × 𝐾𝑏𝑟 × 𝐼0.𝐴𝑑𝑗

Where:
Krel is the reliability coefficient, it usually takes 1.1~1.3
Kbr is the branching coefficient of residual current, which is equal to the ratio of residual current
passing through the device to passing through the faulty line during an earth fault happens at the
end of the protected zone of the coordinated stage of earth fault overcurrent protection of the line.
The maximum value among various operation conditions can be taken.
I0.Adj is the current setting of the coordinated stage of the adjacent line
3) When the sensitive earth fault overcurrent protection is used as inverse-time protection, the
calculation principle is
[50/51𝑆𝐸𝐹𝑥. 3𝐼0_𝑆𝑒𝑡] = 𝐾𝑝 × 𝐼𝑑𝑧
Where:
𝐾𝑝 is the coordinating coefficient, which can be taken as 1.15~1.25
𝐼𝑑𝑧 is the current setting of the inverse-time sensitive earth fault overcurrent protection to be
coordinated
10. [50/51SEFx.t_Op]
It is the time delay for stage x (x=1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6) of sensitive earth fault overcurrent protection.
For line protection:
⚫ When definite-time earth fault overcurrent protection coordinates with the adjacent line, this
setting should coordinate with the time delay of sensitive earth fault overcurrent protection of
the subordinate line.

3-50 PCS-9611S Feeder Relay

Date: 2020-12-30
 3 Protection Settings

Its calculation principle is

[50/51𝑆𝐸𝐹𝑥. 𝑡_𝑂𝑝] = 𝑡0.𝐴𝑑𝑗 + ∆𝑡
Where:
t0.Adj is the time delay of the coordinated stage of the adjacent line
Δt is extra time delay, it usually takes 0.3~0.5s
⚫ If it is used independently, it should be larger than the maximum operation time of system pole
discrepancy.
11. [50/51SEFx.t_DropOut]
The drop-out time setting of stage x (x=1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6) of sensitive earth fault overcurrent
protection, the default value is 0.

This setting is valid when definite-time drop-out characteristic is selected. When I 0 <0.95* I 0 p ,
the protection drops out with a time delay of tdr (i.e. the value of the setting
[50/51SEFx.t_DropOut]), the drop-out characteristic curve is shown in the following figure: 3
Start time

I0>I0p

Start
signal

Operating
signal

Protection
Operating threshold operate

Operating
counter

t dr t dr t dr
Dropout time setting
Dropout time
Dropout time

Figure 3.6-2 Definite-time drop-out characteristic of sensitive earth fault overcurrent protection
12. [50/51SEFx.Opt_Dir]
It is used to select the direction mode for stage x (x=1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6) of sensitive earth fault
overcurrent protection.
Non_Directional: no direction
Forward: forward direction
Reverse: reverse direction
13. [50/51SEFx.En]
It is a logic setting, which is used to enable or disable stage x (x=1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6) of sensitive earth

PCS-9611S Feeder Relay 3-51

Date: 2020-12-30
 3 Protection Settings

fault overcurrent protection.

14. [50/51SEFx.Opt_Trp/Alm]
It is a logic setting, which is used to enable stage x (x=1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6) of sensitive earth overcurrent
protection operate to trip or alarm.
Trp: for tripping purpose
Alm: for alarm purpose.
15. [50/51SEFx.Opt_Curve]
It is used to select the characteristic curve for stage x (x=1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6) of sensitive earth
overcurrent protection.
Sensitive earth fault overcurrent protection can support definite-time limit, IEC & ANSI standard
inverse time limit and user-defined inverse-time limit, users can select the wanted operating curve
by the setting [50/51SEFx.Opt_Curve], the relationship between the value of the setting and the
curve is shown in the table below.
3 50/51SEFx.Opt_Curve Time Characteristic k α c tr
ANSIE ANSI Extremely Inverse 28.2 2.0 0.1217 29.1
ANSIV ANSI Very inverse 19.61 2.0 0.491 21.6
ANSIN ANSI Normal Inverse 0.0086 0.02 0.0185 0.46
ANSIM ANSI Moderately Inverse 0.0515 0.02 0.114 4.85
ANSIDefTime ANSI Definite Time - - - -
ANSILTE ANSI Long Time Extremely Inverse 64.07 2.0 0.25 30
ANSILTV ANSI Long Time Very Inverse 28.55 2.0 0.712 13.46
ANSILT ANSI Long Time Inverse 0.086 0.02 0.185 4.6
IECN IEC Normal Inverse 0.14 0.02 0 -
IECV IEC Very inverse 13.5 1.0 0 -
IEC IEC Inverse 0.14 0.02 0 -
IECE IEC Extremely inverse 80.0 2.0 0 -
IECST IEC Short-time inverse 0.05 0.04 0 -
IECLT IEC Long-time inverse 120.0 1.0 0 -
IECDefTime IEC Definite Time - - - -
UserDefine Programmable

If all available curves do not comply with user application, user can configure
[50/51SEFx.Opt_Curve] as “UserDefine” to customize the inverse-time curve characteristic, and
constants “K”, “α” and “C”.
16. [50/51SEFx.Opt_Curve_DropOut]
The setting is used to select the drop-out characteristic curve of stage x (x=1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6) of
sensitive earth fault overcurrent protection.
Inst: instantaneous drop-out
DefTime: definite-time drop-out
IDMT: inverse-time drop-out
When the operating curve is selected as definite-time, IEC inverse-time or user-defined
inverse-time characteristic, the drop-out characteristic can only be selected as instantaneous
drop-out or definite-time drop-out, if inverse-time drop-out is selected, the alarm signal

3-52 PCS-9611S Feeder Relay

Date: 2020-12-30
 3 Protection Settings

"Fail_Settings" will be issued and the device will be blocked.

When the operating curve is selected as ANSI inverse-time characteristic, the drop-out
characteristic can be selected as instantaneous drop-out, definite-time drop-out and ANSI
inverse-time drop-out.
⚫ Instantaneous drop-out
When I 0 <0.95* I 0 p , the protection drops out immediately.
⚫ Definite-time drop-out
When I 0 <0.95* I 0 p , the protection drops out with a time delay of tdr (i.e. the value of the setting
[50/51Gx.t_DropOut]), the drop-out characteristic curve is shown in the following figure:

Start time

I0>I0p

3
Start
signal

Operating
signal

Protection
Operating threshold operate

Operating
counter

t dr t dr t dr
Dropout time setting
Dropout time
Dropout time

Figure 3.66-3 Definite-time drop-out characteristic of sensitive earth fault overcurrent protection
⚫ Inverse-time drop-out
When I 0 > I 0 p , the inverse-time operating accumulator begins to accumulate, the accumulated
value after t p (Assuming t p is less than the theoretical operating time) is calculated according
to the following equation:
tp
1
Itp =  t(I
0
0
dt
)
At this time, if I 0 <0.95* I 0 p , the protection element starts drop-out, and the drop-out
characteristic meets the following equation:
TR
1
I tp −  dt = 0
t (I )
0 R

Where:

PCS-9611S Feeder Relay 3-53

Date: 2020-12-30
 3 Protection Settings

T R is the drop-out time;

tR( I ) is the drop-out characteristic equation
When I 0 <0.95* I 0 p , the inverse-time drop-out characteristic equation is as follows:

 tr 
tR =  2
 TMS
1 − ( I 0 / I 0P ) 
Where:
I0P is the current setting [50/51SEFx.3I0_Set];
TMS is the inverse-time factor, i.e. the setting [50/51SEFx.TMS];
tr is the drop-out time coefficient, it is the drop-out time required for the current to drop to 0 after
the protection operates.
I 0 is the measured current.
3 When 0.95* I 0 p < I 0 < I 0 p , the accumulator will neither accumulate nor drop out
The inverse time drop-out characteristic curve is shown in the figure below.

tr

I0 P I0

Figure 3.66-4 Inverse-time drop-out characteristic curve of sensitive earth fault overcurrent protection
The correspondence between the start signal, operating signal, and operating accumulator in the
inverse-time drop-out characteristic is shown in the figure below:

3-54 PCS-9611S Feeder Relay

Date: 2020-12-30
 3 Protection Settings

Start time

I0>I0p

Start
signal

Operating
signal

Protection
Operating threshold operate

Operating
counter
3
tr Dropout time coefficient
Dropout time
Dropout time

Figure 3.66-5 Inverse-time drop-out characteristic of sensitive earth fault overcurrent protection
17. [50/51SEFx.TMS]
It is the time multiplier setting for stage x (x=1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6) of inverse-time sensitive earth fault
overcurrent protection.
This setting can be deduced according to the operating time required for the inverse-time sensitive
earth fault overcurrent protection.
18. [50/51SEFx.tmin]
It is the minimum operating time for stage x (x=1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6) of inverse-time sensitive earth fault
overcurrent protection.
When inverse-time characteristic is selected, if the calculated operating time is less than the
setting [50/51SEFx.tmin], then the operating time changes to the value of the setting
[50/51SEFx.tmin] automatically.
If it coordinates with other protections, it can be set as “tmin+Δt”.
Where:
tmin is the minimum operation time of other protections.
Δt is the time difference which can be taken as 0.3~0.5.
If it is used independently, the recommended value is 0.02s.
19. [50/51SEFx.K]
It is constant “K” for stage x (x=1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6) of customized inverse-time characteristic sensitive
earth fault overcurrent protection.
It shall be set according to the characteristic of inverse-time sensitive earth fault overcurrent
protection.
Only when the setting [50/51SEFx.Opt_Curve] is set as “UserDefine”, i.e. the user-defined
inverse-time characteristic is selected, the setting [50/51SEFx.K] is useful.
20. [50/51SEFx.Alpha]

PCS-9611S Feeder Relay 3-55

Date: 2020-12-30
 3 Protection Settings

It is constant “α” for stage x (x=1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6) of customized inverse-time characteristic sensitive

earth fault overcurrent protection.
It shall be set according to the characteristic of inverse-time sensitive earth fault overcurrent
protection.
Only when the setting [50/51SEFx.Opt_Curve] is set as “UserDefine”, i.e. the user-defined
inverse-time characteristic is selected, the setting [50/51SEFx.Alpha] is useful.
21. [50/51SEFx.C]
It is constant “C” for stage x (x=1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6) of customized inverse-time characteristic sensitive
earth fault overcurrent protection.
It shall be set according to the characteristic of inverse-time sensitive earth fault overcurrent
protection.
Only when the setting [50/51SEFx.Opt_Curve] is set as “UserDefine”, i.e. the user-defined
inverse-time characteristic is selected, the setting [50/51SEFx.C] is useful.

3 3.7 RMS Overcurrent Protection

Access path in device LCD:
MainMenuSettingsProtection SettingsRMS OC Settings
Access path in PCS-Studio configuration tool:
Project NodeIED NodeSettingGroupXProtection_SettingsRMS_OC_Settings
No. Settings Range Unit Step
1 50/51R1.I_Set 0.05~200 A 0.001
2 50/51R1.t_Op 0 ~100 s 0.001
3 50/51R1.t_DropOut 0 ~100 s 0.001
4 50/51R1.En Disabled; Enabled - -
5 50/51R1.Opt_Trp/Alm Trp; Alm - -
ANSIE;
ANSIV;
ANSIN;
ANSIM;
ANSIDefTime;
ANSILTE;
ANSILTV;
ANSILT;
6 50/51R1.Opt_Curve - -
IECN;
IECV;
IEC;
IECE;
IECST;
IECLT;
IECDefTime;
UserDefine
Inst;
7 50/51R1.Opt_Curve_DropOut DefTime; - -
IDMT
8 50/51R1.TMS 0.04~ 20 - 0.001
9 50/51R1.tmin 0 ~10 s 0.001
10 50/51R1.K 0.001~120 - 0.0001
11 50/51R1.Alpha 0.01 ~3 - 0.0001
12 50/51R1.C 0 ~1 - 0.0001

3-56 PCS-9611S Feeder Relay

Date: 2020-12-30
 3 Protection Settings

No. Settings Range Unit Step

13 50/51R2.I_Set 0.05~200 A 0.001
14 50/51R2.t_Op 0 ~100 s 0.001
15 50/51R2.t_DropOut 0 ~100 s 0.001
16 50/51R2.En Disabled; Enabled - -
17 50/51R2.Opt_Trp/Alm Trp; Alm - -
ANSIE;
ANSIV;
ANSIN;
ANSIM;
ANSIDefTime;
ANSILTE;
ANSILTV;
ANSILT;
18 50/51R2.Opt_Curve - -
IECN;
IECV;
IEC; 3
IECE;
IECST;
IECLT;
IECDefTime;
UserDefine
Inst;
19 50/51R2.Opt_Curve_DropOut DefTime; - -
IDMT
20 50/51R2.TMS 0.04~ 20 - 0.001
21 50/51R2.tmin 0 ~10 s 0.001
22 50/51R2.K 0.001~120 - 0.0001
23 50/51R2.Alpha 0.01 ~3 - 0.0001
24 50/51R2.C 0 ~1 - 0.0001

It provides two stages of RMS overcurrent protection with independent logic. When the fault
current with more harmonic components is generated in the system, the amplitude is larger than
the current threshold of RMS overcurrent protection, the RMS overcurrent protection will operate.
1. 50/51Rx.I_Set
It is current setting for stage x of RMS overcurrent protection (x=1, 2).
It should be set according to the maximum overload bearing capacity of the protected equipment,
including the fundamental wave and the 2-11th harmonic component.
[50/51𝑅𝑥. 𝐼_𝑆𝑒𝑡 = 𝐾𝑟𝑒𝑙 × 𝐼𝑚𝑎𝑥
Where:
Imax is the maximum overload bearing capacity of the protected equipment.
Krel is the reliability coefficient, taking 1.2~1.3 or above.
2. 50/51Rx.t_Op
It is the time delay for stage x of RMS overcurrent protection (x=1, 2).
It shall be set according to the affordability of protected equipment.
3. 50/51Rx.t_DropOut
The drop-out time setting of stage x of RMS overcurrent protection (x=1, 2).
The supported drop-out characteristics of RMS overcurrent protection include instantaneous
drop-out and definite-time drop-out.

PCS-9611S Feeder Relay 3-57

Date: 2020-12-30
 3 Protection Settings

This setting is valid when definite-time drop-out characteristic is selected. When 𝐼𝑅𝑀𝑆 <0.95*𝐼𝑅𝑀𝑆𝑃 ,
the protection drops out with a time delay of tdr (i.e. the value of the setting [50/51Rx.t_DropOut]),
and the drop-out characteristic curve is shown in the following figure:

Start time

IRMS >Iset

Start
signal

Operating

3 signal

Protection
Operating threshold operate

Operating
counter

t dr t dr t dr
Dropout time setting
Dropout time
Dropout time

Figure 3.7-1 Definite-time drop-out characteristic of RMS overcurrent protection

4. 50/51Rx.En
It is a logic setting, which is used to enable or disable stage x of RMS overcurrent protection (x=1,
2).
5. 50/51Rx.Opt_Trp/Alm
It is a logic setting, which is used to enable stage x of phase RMS overcurrent protection operate
to trip or alarm. (x=1, 2)
Trp: for tripping purpose
Alm: for alarm purpose
6. [50/51Rx.Opt_Curve]
It is used to select the characteristic curve for stage x (x=1, 2) of RMS overcurrent protection.
RMS overcurrent protection can support definite-time limit, IEC & ANSI standard inverse time limit
and user-defined inverse-time limit, users can select the wanted operating curve by the setting
[50/51Rx.Opt_Curve], the relationship between the value of the setting and the curve is shown in
the table below.
50/51Rx.Opt_Curve Time Characteristic k α c tr
ANSIE ANSI Extremely Inverse 28.2 2.0 0.1217 29.1
ANSIV ANSI Very inverse 19.61 2.0 0.491 21.6
ANSIN ANSI Normal Inverse 0.0086 0.02 0.0185 0.46
ANSIM ANSI Moderately Inverse 0.0515 0.02 0.114 4.85

3-58 PCS-9611S Feeder Relay

Date: 2020-12-30
 3 Protection Settings

50/51Rx.Opt_Curve Time Characteristic k α c tr

ANSIDefTime ANSI Definite Time - - - -
ANSILTE ANSI Long Time Extremely Inverse 64.07 2.0 0.25 30
ANSILTV ANSI Long Time Very Inverse 28.55 2.0 0.712 13.46
ANSILT ANSI Long Time Inverse 0.086 0.02 0.185 4.6
IECN IEC Normal Inverse 0.14 0.02 0 -
IECV IEC Very inverse 13.5 1.0 0 -
IEC IEC Inverse 0.14 0.02 0 -
IECE IEC Extremely inverse 80.0 2.0 0 -
IECST IEC Short-time inverse 0.05 0.04 0 -
IECLT IEC Long-time inverse 120.0 1.0 0 -
IECDefTime IEC Definite Time - - - -
UserDefine Programmable
3
If all available curves do not comply with user application, user can configure [50/51Rx.Opt_Curve]
as “UserDefine” to customize the inverse-time curve characteristic, and constants “K”, “α” and “C”.
7. [50/51Rx.Opt_Curve_DropOut]
The setting is used to select the drop-out characteristic curve of stage x (x=1, 2) of RMS
overcurrent protection.
Inst: instantaneous drop-out
DefTime: definite-time drop-out
IDMT: inverse-time drop-out
When the operating curve is selected as definite-time, IEC inverse-time or user-defined
inverse-time characteristic, the drop-out characteristic can only be selected as instantaneous
drop-out or definite-time drop-out, if inverse-time drop-out is selected, the alarm signal
"Fail_Settings" will be issued and the device will be blocked.
When the operating curve is selected as ANSI inverse-time characteristic, the dropout
characteristic can be selected as instantaneous dropout, definite-time dropout and ANSI
inverse-time dropout.
⚫ Instantaneous dropout

When I RMS <0.95* I RMSP , the protection drops out immediately.

⚫ Definite-time dropout

When I RMS <0.95* I RMSP , the protection drops out with a time delay of tdr (i.e. the value of the
setting [50/51Rx.t_DropOut]), and the dropout characteristic curve is shown in the following figure:

PCS-9611S Feeder Relay 3-59

Date: 2020-12-30
 3 Protection Settings

Start time

IRMS >Iset

Start
signal

Operating
signal

Protection
Operating threshold
3
operate

Operating
counter

t dr t dr t dr
Dropout time setting
Dropout time
Dropout time

Figure 3.7-2 Definite-time drop-out characteristic of RMS overcurrent protection

⚫ Inverse-time dropout
When IRMS>IRMSp, the inverse-time operating accumulator begins to accumulate, the accumulated
value after t p (Assuming t p is less than the theoretical operating time) is calculated according
to the following equation:
tp
1
I tp =  dt
0
t ( I RMS )
At this time, if IRMS<0.95*IRMSp, the protection element starts dropout, and the dropout
characteristic meets the following equation:
TR
1
I tp −  dt = 0
0
t R ( I RMS )
Where:
T R is the dropout time;
tR( I RMS ) is the dropout characteristic equation.
When IRMS<0.95*IRMSp, the inverse-time dropout characteristic equation is as follows:
 tr 
tR =  2 
 TMS
1 − ( I RMS / I RMSP ) 
Where:
IRMSp is the current setting [50/51Rx.I_Set];

3-60 PCS-9611S Feeder Relay

Date: 2020-12-30
 3 Protection Settings

TMS is the inverse-time factor, i.e. the setting [50/51Rx.TMS];

tr is the dropout time coefficient, it is the dropout time required for the current to drop to 0 after the
protection operates.
IRMS is the measured current.
When 0.95*IRMSp <IRMS <IRMSp, the accumulator will neither accumulate nor drop out
The inverse time dropout characteristic curve is shown in the figure below.

tr

I RMSP I RMS

Figure 3.7-3 Inverse-time drop-out characteristic curve of RMS overcurrent protection

The correspondence between the start signal, operating signal, and operating accumulator in the
inverse-time dropout characteristic is shown in the figure below:
Start time

IRMS >IRMSp

Start
signal

Operating
signal

Protection
Operating threshold operate

Operating
counter

tr
Dropout time coefficient
Dropout time
Dropout time

Figure 3.7-4 Inverse-time dropout characteristic of RMS overcurrent protection

PCS-9611S Feeder Relay 3-61

Date: 2020-12-30
 3 Protection Settings

8. [50/51Rx.TMS]
It is the time multiplier setting for stage x (x=1, 2) of RMS overcurrent protection.
This setting can be deduced according to the operating time required for the inverse-time sensitive
earth fault overcurrent protection.
9. [50/51Rx.tmin]
It is the minimum operating time for stage x (x=1, 2) of RMS overcurrent protection.
When inverse-time characteristic is selected, if the calculated operating time is less than the
setting [50/51Rx.tmin], then the operating time changes to the value of the setting [50/51Rx.tmin]
automatically.
If it coordinates with other protections, it can be set as “tmin+Δt”.
Where:
tmin is the minimum operation time of other protections.

3 Δt is the time difference which can be taken as 0.3~0.5.

If it is used independently, its recommended value is 0.02s.
10. [50/51Rx.K]
It is constant “K” for stage x (x=1, 2) of customized inverse-time characteristic RMS overcurrent
protection.
It shall be set according to the characteristic of inverse-time RMS overcurrent protection.
Only when the setting [50/51Rx.Opt_Curve] is set as “UserDefine”, i.e. the user-defined
inverse-time characteristic is selected, the setting [50/51Rx.K] is useful.
11. [50/51Rx.Alpha]
It is constant “α” for stage x (x=1, 2) of customized inverse-time characteristic RMS protection.
It shall be set according to the characteristic of inverse-time RMS overcurrent protection.
Only when the setting [50/51Rx.Opt_Curve] is set as “UserDefine”, i.e. the user-defined
inverse-time characteristic is selected, the setting [50/51Rx.Alpha] is useful.
12. [50/51Rx.C]
It is constant “C” for stage x (x=1, 2) of customized inverse-time characteristic RMS overcurrent
protection.
It shall be set according to the characteristic of inverse-time RMS overcurrent protection.
Only when the setting [50/51Rx.Opt_Curve] is set as “UserDefine”, i.e. the user-defined
inverse-time characteristic is selected, the setting [50/51Rx.C] is useful.

3.8 Overvoltage Protection

Access path in device LCD:
MainMenuSettingsProtection SettingsOV Settings
Access path in PCS-Studio configuration tool:
Project NodeIED NodeSettingGroupXProtection_SettingsOV_Settings
No. Settings Range Unit Step
1 59P.Opt_Up/Upp Up; Upp - -
2 59P.Opt_1P/3P 3P; 1P - -
3 59P1.U_Set 57.7~200 V 0.001

3-62 PCS-9611S Feeder Relay

Date: 2020-12-30
 3 Protection Settings

No. Settings Range Unit Step

4 59P1.K_DropOut 0.93 ~1.00 - 0.001
5 59P1.t_Op 0.1 ~100 s 0.001
6 59P1.t_DropOut 0 ~100 s 0.001
7 59P1.En Disabled; Enabled - -
8 59P1.Opt_Trp/Alm Trp; Alm - -
ANSIDefTime;
IECDefTime;
9 59P1.Opt_Curve - -
UserDefine;
InvTime_U
Inst;
10 59P1.Opt_Curve_DropOut - -
DefTime
11 59P1.TMS 0.04~ 20 - 0.001
12 59P1.tmin 0 ~10 s 0.001
13 59P1.K 0.001~120 - 0.0001
14 59P1.Alpha 0.01 ~3 - 0.0001
3
15 59P1.C 0 ~1 - 0.0001
16 59P2.U_Set 57.7~200 V 0.001
17 59P2.K_DropOut 0.93 ~1.00 - 0.001
18 59P2.t_Op 0.1 ~100 s 0.001
19 59P2.t_DropOut 0 ~100 s 0.001
20 59P2.En Disabled; Enabled - -
21 59P2.Opt_Trp/Alm Trp; Alm - -
ANSIDefTime;
IECDefTime;
22 59P2.Opt_Curve - -
UserDefine;
InvTime_U
Inst;
23 59P2.Opt_Curve_DropOut - -
DefTime
24 59P2.TMS 0.04~ 20 - 0.001
25 59P2.tmin 0 ~10 s 0.001
26 59P2.K 0.001~120 - 0.0001
27 59P2.Alpha 0.01 ~3 - 0.0001
28 59P2.C 0 ~1 - 0.0001

Overvoltage protection is provided with two stages, each stage has independent voltage setting,
time delay and control logic.
1. [59P.Opt_Up/Upp]
It is used to select phase-to-phase voltage or phase voltage.
Up: phase-to-ground voltage
Upp: phase-to-phase voltage
2. [59P.Opt_1P/3P]
It is used to select 1-out-of-3 mode or 3-out-of-3 mode.
3P: 3-out-of-3 mode
1P: 1-out-of-3 mode
When this setting is set as “1P”, overvoltage protection will operate if any phase voltage or
phase-to-phase voltage is over voltage. When this setting is set as “3P”, overvoltage protection will
operate only if three-phase voltages or three phase-to-phase voltages are over voltage.

PCS-9611S Feeder Relay 3-63

Date: 2020-12-30
 3 Protection Settings

3. [59Px.U_Set]
It is the voltage setting for stage x (x=1, 2) of overvoltage protection.
This setting should be set according to the actual isolation requirements of the system equipment.
This setting should also be set according to the logic setting [59P.Opt_Up/Upp]. If the setting
[59P.Opt_Up/Upp] is set as "Upp", then phase-to-phase voltage will be used for calculation,
[59Px.U_Set] should be set as phase-to-phase voltage. If the setting [59P.Opt_Up/Upp] is set as
"Up", then phase-to-ground voltage will be used for calculation, [59Px.U_Set] should be set as
phase-to-ground voltage.
Generally, it shall be set according to the affordability of the protected equipment:
⚫ For definite-time charactertistic
[59Px.U_Set] =（1.1~1.5）Un
Where:
Un: the secondary rated voltage.
3 Application example:
If the operating criterion adopts phase-to-phase voltage, Un=110V, 1.3 times Un is assigned for
overvoltage protection. The setting will be given as below:
[59P.Opt_Up/Upp]=Upp
[59Px.U_Set]=143V
If the operating criterion adopts phase-to-ground voltage, Un=63.5V, 1.3 times of Un is assigned
for overvoltage protection. The setting will be given as below:
[59P.Opt_Up/Upp]=Up
[59Px.U_Set]=82.55V
⚫ For inverse-time characteristic
If inverse-time characteristic is selected, the setting should be configured as follows.
[59Px.U_Set] = Krel Umax
Where:

K rel is the reliability coefficient, it can be taken as 1.05~1.1.

U max is the minimum voltage under which the protected equipment can operate for a long term. If
the operating criterion adopts phase-to-phase voltage, the U max is the phase-to-phase voltage,
otherwise it is the phase-to-ground voltage.
4. [59Px.K_DropOut]
It is the drop-out coefficient of stage x (x=1, 2) of phase overvoltage protection.
The recommended value is 0.98.
5. [59Px.t_Op]
It is time delay for stage x (x=1, 2) of overvoltage protection.
It shall be set according to the affordability of the protected equipment, and the recommended
value is 0.3s~1s.
6. [59Px.t_DropOut]
The drop-out time setting of stage x (x=1, 2) of phase overvoltage protection.
This setting is valid when definite-time drop-out characteristic is selected. When U

3-64 PCS-9611S Feeder Relay

Date: 2020-12-30
 3 Protection Settings

<[59Px.K_DropOut]* Up , the protection drops out with a time delay of tdr (i.e. the value of the
setting [59Px.t_DropOut]), and the drop-out characteristic curve is shown in the following figure:

Start time

U>Up

Start
signal

Operating
signal

Protection
3
Operating threshold operate

Operating
counter

t dr t dr t dr
Dropout time setting
Dropout time
Dropout time

Figure 3.8-1 Definite-time drop-out characteristic of phase overvoltage protection

The recommended value is 0.
7. [59Px.En]
It is a logic setting, which is used to enable or disable stage x (x=1, 2) of overvoltage protection.
8. [59Px.Opt_Trp/Alm]
It is a logic setting, which is used to enable stage x (x=1, 2) of phase overvoltage protection
operate to trip or alarm.
Trp: for tripping purpose
Alm: for alarm purpose
9. [59Px.Opt_Curve]
It is used to select characteristic curve for stage x (x=1, 2) of overvoltage protection.
Phase overvoltage protection can support definite-time limit, inverse time limit and user-defined
time limit, uses can select the wanted operating curve by the setting [59Px.Opt_Curve] (x=1, 2),
the relationship between the value of the setting and the curve is shown in the table below.
59Px.Opt_Curve Time Characteristic k α c
ANSIDefTime ANSI Definite Time - - -
IECDefTime IEC Definite Time - - -
UserDefine UserDefine
InvTime_U InvCrv_U 1 1 0

When the setting [59Px.Opt_Curve] is set as “InvTime_U”, the operation characteristic is the

PCS-9611S Feeder Relay 3-65

Date: 2020-12-30
 3 Protection Settings

corresponding selected operating curve type, and the settings [59Px.K], [59Px.C] and [59Px.Alpha]
are useless.
When the setting [59Px.Opt_Curve] is set as “UserDefine”, i.e. the user-defined inverse-time
characteristic is selected, the inverse-time operating curve is determined by the settings [59Px.K],
[59Px.C] and [59Px.Alpha].
When the setting [59Px.Opt_Curve] is set as “ANSIDefTime” or “IECDefTime”, it is definite-time
overvoltage protection.
10. [59Px.Opt_Curve_DropOut]
It is the setting for selecting the drop-out characteristic curve of stage x (x=1, 2) of phase
overvoltage protection.
Inst: instantaneous drop-out
DefTime: definite-time drop-out
⚫ Instantaneous drop-out

3 When U <[59Px.K_DropOut]* Up , the protection drops out immediately.

⚫ Definite-time drop-out
When U <[59Px.K_DropOut]* Up , the protection drops out with a time delay of tdr (i.e. the value
of the setting [59Px.t_DropOut]), and the drop-out characteristic curve is shown in the following
figure:

Start time

U>Up

Start
signal

Operating
signal

Protection
Operating threshold operate

Operating
counter

t dr t dr t dr
Dropout time setting
Dropout time
Dropout time

Figure 3.8-2 Definite-time drop-out characteristic of phase overvoltage protection

11. [59Px.TMS]
It is the time multiplier setting for stage x (x=1, 2) of inverse-time overvoltage protection.
This setting can be deduced according to the operating time required for the inverse-time
overvoltage protection.

3-66 PCS-9611S Feeder Relay

Date: 2020-12-30
 3 Protection Settings

12. [59Px.tmin]
It is the minimum delay for stage x (x=1, 2) of inverse-time overvoltage protection.
When inverse-time characteristic is selected, if the calculated operating time is less than the
setting [59Px.tmin], then the operating time changes to the value of the setting [59Px.tmin]
automatically.
The recommended value is 0.02s.
13. [59Px.K]
It is constant “K” for stage x (x=1, 2) of customized inverse-time characteristic overvoltage
protection.
It shall be set according to the characteristic of inverse-time overvoltage protection.
Only when the setting [59Px.Opt_Curve] is set as “UserDefine”, i.e. the user-defined inverse-time
characteristic is selected, the setting [59Px.K] is useful.
14. [59Px.Alpha]
It is constant “Alpha” for stage x (x=1, 2) of customized inverse-time characteristic overvoltage
3
protection.
It shall be set according to the characteristic of inverse-time overvoltage protection.
Only when the setting [59Px.Opt_Curve] is set as “UserDefine”, i.e. the user-defined inverse-time
characteristic is selected, the setting [59Px. Alpha] is useful.
15. [59Px.C]
It is constant “C” for stage x (x=1, 2) of customized inverse-time characteristic overvoltage
protection.
It shall be set according to the characteristic of inverse-time overvoltage protection.
Only when the setting [59Px.Opt_Curve] is set as “UserDefine”, i.e. the user-defined inverse-time
characteristic is selected, the setting [59Px. C] is useful.

3.9 Residual Overvoltage Protection

Access path in device LCD:
MainMenuSettingsProtection SettingsROV Settings
Access path in PCS-Studio configuration tool:
Project NodeIED NodeSettingGroupXProtection_SettingsROV_Settings
No. Settings Range Unit Step
1 59G.Opt_3U0 Ext; Cal - -
2 59G1.3U0_Set 1~200 V 0.001
3 59G1.K_DropOut 0.93 ~1 - 0.001
4 59G1.t_Op 0.1 ~100 s 0.001
5 59G1.t_DropOut 0 ~100 s 0.001
6 59G1.En Disabled; Enabled - -
7 59G1.Opt_Trp/Alm Trp; Alm - -
8 59G2.3U0_Set 1~200 V 0.001
9 59G2.K_DropOut 0.93 ~1 - 0.001
10 59G2.t_Op 0.1 ~100 s 0.001
11 59G2.t_DropOut 0 ~100 s 0.001

PCS-9611S Feeder Relay 3-67

Date: 2020-12-30
 3 Protection Settings

No. Settings Range Unit Step

12 59G2.En Disabled; Enabled - -
13 59G2.Opt_Trp/Alm Trp; Alm - -

Residual overvoltage protection is provided with two stages, each stage has independent voltage
setting, time delay and control logic.
1. [59G.Opt_3U0]
The setting is used to select the residual voltage that used for stage x (x=1, 2) of residual
overvoltage protection.
Ext: the measured residual voltage
Cal: the calculated residual voltage
2. [59Gx.3U0_Set]
It is the voltage setting of stage x (x=1, 2) of residual overvoltage protection, it is set according to
3 3U0.
It shall be larger than the maximum unbalance residual voltage under normal condition.
⚫ For small current earthed system:
The residual overvoltage protection is generally used for alarm. It shall be larger than maximum
unbalanced residual voltage under normal conditions.
0.5×𝑈2𝑛
Using the calculated residual voltage: [59Gx.3U0_Set]= (U2n is VT secondary rated voltage)
1.732
0.5×𝑈2𝑛_𝐷𝑒𝑙𝑡𝑎
Using the open-delta residual voltage: [59Gx.3U0_Set]= 1.732
(U2n_Delt is open-delta VT
secondary rated voltage)
⚫ For earthed system via gap
2𝑛 2×𝑈
Using the calculated residual voltage: [59Gx.3U0_Set]= 1.732 (U2n is VT secondary rated voltage)
1.8×𝑈
2𝑛_𝐷𝑒𝑙𝑡𝑎
Using the open-delta residual voltage: [59Gx.3U0_Set]= 1.732 (U2n_Delt is open-delta VT
secondary rated voltage, the VT ratio of the open-delta VT in the gap overvoltage system is
usually U1n/(U2n*1.732). For example, if U2n is 100V, U 2n_Delt will be 173V.
⚫ For single-phase earth fault of unearthed system
1.2×𝑈2𝑛
Using calculated residual voltage: [59Gx.3U0_Set]= 1.732
(U2n is VT secondary rated voltage)
1.2×𝑈
2𝑛_𝐷𝑒𝑙𝑡𝑎
Using open-delta residual voltage: [59Gx.3U0_Set]= 1.732
(U2n_Delt is open-delta VT
secondary rated voltage, the VT ratio of the open-delta VT in the unearthed system is usually
U1n/(U2n/1.732). For example, if U2n is 100V, U 2n_Delt will be 57.73V.
3. [59Gx.K_DropOut]
It is the drop-out coefficient of stage x (x=1, 2) of residual overvoltage protection.
The recommended value is 0.98.
4. [59Gx.t_Op]
It is the time delay of stage x (x=1, 2) of residual overvoltage protection.
It shall be set to keep the protection away from the influence of transient characteristic and the
recommended value is 0.3s~0.5s.
5. [59Gx.t_DropOut]
The drop-out time setting of stage x (x=1, 2) of residual overvoltage protection.
The supported drop-out characteristics of the residual overvoltage protection include

3-68 PCS-9611S Feeder Relay

Date: 2020-12-30
 3 Protection Settings

instantaneous drop-out and definite-time drop-out.

⚫ Instantaneous drop-out
When [59Gx.t_DropOut] is set as “0”, the drop-out characteristics is instantaneous drop-out.
When U0<[59Gx.K_DropOut]* U0p, the protection drops out immediately.
⚫ Definite-time drop-out
When [59Gx.t_DropOut] is not set as “0”, the drop-out characteristics is definite-time drop-out.
When U0<[59Gx.K_DropOut]*U0p, the protection drops out with a time delay of 𝑡𝑑𝑟 (i.e. the value
of the setting [59Gx.t_DropOut]), and the drop-out characteristic curve is shown in the following
figure:

Start time

U0>U0p

3
Start
signal

Operating
signal

Protection
Operating threshold operate

Operating
counter

t dr t dr t dr
Dropout time setting
Dropout time
Dropout time

Figure 3.9-1 Definite-time drop-out characteristic of residual overvoltage protection

The recommended value is 0.
6. [59Gx.En]
It is a logic setting, which is used to enable or disable stage x (x=1, 2) of residual overvoltage
protection.
7. [59Gx.Opt_Trp/Alm]
It is a logic setting, which is used to enable stage x (x=1, 2) of residual overvoltage protection
operate to trip or alarm.
Trp: for tripping purpose
Alm: for alarm purpose

3.10 Negative-sequence Overvoltage Protection

Access path in device LCD:

PCS-9611S Feeder Relay 3-69

Date: 2020-12-30
 3 Protection Settings

MainMenuSettingsProtection SettingsNegOV Settings

Access path in PCS-Studio configuration tool:
Project NodeIED NodeSettingGroupXProtection_SettingsNegOV_Settings
No. Setting Range Unit Step
1 59Q1.U2_Set 2~100 V 0.001
2 59Q1.K_DropOut 0.93~1 - 0.001
3 59Q1.t_Op 0.1~100 s 0.001
4 59Q1.t_DropOut 0~100 s 0.001
5 59Q1.En Disabled; Enabled - -
6 59Q1.Opt_Trp/Alm Trp; Alm - -
7 59Q2.U2_Set 2~100 V 0.001
8 59Q2.K_DropOut 0.93~1 - 0.001

3 9 59Q2.t_Op 0.1~100 s 0.001

10 59Q2.t_DropOut 0~100 s 0.001
11 59Q2.En Disabled; Enabled - -
12 59Q2.Opt_Trp/Alm Trp; Alm - -

This device provides two stages of negative-sequence overvoltage protection.

On a healthy three-phase power system, the negative sequence voltage is nominally zero.
However, when an unbalance situation occurs on the primary system, the negative sequence
voltage is produced.
1. 59Qx.U2_Set
It is the voltage setting of stage x (x=1, 2) of negative-sequence overvoltage protection, it is set
according to U2.
The voltage setting of the negative sequence overvoltage protection is calculated as below.
[59𝑄𝑥. 𝑈2_𝑆𝑒𝑡 = 𝐾𝑟𝑒𝑙 × 𝑈2𝑛 /1.732
Where:
U2n is the VT secondary rated voltage.
Krel is the reliable coefficient.
Krel needs to be set according to the specific application. If the negative-sequence overvoltage
protection is used to release the relevant current protection when detect the reverse phase
sequence connection or the asymmetric fault, then the setting value can be not very sensitive, and
Krel is recommended to be set as 0.1. If the negative-sequence overvoltage protection is used to
detect the unbalance of the rotating motor and prevent the motor from overheating and burning out,
Krel is recommended to be set as 0.03.
For example: assuming that the rated secondary value of VT U2n=100V, Krel is set as 0.1, so
[59Qx.U2_Set]=0.1*100/1.732=5.78V.
In addition, the setting value needs to avoid the maximum unbalance negative-sequence voltage
during normal operation.
2. 59Qx.K_DropOut
It is the drop-out coefficient of stage x of negative-sequence overvoltage protection (x=1, 2).
The recommended value is 0.98. If the voltage setting is low, to avoid frequent jitter, the value of
this setting can be appropriately reduced.
3. 59Qx.t_Op

3-70 PCS-9611S Feeder Relay

Date: 2020-12-30
 3 Protection Settings

It is time delay of stage x of negative-sequence overvoltage protection. (x=1, 2)

When the negative-sequence voltage operating threshold is large, the value of the time delay
setting can be appropriately reduced, such as 1s. If the negative-sequence voltage setting is small,
it is recommended to set this setting to a larger value, such as 5s.
4. 59Qx.t_DropOut
The drop-out time setting of stage x of negative-sequence overvoltage protection. (x=1, 2)
The supported drop-out characteristics of the negative-sequence overvoltage protection include
instantaneous drop-out and definite-time drop-out.
⚫ Instantaneous drop-out
When U2 <[ 59Qx.K_DropOut]*[59Qx.U2_Set] (x: 1~2), the protection drops out immediately.
⚫ Definite-time drop-out
When U2 <[59Qx.K_DropOut]*[59Qx.U2_Set] (x: 1~2), the protection drops out with a time delay
of tdr (i.e. the value of the setting [59Qx.t_DropOut]), and the drop-out characteristic curve is
shown in the following figure: 3
Start time

U 2> U2p

Start signal

Operating
signal

Protection
Operating threshold operate

Operating
counter

t dr t dr t dr
Dropout time setting
Dropout time
Dropout time

The recommended value is 0.

5. 59Qx.En
It is a logic setting, which is used to enable or disable stage x of negative-sequence overvoltage
protection (x=1, 2).
6. 59Qx. Opt_Trp/Alm
It is a logic setting, which is used to enable stage x of negative-sequence overvoltage protection
operates to trip or alarm (x=1, 2).
Trp: for tripping purpose
Alm: for alarm purpose

PCS-9611S Feeder Relay 3-71

Date: 2020-12-30
 3 Protection Settings

3.11 Positive-sequence Overvoltage Protection

Access path in device LCD:
MainMenuSettingsProtection SettingsPosOV Settings
Access path in PCS-Studio configuration tool:
Project NodeIED NodeSettingGroupXProtection_SettingsPosOV_Settings
No. Setting Range Unit Step
1 59Pos.U1_Set 2~100 V 0.001
2 59Pos.K_DropOut 0.93~1 - 0.001
3 59Pos.t_Op 0.1~100 s 0.001
4 59Pos.t_DropOut 0~100 s 0.001
5 59Pos.En Disabled; Enabled - -

3 6 59Pos.Opt_Trp/Alm Trp; Alm - -

This device provides one stage of positive-sequence overvoltage protection.

1. 59Pos.U1_Set
It is the voltage setting of positive-sequence overvoltage protection, it is set according to U1.
The voltage setting of the positive-sequence overvoltage protection is calculated as below.
[59𝑃𝑜𝑠. 𝑈1_𝑆𝑒𝑡 = (1.1~1.5) × 𝑈2𝑛 /1.732
Where:
U2n is VT secondary rated voltage.
This voltage threshold needs to be set according to the specific application. Normally, the
positive-sequence overvoltage protection is mainly used to reflect the system overvoltage, so 1.1
times the rated voltage is recommended.
For example: assuming that the rated secondary value of VT U2n=100V, the voltage multiple is 1.1,
so [59Pos.U1_Set]=1.1*100/1.732=63.5V.
2. 59Pos.K_DropOut
It is the drop-out coefficient of positive-sequence overvoltage protection.
Its recommended value is 0.98. If the voltage setting is low, to avoid frequent jitter, the value of this
setting can be appropriately reduced.
3. 59Pos.t_Op
It is time delay of positive-sequence overvoltage protection.
When the positive-sequence voltage operating threshold is large, the value of the time delay
setting can be appropriately reduced, such as 1s. If the positive-sequence voltage setting is small,
it is recommended to set this setting to a larger value, such as 5s.
4. 59Pos.t_DropOut
The drop-out time setting of positive-sequence overvoltage protection.
The supported drop-out characteristics of positive-sequence overvoltage protection include
instantaneous drop-out and definite-time drop-out.
⚫ Instantaneous drop-out
When U1<[59Pos.K_DropOut]*[59Pos.U1_Set], the protection drops out immediately.
⚫ Definite-time drop-out
When U1 <[59Pos.K_DropOut]*[59Pos.U1_Set], the protection drops out with a time delay of tdr

3-72 PCS-9611S Feeder Relay

Date: 2020-12-30
 3 Protection Settings

(i.e. the value of the setting [59Pos.t_DropOut]), and the drop-out characteristic curve is shown in
the following figure:

Start time

U 1> U1p

Start signal

Operating
signal

3
Protection
Operating threshold operate

Operating
counter

t dr t dr t dr
Dropout time setting
Dropout time
Dropout time

Its recommended value is 0.

5. 59Pos.En
It is a logic setting, which is used to enable or disable positive-sequence overvoltage protection.
6. 59Pos.Opt_Trp/Alm
It is a logic setting, which is used to enable positive-sequence overvoltage protection operate to
trip or alarm.
Trp: for tripping purpose
Alm: for alarm purpose

3.12 Undervoltage Protection

Access path in device LCD:
MainMenuSettingsProtection SettingsUV Settings
Access path in PCS-Studio configuration tool:
Project NodeIED NodeSettingGroupXProtection_SettingsUV_Settings
No. Settings Range Unit Step
1 27P.Opt_Up/Upp Up; Upp - -
2 27P.Opt_1P/3P 3P; 1P - -

PCS-9611S Feeder Relay 3-73

Date: 2020-12-30
 3 Protection Settings

No. Settings Range Unit Step

None;
Curr;
3 27P.Opt_LogicMode CBPos; - -
CurrOrCBPos;
CurrAndCBPos
4 27P1.U_Set 5~120 V 0.001
5 27P1.K_DropOut 1~1.2 - 0.001
6 27P1.t_Op 0.1 ~100 s 0.001
7 27P1.t_DropOut 0 ~100 s 0.001
8 27P1.En_VTS_Blk Disabled; Enabled - -
9 27P1.En Disabled; Enabled - -
10 27P1.Opt_Trp/Alm Trp; Alm - -
ANSIDefTime;
IECDefTime;
3 11 27P1.Opt_Curve
UserDefine;
InvTime_U
- -

12 27P1.Opt_Curve_DropOut Inst; DefTime - -

13 27P1.TMS 0.04~ 20 - 0.001
14 27P1.tmin 0.03 ~10 s 0.001
15 27P1.K 0.001~120 - 0.0001
16 27P1.Alpha 0.01 ~3 - 0.0001
17 27P1.C 0 ~1 - 0.0001
18 27P2.U_Set 5~120 V 0.001
19 27P2.K_DropOut 1~1.2 - 0.001
20 27P2.t_Op 0.1 ~100 s 0.001
21 27P2.t_DropOut 0 ~100 s 0.001
22 27P2.En_VTS_Blk Disabled; Enabled - -
23 27P2.En Disabled; Enabled - -
24 27P2.Opt_Trp/Alm Trp; Alm - -
ANSIDefTime;
IECDefTime;
25 27P2.Opt_Curve - -
UserDefine;
InvTime_U
26 27P2.Opt_Curve_DropOut Inst; DefTime - -
27 27P2.TMS 0.04~ 20 - 0.001
28 27P2.tmin 0.03 ~10 s 0.001
29 27P2.K 0.001~120 - 0.0001
30 27P2.Alpha 0.01 ~3 - 0.0001
31 27P2.C 0 ~1 - 0.0001

Undervoltage protection is provided with two stages, each stage has independent voltage setting,
time delay and control logic.
1. [27P.Opt_Up/Upp]
It is used to select phase-to-phase voltage or phase-to-ground voltage as voltage criterion for
undervoltage protection.
Up: phase-to-ground voltage
Upp: phase-to-phase voltage

3-74 PCS-9611S Feeder Relay

Date: 2020-12-30
 3 Protection Settings

2. [27P.Opt_1P/3P]
It is used to select 1-out-of-3 mode or 3-out-of-3 mode for undervoltage protection.
3P: 3-out-of-3 mode
1P: 1-out-of-3 mode
When this setting is set as “1P”, undervoltage protection will operate if any phase-to-ground
voltage or phase-to-phase voltage is under voltage. When this setting is set as “3P”, undervoltage
protection will operate only if three phase-to-ground voltages or three phase-to-phase voltages are
under voltage.
3. [27P.Opt_LogicMode]
The breaker closed position check mode is configured via the setting [27P.Opt_LogicMode], it
includes:
[27P.Opt_LogicMode]=None: no-check;
[27P.Opt_LogicMode]=Curr: check the current;
[27P.Opt_LogicMode]=CBPos: check the breaker position;
3
[27P.Opt_LogicMode]=CurrAndCBPos: check the current and the breaker position;
[27P.Opt_LogicMode]=CurrOrCBPos: check the current or the breaker position.
The breaker position means the closed position of the breaker.
Select the check mode according to the actual situation on site. When the load current is relatively
fixed and is larger than 0.04In, the current criterion is recommended, such as the capacitor and
reactor load. Otherwise, the breaker position criterion is recommended.
When the breaker position can be acquired, and the load current is also larger than 0.04In,
comprehensive criterion can also be used.
For the case the incoming line breaker have been tripped and the busbar loses voltage,
low-voltage protection is still desired to operate at this time, the breaker position criterion needs to
be selected.
4. [27Px.U_Set]
It is the voltage setting for stage x (x=1, 2) of undervoltage protection.
This setting should be set according to the actual stability level of power system, but it should
ensure enough sensitivity for a fault at the end of the line and not be larger than the minimum
operation voltage under normal conditions. This setting should also be set according to the setting
[27Px.Opt_Up/Upp]. If the setting [27Px.Opt_Up/Upp] is set as "Upp", then phase-to-phase
voltage will be used for calculation, [27Px.U_Set] should be set as phase-to-phase voltage. If the
setting [27Px.Opt_Up/Upp] is set as "Up", then phase-to-ground voltage will be used for
calculation, [27Px.U_Set] should be set as phase-to-ground voltage.
Application example:
If the operating criterion adopts phase-to-phase voltage, Un=110V, 70% of Un is assigned for
undervoltage protection. The setting will be given as below:
[27Px.Opt_Up/Upp]=Upp
[27Px.U_Set]=77V
If the operating criterion adopts phase-to-ground voltage, Un=63.5V, 70% of Un is assigned for
undervoltage protection. The setting will be given as below:
[27Px.Opt_Up/Upp]=Up
[27Px.U_Set]=44.45V
5. [27Px.K_DropOut]

PCS-9611S Feeder Relay 3-75

Date: 2020-12-30
 3 Protection Settings

It is the drop-out coefficient of stage x (x=1, 2) of phase undervoltage protection.

The recommended value is 1.03.
6. [27Px.t_Op]
It is the time delay for stage x (x=1, 2) of undervoltage protection.
It shall be set according to the voltage control strategy.
7. [27Px.t_DropOut]
The drop-out time setting of stage x (x=1, 2) of phase undervoltage protection.
This setting is valid when definite-time drop-out characteristic is selected. When
U >[27Px.K_DropOut]* Up , the protection drops out with a time delay of tdr (i.e. the value of the
setting [27Px.t_DropOut]), and the drop-out characteristic curve is shown in the following figure:

Start time

3 U<Up

Start
signal

Operating
signal

Protection
Operating threshold operate

Operating
counter

t dr t dr t dr
Dropout time setting
Dropout time
Dropout time

The recommended value is 0.

8. [27Px.En_VTS_Blk]
It is a logic setting, which is used to enable or disable stage (x=1, 2) x of undervoltage protection
controlled by VT circuit failure.
When the setting [27Px.En_VTS_Blk] is set as “Enabled”, undervoltage protection will be blocked
if VT circuit fails.
9. [27Px.En]
It is a logic setting, which is used to enable or disable stage x (x=1, 2) of undervoltage protection.
10. [27Px.Opt_Trp/Alm]
It is a logic setting, which is used to enable stage x (x=1, 2) of phase undervoltage protection
operate to trip or alarm.
Trp: for tripping purpose
Alm: for alarm purpose

3-76 PCS-9611S Feeder Relay

Date: 2020-12-30
 3 Protection Settings

11. [27Px.Opt_Curve]
It is used to select the characteristic curve for stage x (x=1, 2) of undervoltage protection.
Undervoltage protection can operate with a definite-time limit, it can also operate with an
inverse-time limit. Undervoltage protection can support definite-time limit, inverse time limit and
user-defined time limit, users can select the wanted operating curve by the setting
[27Px.Opt_Curve], the relationship between the value of the setting and the curve is shown in the
table below.
27Px.Opt_Curve Time Characteristic k α c
ANSIDefTime ANSI Definite Time - - -
IECDefTime IEC Definite Time - - -
UserDefine UserDefine
InvTime_U InvCrv_U 1 1 0

When the setting [27Px.Opt_Curve] is set as “InvTime_U”, the operation characteristic is the
corresponding selected operating curve type, and the settings [27Px.K], [27Px.C] and [27Px.Alpha]
are useless.
3
When the setting [27Px.Opt_Curve] is set as “UserDefine”, i.e. the user-defined inverse-time
characteristic is selected, the inverse-time operating curve is determined by the settings [27Px.K],
[27Px.C] and [27Px.Alpha].
When the setting [27Px.Opt_Curve] is set as “ANSIDefTime” or “IECDefTime”, it is definite-time
undervoltage protection.
12. [27Px.Opt_Curve_DropOut]
It is the setting for selecting the drop-out characteristic curve of stage x (x=1, 2) of phase
undervoltage protection.
Inst: instantaneous drop-out
DefTime: definite-time drop-out
⚫ Instantaneous drop-out
When U >[27Px.K_DropOut]* Up , the protection drops out immediately.
⚫ Definite-time drop-out
When U >[27Px.K_DropOut]* Up , the protection drops out with a time delay of tdr (i.e. the value
of the setting [27Px.t_DropOut]), and the drop-out characteristic curve is shown in the following
figure:

PCS-9611S Feeder Relay 3-77

Date: 2020-12-30
 3 Protection Settings

Start time

U<Up

Start
signal

Operating
signal

Protection
Operating threshold operate

3 Operating
counter

t dr t dr t dr
Dropout time setting
Dropout time
Dropout time

13. [27Px.TMS]
It is the time multiplier setting for stage x (x=1, 2) of inverse-time undervoltage protection.
This setting can be deduced according to the operating time required for the inverse-time
undervoltage protection.
14. [27Px.tmin]
It is the minimum time delay for stage x (x=1, 2) of inverse-time undervoltage protection.
When inverse-time characteristic is selected, if the calculated operating time is less than the
setting [27Px.tmin], then the operating time changes to the value of the setting [27Px.tmin]
automatically.
The recommended value is 0.03s.
15. [27Px.K]
It is constant “K” for stage x (x=1, 2) of customized inverse-time characteristic undervoltage
protection.
It shall be set according to the characteristic of inverse-time undervoltage protection.
Only when the setting [27Px.Opt_Curve] is set as “UserDefine”, i.e. the user-defined inverse-time
characteristic is selected, the setting [27Px.K] is useful.
16. [27Px.Alpha]
It is constant “Alpha” for stage x (x=1, 2) of customized inverse-time characteristic undervoltage
protection.
It shall be set according to the characteristic of inverse-time undervoltage protection.
Only when the setting [27Px.Opt_Curve] is set as “UserDefine”, i.e. the user-defined inverse-time
characteristic is selected, the setting [27Px. Alpha] is useful.
17. [27Px.C]
It is constant “C” for stage x (x=1, 2) of customized inverse-time characteristic undervoltage

3-78 PCS-9611S Feeder Relay

Date: 2020-12-30
 3 Protection Settings

protection.
It shall be set according to the characteristic of inverse-time undervoltage protection.
Only when the setting [27Px.Opt_Curve] is set as “UserDefine”, i.e. the user-defined inverse-time
characteristic is selected, the setting [27Px. C] is useful.

3.13 Overfrequency Protection

Access path in device LCD:
MainMenuSettingsProtection SettingsFreqProt Settings
Access path in PCS-Studio configuration tool:
Project NodeIED NodeSettingGroupXProtection_SettingsFreqProt_Settings
No. Setting Range Unit Step
1 81.Upp_Blk 10~150 V 0.001
2 81O1.f_Set 50~65 Hz 0.001 3
3 81O1.t_Op 0.1~100 s 0.001
4 81O1.En Disabled; Enabled - -
5 81O2.f_Set 50~65 Hz 0.001
6 81O2.t_Op 0.1~100 s 0.001
7 81O2.En Disabled; Enabled - -
8 81O3.f_Set 50~65 Hz 0.001
9 81O3.t_Op 0.1~100 s 0.001
10 81O3.En Disabled; Enabled - -
11 81O4.f_Set 50~65 Hz 0.001
12 81O4.t_Op 0.1~100 s 0.001
13 81O4.En Disabled; Enabled - -
14 81O5.f_Set 50~65 Hz 0.001
15 81O5.t_Op 0.1~100 s 0.001
16 81O5.En Disabled; Enabled - -
17 81O6.f_Set 50~65 Hz 0.001
18 81O6.t_Op 0.1~100 s 0.001
19 81O6.En Disabled; Enabled - -

Overfrequency protection is provided with six stages, each stage has independent frequency
setting, time delay and control logic.
1. [81.Upp_Blk]
When any phase-to-phase voltage is lower than the setting [81.Upp_Blk], the overfrequency
protection will be blocked.
This setting should be set according to the phase-to-phase voltage. The recommended value is
0.7Unn (Unn is rated phase-to-phase voltage).
2. [81Ox.f_Set]
It is the frequency setting for stage x (x=1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6) of overfrequency protection.
All stages can be set based on the same graduation. After rejecting some power supplies and
each stage operating, the system frequency should be restored near the rated frequency. Because
compound mode of generators (hydroelectric, thermal power, nuclear power with different capacity
and proportion, different adaptability to abnormal frequency), system structure and operation

PCS-9611S Feeder Relay 3-79

Date: 2020-12-30
 3 Protection Settings

mode are different in different power system, they should be set according to the system
frequency and stability control strategy.
3. [81Ox.t_Op]
It is the time delay for stage x (x=1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6) of overfrequency protection.
It shall be set according to the system frequency and stability control strategy.
4. [81Ox.En]
It is a logic setting, which is used to enable or disable stage x (x=1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6) of overfrequency
protection.

3.14 Underfrequency Protection

Access path in device LCD:
MainMenuSettingsProtection SettingsFreqProt Settings
3 Access path in PCS-Studio configuration tool:
Project NodeIED NodeSettingGroupXProtection_SettingsFreqProt_Settings
No. Setting Range Unit Step
1 81.Upp_Blk 10~150 V 0.001
2 81U1.f_Set 45~60 Hz 0.001
3 81U1.t_Op 0.1~100 s 0.001
4 81U1.En Disabled; Enabled - -
5 81U2.f_Set 45~60 Hz 0.001
6 81U2.t_Op 0.1~100 s 0.001
7 81U2.En Disabled; Enabled - -
8 81U3.f_Set 45~60 Hz 0.001
9 81U3.t_Op 0.1~100 s 0.001
10 81U3.En Disabled; Enabled - -
11 81U4.f_Set 45~60 Hz 0.001
12 81U4.t_Op 0.1~100 s 0.001
13 81U4.En Disabled; Enabled - -
14 81U5.f_Set 45~60 Hz 0.001
15 81U5.t_Op 0.1~100 s 0.001
16 81U5.En Disabled; Enabled - -
17 81U6.f_Set 45~60 Hz 0.001
18 81U6.t_Op 0.1~100 s 0.001
19 81U6.En Disabled; Enabled - -

Underfrequency protection is provided with six stages, each stage has independent frequency
setting, time delay and control logic.
1. [81.Upp_Blk]
When any phase-to-phase voltages is lower than the setting [81.Upp_Blk], the underfrequency
protection will be blocked.
This setting should be set according to the phase-to-phase voltage. The recommended value is
0.7Unn (Unn is rated phase-to-phase voltage).
2. [81Ux.f_Set]

3-80 PCS-9611S Feeder Relay

Date: 2020-12-30
 3 Protection Settings

It is the frequency setting for stage x (x=1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6) of underfrequency protection.

All stages can adopt cascade connection, and small graduation can be set among them, for
example, taking 0.2Hz. Selecting one special stage, it can avoid system frequency always keeping
in a certain frequency. When some loads are shed after other stages of underfrequency protection
operate to shed major loads and make the system frequency restore to normal value.
3. [81Ux.t_Op]
It is the time delay for stage x (x=1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6) of underfrequency protection.
It shall be set according to the system frequency and stability control strategy.
4. [81Ux.En]
It is a logic setting, which is used to enable or disable stage x (x=1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6) of underfrequency
protection.

3.15 Frequency Rate-of-change Protection

Access path in device LCD:
3
MainMenuSettingsProtection SettingsFreqProt Settings
Access path in PCS-Studio configuration tool:
Project NodeIED NodeSettingGroupXProtection_SettingsFreqProt_Settings
No. Setting Range Unit Step
1 81.Upp_Blk 10~150 V 0.001
2 81R1.df/dt_Set -5~5 Hz/s 0.001
3 81R1.t_Op 0.1~100 s 0.001
4 81R1.f_Pkp 45~65 Hz 0.001
5 81R1.En Disabled; Enabled - -
6 81R2.df/dt_Set -5~5 Hz/s 0.001
7 81R2.t_Op 0.1~100 s 0.001
8 81R2.f_Pkp 45~65 Hz 0.001
9 81R2.En Disabled; Enabled - -
10 81R3.df/dt_Set -5~5 Hz/s 0.001
11 81R3.t_Op 0.1~100 s 0.001
12 81R3.f_Pkp 45~65 Hz 0.001
13 81R3.En Disabled; Enabled - -
14 81R4.df/dt_Set -5~5 Hz/s 0.001
15 81R4.t_Op 0.1~100 s 0.001
16 81R4.f_Pkp 45~65 Hz 0.001
17 81R4.En Disabled; Enabled - -
18 81R5.df/dt_Set -5~5 Hz/s 0.001
19 81R5.t_Op 0.1~100 s 0.001
20 81R5.f_Pkp 45~65 Hz 0.001
21 81R5.En Disabled; Enabled - -
22 81R6.df/dt_Set -5~5 Hz/s 0.001
23 81R6.t_Op 0.1~100 s 0.001
24 81R6.f_Pkp 45~65 Hz 0.001

PCS-9611S Feeder Relay 3-81

Date: 2020-12-30
 3 Protection Settings

25 81R6.En Disabled; Enabled - -

Rate-of-change frequency protection is provided with six stages, each stage has independent
rate-of-change frequency setting, time delay and control logic.
1. 81.Upp_Blk
When any phase-to-phase voltages is lower than the setting [81.Upp_Blk], the rate-of-change
frequency protection will be blocked.
This setting should be set according to the phase-to-phase voltage. Its recommended value is
0.7Un(Un is rated line voltage).
2. 81Rx.df/dt_Set
It is rate of change setting for stage x of rate-of-change frequency protection (x=1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6).
If fast reduction of frequency caused due to large active power shortage after the system fault, it is
required to remove excess load line fast and prevent frequency reduction as early as possible, to
avoid frequency collapse accident, and the set value is recommended to be -0.8 ~ -2Hz/s.
3 If fast increase of frequency caused when the system power is too large(e.g. more than 20%) due
to sudden surplus, the measures for link tripping together with generator cutting shall be provided,
to avoid large increase of frequency, and the set value is recommended to be 0.8 ~ 2Hz/s.
3. 81Rx.t_Op
It is time delay for stage x of rate-of-change frequency protection. (x=1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6)
It shall be set according to the requirements of the system on frequency, and recommended to be
set value 0.1~0.2s.
4. 81Rx.f_Pkp
It is the pickup frequency setting for stage x of rate-of-change frequency protection. (x=1, 2, 3, 4, 5,
6)
It shall be set according to the requirements of the system on frequency, and recommended to be
set value as 50Hz or 60Hz.
5. 81Rx.En
It is a logic setting, which is used to enable or disable stage x of rate-of-change frequency
protection. (x=1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6)

3.16 Reverse Power Protection

Access path in device LCD:
MainMenuSettingsProtection SettingsRevPower Settings
Access path in PCS-Studio configuration tool:
Project NodeIED NodeSettingGroupXProtection_SettingsRevPower_Settings
No. Settings Range Unit Step
1 32R.U1_VCE 5.000~60.000 V 0.001
2 32R.I1_CCE 0.010~1.000 p.u. 0.001
3 32R.U2_VCE 8.000~60.000 V 0.001
4 32R1.P_Set 0.100~10.000 p.u. 0.001
5 32R1.t_Op 0.010~100.000 s 0.001
6 32R1.En Disabled; Enabled - -
7 32R1.Opt_Trp/Alm Trp; Alm - -
8 32R2.P_Set 0.100~10.000 p.u. 0.001

3-82 PCS-9611S Feeder Relay

Date: 2020-12-30
 3 Protection Settings

No. Settings Range Unit Step

9 32R2.t_Op 0.010~100.000 s 0.001
10 32R2.En Disabled; Enabled - -
11 32R2.Opt_Trp/Alm Trp; Alm - -

Reverse power protection is provided with two stages, each stage has separated power setting,
time delay and control logic.
1. 32R.U1_VCE, 32R.I1_CCE
[32R.U1_VCE] is the voltage setting of the positive-sequence voltage control element of the
reverse power protection.
[32R.I1_CCE] is the positive-sequence current setting of the current control element of the reverse
power protection.
When the positive-sequence voltage is lower than the setting [32R.U1_VCE] and the
positive-sequence current is lower than the setting [32R. I1_CCE] at the same time, the reverse
power protection will be blocked. 3
1) [32R.U1_VCE]
Its recommended value is 5V.
2) [32R.I1_CCE]
Its recommended value is 0.1 p.u.
For line protection, the rated current value is [Prot.I2n] (Rated secondary value of protection phase
CT).
2. 32R.U2_VCE
It is the voltage setting of the negative-sequence voltage control element of the reverse power
protection.
When the negative-sequence voltage is greater than the setting [32R.U2_VCE], the reverse power
protection will be blocked.
Its recommended value is 8V.
3. 32Rx.P_Set
It is positive-sequence power setting for stage x of reverse power protection (x=1, 2).
Generally, the minimum measurable power during reverse power operation is taken. The
recommended value is 0.01 p.u.~0.03 p.u.

For line protection, the rated power value is 3  [ Prot.I 2n]  [ Prot.U 2n] .

For motor protection, the rated power value is 3  [ Motor.In]  [ Prot.U 2n] .
4. 32Rx.t_Op
It is the time delay setting of stage x of reverse power protection (x=1, 2).
It shall be set according to the affordability of the protected equipment.
For synchronous motor, the time delay setting should ensure that after the power supply is
interrupted, the reverse power protection operates to trip the circuit breaker before the power
supply is restored, so to avoid non-synchronous impact on the synchronous motor.
5. 32Rx.En
It is a logic setting, which is used to enable or disable stage x of reverse power protection (x=1, 2).
6. 32R1.Opt_Trp/Alm

PCS-9611S Feeder Relay 3-83

Date: 2020-12-30
 3 Protection Settings

It is a logic setting, which is used to enable stage x of reverse power protection operates to trip or
alarm.
Trp: for tripping purpose
Alm: for alarm purpose

3.17 Cold Load Pickup Logic

Access path in device LCD:
MainMenuSettingsProtection SettingsCLP Settings
Access path in PCS-Studio configuration tool:
Project NodeIED NodeSettingGroupXProtection_SettingsCLP_Settings
No. Setting Range Unit Step
Curr;
1 CLP.Opt_LogicMode - -
3 2 CLP.t_Cold
CBPos
0~4000 s 0.001
3 CLP.t_Rst 0~4000 s 0.001
4 CLP.t_ShortRst 0~600 s 0.001
5 CLP.En Disabled; Enabled - -
6 50/51P1.CLP.IMult 1~10 - 0.001
7 50/51P1.CLP.t_Op 0~100 s 0.001
8 50/51P1.CLP.TMS 0.05~100 s 0.001
9 50/51G1.CLP.IMult 1~10 - 0.001
10 50/51G1.CLP.t_Op 0~100 s 0.001
11 50/51G1.CLP.TMS 0.05~100 s 0.001
12 50/51P2.CLP.IMult 1~10 - 0.001
13 50/51P2.CLP.t_Op 0~100 s 0.001
14 50/51P2.CLP.TMS 0.05~100 s 0.001
15 50/51G2.CLP.IMult 1~10 - 0.001
16 50/51G2.CLP.t_Op 0~100 s 0.001
17 50/51G2.CLP.TMS 0.05~100 s 0.001
18 50/51P3.CLP.IMult 1~10 - 0.001
19 50/51P3.CLP.t_Op 0~100 s 0.001
20 50/51P3.CLP.TMS 0.05~100 s 0.001
21 50/51G3.CLP.IMult 1~10 - 0.001
22 50/51G3.CLP.t_Op 0~100 s 0.001
23 50/51G3.CLP.TMS 0.05~100 s 0.001
24 50/51P4.CLP.IMult 1~10 - 0.001
25 50/51P4.CLP.t_Op 0~100 s 0.001
26 50/51P4.CLP.TMS 0.05~100 s 0.001
27 50/51G4.CLP.IMult 1~10 - 0.001
28 50/51G4.CLP.t_Op 0~100 s 0.001
29 50/51G4.CLP.TMS 0.05~100 s 0.001
30 50/51P5.CLP.IMult 1~10 - 0.001
31 50/51P5.CLP.t_Op 0~100 s 0.001

3-84 PCS-9611S Feeder Relay

Date: 2020-12-30
 3 Protection Settings

32 50/51P5.CLP.TMS 0.05~100 s 0.001

33 50/51G5.CLP.IMult 1~10 - 0.001
34 50/51G5.CLP.t_Op 0~100 s 0.001
35 50/51G5.CLP.TMS 0.05~100 s 0.001
36 50/51P6.CLP.IMult 1~10 - 0.001
37 50/51P6.CLP.t_Op 0~100 s 0.001
38 50/51P6.CLP.TMS 0.05~100 s 0.001
39 50/51G6.CLP.IMult 1~10 - 0.001
40 50/51G6.CLP.t_Op 0~100 s 0.001
41 50/51G6.CLP.TMS 0.05~100 s 0.001

If the CLP logic operates, the CLP settings are enabled for the overcurrent protection and the
earth fault overcurrent protection respectively. After the drop-out time delay of the CLP logic has
elapsed, the normal protection settings are applied. And if a fast resetting signal is received, the
normal protection settings are applied after the pre-defined short resetting time delay. 3
1. CLP.Opt_LogicMode
This setting is used for selecting the cold load initiation condition.
Curr: current
CBPos: CB position
When the CB position can be connected, it is recommended to select the CB position as the cold
load initiation condition.
2. CLP.t_Cold
It is the time setting for ensuring the cold load condition is met.
If it needs to cooperate with the reclosing, then it needs to be set as a shorter time delay than the
reclosing operating time delay to ensure that the cold load initiation logic is entered before closing.
If it doesn't need to cooperate with the reclosing, user can set it longer to ensure the reliability of
the initiation conditions. 3s is recommended.
3. CLP.t_Rst
It is the time setting for resetting the cold load pickup logic.
When the cold load condition is not met, it will reset with a time delay, after the drop-out time delay
of the CLP logic has elapsed, the CLP logic is released.
This setting usually needs to be set in combination with actual applications. If the CLP is used to
avoid the transformer inrush current, then this setting can be set to be longer than the inrush
current. If the CLP is used to avoid the starting current of the motor, then this setting needs to be
greater than the starting time of the motor.
4. CLP.t_ShortRst
It is the time setting for fast resetting the cold load pickup logic. In some special cases, the cold
load pickup needs to accelerate the resetting, then the accelerated resetting time can be set by
this setting.
5. CLP.En
It is a logic setting, which is used to enable or disable cold load pickup logic.
When user need to avoid the transformer inrush current or the starting current of the motor, user
can choose to enable the cold load pickup logic.
6. 50/51Px.CLP.IMult
The multiple setting of stage x of overcurrent protection when CLP is active (x=1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6).

PCS-9611S Feeder Relay 3-85

Date: 2020-12-30
 3 Protection Settings

If the original current setting of stage x of overcurrent protection is Ip, if the CLP logic starts, the
current setting of stage x of overcurrent protection becomes Ip*[50/51Px.CLP.IMult]. After the CLP
logic resets, the current setting of stage x of overcurrent protection becomes Ip again.
This setting usually needs to be set according to the actual applications. If the CLP is used to
avoid the transformer inrush current, then the current setting value amplified by this setting must
be larger than the actual inrush current, but it must make sure it can operate when a fault occurs. If
the current setting of stage x of overcurrent protection does not need to be adjusted, then this
setting needs to be set as 1.
7. 50/51Px.CLP.t_op
It is the time setting of stage x of overcurrent protection when CLP is active (x=1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6).
If the original time setting of stage x of overcurrent protection is t, if the CLP logic starts, the time
setting of stage x of overcurrent protection becomes [50/51Px.CLP.t_op]. After the CLP logic
resets, the time setting of stage x of overcurrent protection becomes t again. If the time setting of
stage x of overcurrent protection does not need to be adjusted, then this setting needs to be set as
t.
3 8. 50/51Px.CLP.TMS
It is the time multiplier setting of stage x of IDMT overcurrent protection when CLP is active (x=1, 2,
3, 4, 5, 6).
If the original IDMT time multiplier setting of stage x of overcurrent protection is TMS, if the CLP
logic starts, the IDMT time multiplier setting of stage x of overcurrent protection becomes
[50/51Px.CLP.TMS]. After the CLP logic resets, the IDMT time multiplier setting of stage x of
overcurrent protection becomes TMS again. If the IDMT time multiplier setting of stage x of
overcurrent protection does not need to be adjusted, then this setting needs to be set as TMS.
9. 50/51Gx.CLP.IMult
It is the multiple setting of stage x of earth fault overcurrent protection when CLP is active (x=1, 2,
3, 4, 5, 6).
If the original current setting of stage x of earth fault overcurrent protection is 3I0, if the CLP logic
starts, the current setting of stage x of earth fault overcurrent protection becomes
3I0*[50/51Gx.CLP.IMult]. After the CLP logic resets, the current setting of stage x of earth fault
overcurrent protection becomes 3I0 again.
This setting usually needs to be set according to the actual applications. If the CLP is used to
avoid the transformer inrush current, then the current setting value amplified by this setting must
be larger than the actual inrush current, but it must make sure it can operate when a fault occurs. If
the current setting of stage x of earth fault overcurrent protection does not need to be adjusted,
then this setting needs to be set as 1.
10. 50/51Gx.CLP.t_op
It is the time setting of stage x of earth fault overcurrent protection when CLP is active (x=1, 2, 3, 4,
5, 6).
If the original time setting of stage x of earth fault overcurrent protection is t0, if the CLP logic starts,
the time setting of stage x of earth fault overcurrent protection becomes [50/51Gx.CLP.t_op]. After
the CLP logic resets, the time setting of stage x of earth fault overcurrent protection becomes t0
again. If the time setting of stage x of earth fault overcurrent protection does not need to be
adjusted, then this setting needs to be set as t0.
11. 50/51Gx.CLP.TMS
It is the time multiplier setting of stage x of IDMT earth fault overcurrent protection when CLP is
active (x=1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6).
If the original IDMT time multiplier setting of stage x of earth fault overcurrent protection is TMS, if
the CLP logic starts, the IDMT time multiplier setting of stage x of earth fault overcurrent protection
becomes [50/51Px.CLP.TMS]. After the CLP logic resets, the IDMT time multiplier setting of stage

3-86 PCS-9611S Feeder Relay

Date: 2020-12-30
 3 Protection Settings

x of earth fault overcurrent protection becomes TMS again. If the IDMT time multiplier setting of
stage x of earth fault overcurrent protection does not need to be adjusted, then this setting needs
to be set as TMS.

3.18 Undercurrent Protection

Access path in device LCD:
MainMenuSettingsProtection SettingsUC Settings
Access path in PCS-Studio configuration tool:
Project NodeIED NodeSettingGroupXProtection_SettingsUC_Settings
No. Setting Range Unit Step
1 37.I_Set 0.1~5 A 0.001
2 37.t_Op 0.1~100 s 0.001
3 37.Opt_1P/3P 1P; 3P
None; Curr; CBPos;
- -
3
4 37.Opt_LogicMode
CurrAndCBPos; CurrOrCBPos - -
5 37.En Disabled; Enabled - -
6 37.Opt_Trp/Alm Trp; Alm - -

It provides a one-stage undercurrent protection for monitoring a motor or a capacitor. If the circuit
breaker of the protected equipment is closed and the current is less than the predefined setting,
the undercurrent protection will operate.
1. 37.I_Set
The current setting of the undercurrent protection should reliably operate after the bus connected
with the capacitor loses the voltage, and should reliably restore after the bus voltage returns to
normal, which is generally set as 0.3 to 0.6 times of the rated current.
[37. 𝐼_𝑆𝑒𝑡] = (0.3~0.6) × 𝐼2𝑛
2. 37.t_Op
The protection operating time should coordinate with the standby protection operating time of
outgoing line at this side.
Operating time of protection:
[37. 𝑡_𝑂𝑝] = 𝑡 ′ + ∆𝑡
Where:
𝑡 ′ is the standby protection operating time required for coordination;
∆𝑡 is the coordination time, taken as 0.3~0.5s.
3. 37.Opt_1P/3P
It is used to select “1-out-of-3” or “3-out-of-3” logic for the protection criterion via the setting
[37.Opt_1P/3P].
1P: 1-out-of-3 mode
3P: 3-out-of-3 mode
If it is set as “1P”, undercurrent protection can operate if any phase current is smaller than the
current setting. If it is set as “3P”, undercurrent protection cannot operate unless three phase
currents are smaller than the current setting.
4. 37.Opt_LogicMode
The breaker closed position check mode is configured via the setting [37P.Opt_LogicMode], it

PCS-9611S Feeder Relay 3-87

Date: 2020-12-30
 3 Protection Settings

includes:
[37.Opt_LogicMode]=None: no-check;
[37.Opt_LogicMode]=Curr: check the current;
[37.Opt_LogicMode]=CBPos: check the breaker position;
[37.Opt_LogicMode]=CurrAndCBPos: check the current and the breaker position;
[37.Opt_LogicMode]=CurrOrCBPos: check the current or the breaker position.
The breaker position means the closed position of the breaker.
Select the check mode according to the actual situation on site. When the load current is relatively
fixed and is larger than 0.04In, the current criterion is recommended, such as the capacitor and
reactor load. Otherwise, the breaker position criterion is recommended.
When the breaker position can be acquired, and the load current is also larger than 0.04In,
comprehensive criterion can also be used.

3 For the case the incoming line breaker have been tripped and the busbar loses voltage,
undercurrent protection is still desired to operate at this time, the breaker position criterion needs
to be selected. If there is no breaker position to connected at this time, “no-check” can be selected,
but at this time, user must use other methods to ensure that the undercurrent protection will not
always operate before the equipment is put into operation (the breaker is not closed and there is
no current at this time) and it can reset reliably after the operation of undercurrent protection.
5. 37.En
It is a logic setting, which is used to enable or disable undercurrent protection.
6. 37.Opt_Trp/Alm
It is a logic setting, which is used to enable undercurrent protection operate to trip or alarm.
Trp: for tripping purpose
Alm: for alarm purpose

3.19 Breaker Failure Protection (50BF)

Access path in device LCD:
MainMenuSettingsProtection SettingsBFP Settings
Access path in PCS-Studio configuration tool:
Project NodeIED NodeSettingGroupXProtection_SettingsBFP_Settings
No. Setting Range Unit Step
1 50BF.I_Set 0.05~200 A 0.001
2 50BF.3I0_Set 0.05~200 A 0.001
3 50BF.I2_Set 0.05~200 A 0.001
4 50BF.t_ReTrp 0~20 s 0.001
5 50BF.t1_Op 0~20 s 0.001
6 50BF.t2_Op 0~20 s 0.001
7 50BF.En Disabled; Enabled - -
8 50BF.En_ReTrp Disabled; Enabled - -
9 50BF.En_t1 Disabled; Enabled - -
10 50BF.En_t2 Disabled; Enabled - -
11 50BF.En_Ip Disabled; Enabled - -

3-88 PCS-9611S Feeder Relay

Date: 2020-12-30
 3 Protection Settings

12 50BF.En_3I0_3P Disabled; Enabled - -

13 50BF.En_I2_3P Disabled; Enabled - -
14 50BF.En_CB_Ctrl Disabled; Enabled - -
15 50BF.En_Alm_Init Disabled; Enabled - -

1. [50BF.I_Set]
It is the phase current setting for detecting breaker failure protection.
The measured phase current is used to detect the circuit breaker failure. The setting should can detect
the fault with small fault current. It could be chosen in accordance with the most sensitive protection
function that initiate the breaker failure protection.
2. [50BF.3I0_Set]
It is the residual current setting for detecting breaker failure protection.
For the power system grounded via high impedance, the residual current is normally much smaller than
the short-circuit current for the single-phase earth fault. In order to reliably detect the circuit breaker
failure under the single-phase earth fault, it is necessary to add the zero-sequence current detection by 3
the setting [50BF.En_3I0_1P] (set as "Enabled"). At this time, the phase current setting [50BF.I_Set]
could be set more sensitive.
Taking into account that the faulty current is too small for generator or transformer fault, the sensitivity
of phase current element may not meet the requirements, zero-sequence current criterion and
negative-sequence current criterion are provided in addition to the phase overcurrent element for
breaker failure protection initiated by input signal [50BF.ExTrp3P] from external tripping. They can be
enabled or disabled by the settings [50BF.En_3I0_3P] and [50BF.En_I2_3P] respectively.
The setting [50BF.3I0_Set] shall be greater than maximum unbalance residual current under normal
operation condition.
3. [50BF.I2_Set]
It is the negative-sequence current setting for detecting breaker failure protection.
It shall be greater than the maximum negative-sequence unbalance current under normal operation
condition.
Its recommended setting principle can refer to the setting [50BF.3I0_Set].
4. [50BF.t_ReTrp]
It is the re-tripping time delay of breaker failure protection, generally it can be set as 5ms~50ms.
Its recommended value is 50ms.
5. [50BF.t1_Op]
It is the first time delay of breaker failure protection.
Breaker failure protection will send three-phase tripping command to trip local circuit breaker when
the time delay of [50BF.t1_Op] is expired. The setting [50BF.t1_Op] should be set as short as
possible on the premise that the selectivity of breaker failure protection is warrantable.
The recommended setting principle is as follows.
[50BF.t1_Op]=t0+tB+Δt
Where:
t0 is circuit breaker operation time, generally it takes 0.03~0.06s.
tB is the drop off time of the operation element, generally it takes 0.02~0.04s.
Δt is safety margin time, generally it takes 0.03s.
Normally, it is used to trip local circuit breaker again before the breaker failure protection with the
second time delay operating in case that the local circuit breaker could open to prevent to trip the
adjacent circuit breakers.

PCS-9611S Feeder Relay 3-89

Date: 2020-12-30
 3 Protection Settings

Its recommended value is 0.1s.

6. [50BF.t2_Op]
It is the second time delay of breaker failure protection.
Breaker failure protection will send three-phase tripping command to trip adjacent circuit breakers
when the time delay of [50BF.t2_Op] is expired. The setting [50BF.t2_Op] should be set as short
as possible on the premise that the selectivity of breaker failure protection is warrantable and
undesired operation must be avoided. Besides, the setting should be greater than the setting
[50BF.t1_Op] with safety margin.
The recommended setting principle is as follows.
[50BF.t2_Op]=t0+tB+Δt
Where:
t0 is circuit breaker operation time, generally taken as 0.03~0.06s.
tB is the drop off time of the operation element, generally taken as 0.02~0.04s.
3 Δt is safety time, generally taken as 0.1s.
Its recommended value is 0.2s.

The breaker failure protection with the time delay of [50BF.t1_Op] will only
trip local circuit breaker, and the breaker failure protection with the time
delay of [50BF.t2_Op] will trip all adjacent circuit breakers.
7. [50BF.En]
It is a logic setting, which is used to enable or disable breaker failure protection. It is a general control
setting for breaker failure protection.
8. [50BF.En_ReTrp]
It is a logic setting, which is used to enable/disable re-trip function of breaker failure protection.
When the setting is set as "Enabled", the instantaneous re-tripping function is in service.
After receiving tripping signal from the device and the corresponding current criterion or CB position
criterion is met, then the re-trip command will be issued to trip local circuit breaker.
9. [50BF.En_t1]
It is a logic setting, which is used to enable or disable the first time delay of breaker failure
protection.
10. [50BF.En_t2]
It is a logic setting, which is used to enable or disable the second time delay of breaker failure
protection.
11. [50BF.En_Ip]
It is a logic setting, which is used to enable/disable phase overcurrent criterion of breaker failure
protection via external three-phases initiating signal "50BF.ExTrp3P".
When the setting is set as "Enabled", the phase current criterion via external three-phases initiating
signal "50BF.ExTrp3P" is valid.
12. [50BF.En_3I0_3P]
It is a logic setting, which is used to enable/disable zero-sequence overcurrent criterion of breaker
failure protection via external three-phases initiating signal "50BF.ExTrp3P".
Its recommended setting principle can refer to the setting [50BF.3I0_Set].
13. [50BF.En_I2_3P]

3-90 PCS-9611S Feeder Relay

Date: 2020-12-30
 3 Protection Settings

It is a logic setting, which is used to enable/disable negative-sequence overcurrent criterion of breaker

failure protection via external three-phases initiating signal "50BF.ExTrp3P".
Its recommended setting principle can refer to the setting [50BF.3I0_Set].
14. [50BF.En_CB_Ctrl]
It is a logic setting, which is used to enable/disable breaker failure protection be initiated by CB open
position via external three-phases initiating signal "50BF.ExTrp3P".
For some special protection (for example, voltage protection), the fault current maybe is too small to
meet the current criterion when they operate. In order to make breaker failure protection can also
operate under the above situation, CB open position is used instead of the current criterion. The
precondition is that binary input signal [50BF.ExTrp_WOI] should be assigned by external trip signal.
15. [50BF.En_Alm_Init]
It is a logic setting, which is used to enable or disable abnormality check function of breaker failure
initiating signal.
It is used to enable/disable the supervision of binary input initiating signal of breaker failure
protection. If the setting is set as "Enabled", and the initiating status of the binary input signal 3
maintains more than 10s, then the binary input initiating signal will be considered as invalid and an
alarm " 50BF.Alm_Int" will be issued. If it is set as "Disabled", then the binary input signal will not
be supervised.

3.20 Switch-on-to-Fault Protection (SOTF)

Access path in device LCD:
MainMenuSettingsProtection SettingsSOTF Settings
Access path in PCS-Studio configuration tool:
Project NodeIED NodeSettingGroupXProtection_SettingsSOTF_Settings
No. Setting Range Unit Step
1 SOTF.t_En 0.2~100 s 0.001
2 50PSOTF.I_Set 0.05~200 A 0.001
3 50PSOTF.Up_Set 0~200 V 0.001
4 50PSOTF.Upp_Set 0~200 V 0.001
5 50PSOTF.U2_Set 0~200 V 0.001
6 50PSOTF.3U0_Set 0~200 V 0.001
7 50PSOTF.t_Op 0~100 s 0.001
8 50PSOTF.En Disabled; Enabled - -
9 50PSOTF.En_Hm2_Blk Disabled; Enabled - -
10 50PSOTF.En_Up_UV Disabled; Enabled - -
11 50PSOTF.En_Upp_UV Disabled; Enabled - -
12 50PSOTF.En_U2_OV Disabled; Enabled - -
13 50PSOTF.En_3U0_OV Disabled; Enabled - -
14 50GSOTF.Opt_3I0 Ext; Cal - -
15 50GSOTF.3I0_Set 0.05~200 A 0.001
16 50GSOTF.t_Op_3P 0~100 s 0.001
17 50GSOTF.En Disabled; Enabled - -
18 50GSOTF.En_Hm2_Blk Disabled; Enabled - -

1. [SOTF.t_En]

PCS-9611S Feeder Relay 3-91

Date: 2020-12-30
 3 Protection Settings

It is the initiating time for the SOTF protection, it refers to the time allowed for SOTF protection to
release after manual closing or auto-reclosing. It should be larger than the inherent time of the
closing time of the circuit breaker, but it should not be too long. The recommended value is 3s.
It is shared by phase overcurrent SOTF protection and earth fault overcurrent SOTF protection.
2. [50PSOTF.I_Set]
It is the current setting of phase overcurrent SOTF protection.
3. [50PSOTF.t_Op]
It is the time delay of phase overcurrent SOTF protection.
4. [50PSOTF.Up_Set]
It is the voltage setting for phase undervoltage supervision logic.
In order to improve the reliability, phase overcurrent SOTF protection can select phase voltage
element as auxiliary criterion.

3 Its recommended value is 1V.

5. [50PSOTF.Upp_Set]
It is the voltage setting for phase-phase undervoltage supervision logic.
In order to improve the reliability, phase overcurrent SOTF protection can select phase-to-phase
voltage element as auxiliary criterion.
Its recommended value is 1V.
6. [50PSOTF.U2_Set]
It is the voltage setting for negative-sequence overvoltage supervision logic.
In order to improve the reliability, phase overcurrent SOTF protection can select
negative-sequence voltage element as auxiliary criterion.
Its recommended value is 1V.
7. [50PSOTF.3U0_Set]
It is the voltage setting for zero-sequence overvoltage supervision logic.
In order to improve the reliability, phase overcurrent SOTF protection can select zero-sequence
voltage element as auxiliary criterion.
Its recommended value is 1V.
8. [50PSOTF.En_Up_UV]
It is a logic setting, which is used to enable or disable phase undervoltage supervision logic for
phase overcurrent SOTF protection.
If the setting is set as "Disabled", the phase undervoltage criterion will not take effect.
9. [50PSOTF.En_Upp_UV]
It is a logic setting, which is used to enable or disable phase-phase undervoltage supervision logic
for phase overcurrent SOTF protection.
If the setting is set as "Disabled", the phase-to-phase undervoltage criterion will not take effect.
10. [50PSOTF.En_U2_OV]
It is a logic setting, which is used to enable or disable negative-sequence overvoltage supervision
logic for phase overcurrent SOTF protection.
If the setting is set as "Disabled", the negative-sequence overvoltage criterion will not take effect.
11. [50PSOTF.En_3U0_OV]

3-92 PCS-9611S Feeder Relay

Date: 2020-12-30
 3 Protection Settings

It is a logic setting, which is used to enable or disable zero-sequence overvoltage supervision logic
for phase overcurrent SOTF protection.
If the setting is set as "Disabled", the zero-sequence overvoltage criterion will not take effect.
12. [50PSOTF.En]
It is a logic setting, which is used to enable or disable phase overcurrent SOTF protection.
13. [50PSOTF.En_Hm2_Blk]
It is a logic setting, which is used to enable or disable second harmonic blocking for phase
overcurrent SOTF protection.
For in-line transformer application, large inrush current generated during manual closing and
auto-reclosing will lead to an undesired operation of phase overcurrent SOTF protection. Second
harmonic blocking can be selected by the setting [50PSOTF.En_Hm2_Blk] to prevent
mal-operation due to inrush current.
14. [50SOTF.3I0_Set]
It is the current setting of earth fault overcurrent SOTF protection. 3
This setting should ensure sufficient sensitivity to grounding fault with high impedance at the end
of the line.
Its recommended value is 1A.
15. [50GSOTF.t_Op_3P]
It is the time delay for earth fault overcurrent SOTF protection when 3-pole closed.
Its recommended value is 0.1s.
16. [50GSOTF.En]
It is a logic setting, which is used to enable or disable earth fault overcurrent SOTF protection.
17. [50GSOTF.En_Hm2_Blk]
It is a logic setting, which is used to enable or disable earth fault overcurrent SOTF protection
blocked by harmonic.
For in-line transformer application, large inrush current generated during manual closing and
auto-reclosing will lead to an undesired operation of earth fault overcurrent SOTF protection.
Second harmonic blocking can be selected by the setting [50GSOTF.En_Hm2_Blk] to prevent
mal-operation due to inrush current.

3.21 Thermal Overload Protection (49)

Access path in device LCD:
MainMenuSettingsProtection SettingsThOvld Settings
Access path in PCS-Studio configuration tool:
Project NodeIED NodeSettingGroupXProtection_SettingsThOvld_Settings
No. Setting Range Unit Step
1 49.Ib_Set 0.050~200.000 A 0.001
2 49.K_Trp 1.000~3.000 - 0.001
3 49.K_Alm 1.000~3.000 - 0.001
4 49.Tau 0.100~100.000 min 0.001
5 49.K_T_Diff 0.000~200.000 - 0.001
6 49.Alpha_Cold 1.000~2.000 - 0.001

PCS-9611S Feeder Relay 3-93

Date: 2020-12-30
 3 Protection Settings

7 49.C_Disspt 0.100~10.000 - 0.001

8 49.En_Trp Disabled; Enabled - -
9 49.En_Alm Disabled; Enabled - -

1. [49.Ib_Set]
It is the base current setting of thermal overload protection.
It is generally recommended to be set equal to the rated current of the protected equipment.
2. [49.K_Trp]
It is the thermal overload factor setting for tripping.
It shall be set according actual requirements, and generally it is set as 1.2~1.5.
3. [49.K_Alm]
It is the thermal overload factor setting for alarm.

3 It shall be set according to actual requirements, and generally it is set as 1.1~1.3.

4. [49.Tau]
It is the heat accumulation time constant of thermal overload protection.
It is determined by the thermal characteristic of the equipment.
5. [49.K_T_Diff]
It is the temperature constant of thermal overload protection.
It is used to calculate the temperature difference between transformer windings and oil, which
should be provided by transformer manufacturers.
Generally, the setting should be set between 20 and 30.
6. [49.Alpha_Cold]
It is the cooling factor of thermal overload protection.
For the thermal overload protection using method 1 (please refer to the technical manual for the
detailed information about method 1 and method 2), it is recommended to take 2.
For the thermal overload protection using method 2, the setting takes different values under
different cooling conditions, usually it takes 1.6~2.
7. [49.C_Disspt]
It is the heat dissipation time constant setting.
When the equivalent heating current Ieq is lower than 0.04In, the thermal time constant adopts the
value of [49.Tau]*[49.C_Disspt], and the time constants of heat accumulation and heat dissipation
are different in the case. When the setting is set as “1”, the same time constant is used for heat
accumulation and heat dissipation.
For special generators and motors, set the setting value according to the parameters provided by
the manufacturer.
For other application scenarios, its recommended value is 1.
8. [49.En_Trp]
It is a logic setting, which is used to enable or disable thermal overload protection operate to trip.
9. [49.En_Alm]
It is a logic setting, which is used to enable or disable thermal overload protection operate to
alarm.

3-94 PCS-9611S Feeder Relay

Date: 2020-12-30
 3 Protection Settings

3.22 Restricted Earth Fault Protection (64REF)

Access path in device LCD:
MainMenuSettingsProtection SettingsREF Settings
Access path in PCS-Studio configuration tool:
Project NodeIED NodeSettingGroupXProtection_SettingsREF_Settings
No. Setting Range Unit Step
1 64REF.I_Biased 0.050~5.000 In 0.001
2 64REF.I_Alm 0.050~1.500 In 0.001
3 64REF.I_Knee 0.100~4.000 In 0.001
4 64REF.Slope 0.200~0.750 - 0.001
5 64REF.ROA 45.000~90.000 deg 0.001
6 64REF.I_NP_OnLoad 0.040~40.000 A 0.001
3
7 64REF.t_Op 0.000~20.000 s 0.001
8 64REF.En Enabled, Disabled - -
9 64REF.En_NPCurr Enabled, Disabled - -
10 64REF.En_CTS_Blk Enabled, Disabled - -
11 64REF.En_Dir_Blk Enabled, Disabled - -

3.22.1 Setting Guideline

1. [64REF.I_Biased]
It is the pickup current setting of REF protection.
It shall be greater than the maximum unbalance current while transformer operates under normal
rated load, i.e.
[64REF. 𝐼_𝐵𝑖𝑎𝑠𝑒𝑑] = 𝐾𝑟𝑒𝑙 × (𝐾𝑒𝑟 + ∆𝑚)𝐼𝑛
Where:
𝐼𝑛 is the CT secondary rated current of transformer.
𝐾𝑟𝑒𝑙 is the reliability coefficient (generally 𝐾𝑟𝑒𝑙 =1.3~1.5).
𝐾𝑒𝑟 is the CT ratio errors (for 10P class, 𝐾𝑒𝑟 = 0.03×2, and for 5P class and TP class,
𝐾𝑒𝑟 =0.01×2).
∆𝑚 is the error caused by the difference between ratios of CTs, and 0.05 is recommended.
The pickup current setting of REF takes the secondary rated current of CT (i.e. In, 1A or 5A) as its
unit, whose setting value is calculated with the reference to the side having the minimum ratio
among all CTs for REF (the ratio of the maximum primary current to the minimum primary current
among each side CT is within 4 times). If it is the actual current value to the reference side in
actual setting calculation, then this actual value will be divided by the secondary rated current of
CT (i.e. In, 1A or 5A) to derive the setting value.
In actual projects, the pickup current setting can be set according to the value greater than the
measured unbalance current of zero-sequence differential circuit under the maximum load current.
The setting should be not less than 0.1In and the recommended value is 0.2In~0.5In.

The unit (i.e. In) of the setting calculation ([64REF.I_Biased]) is the

secondary rated current of CT, and the minimum corrected coefficient of

PCS-9611S Feeder Relay 3-95

Date: 2020-12-30
 3 Protection Settings

the side is taken as the reference side (the ratio of the maximum primary
current to the minimum primary current among each side CT is within 4
times). If a setting value got from calculation is together with its unit Ampere,
this setting value shall be divided by the secondary rated current of CT to
get per unit value which is the configuration value input to the device.
2. [64REF.I_Alm]
It is the current setting of REF abnormality alarm. This setting should be greater than maximum
unbalance current during normal operation.
Its recommended value is 0.1~0.3In, or [64REF.I_Biased]×0.8.
3. [64REF.I_Knee]
It is the knee point setting of REF. Its recommended value is 0.5In.
4. [64REF.Slope]
It is the percentage restraint coefficient of REF protection.
3 The setting is percent restraint coefficient of winding differential protection, which shall be greater
than unbalance current caused by zero-sequence current flowing through the transformer during
an external fault.
The setting calculation equation is given below.
[64REF. Slope] = 𝐾𝑟𝑒𝑙 × (𝐾𝑎𝑝 × 𝐾𝑐𝑐 × 𝐾𝑒𝑟 + ∆𝑚)
Where:
∆𝑚 is the error caused by the difference between ratios of CTs.
𝐾𝑟𝑒𝑙 is reliability coefficient.
𝐾𝑒𝑟 is the ratio errors of CT.
𝐾𝑐𝑐 is the “same type coefficient” of CT, and 1.0 is recommended.
𝐾𝑎𝑝 = 1.0 if CTs at both sides are TP class, or 𝐾𝑎𝑝 =1.5~2.0 if CT at both sides are P class.
Generally, in practical setting calculation for projects, [64REF.Slope] can be taken as 0.30.7, and
its recommended value is 0.5.
5. [64REF.ROA]
It is the operation angle setting of REF protection. The larger the value is, the wider the operation
range is. The smaller the value is, the narrower the operation range is.
When the CT ratio difference of each side is relatively large and the used CTs are Class P, the
recommended value of the setting is 45°~ 60°to ensure the reliability.
When the CT ratio difference of each side is relatively small and the used CTs are Class TP, the
recommended value of the setting is 60°~ 90°to ensure the sensitivity.
The recommended value according to project experiences: 60°.
6. [64REF.I_NP_OnLoad]
This is the current setting of neutral-point on-load criterion.
The setting should be greater than the maximum residual current due to phase-to-phase fault,
three-phase fault and three-phase grounding fault. If there is no actual calculated or measured
data, it usually takes the half of [64REF.I_Biased] as the setting value. The recommended range:
0.1In~0.5In. (Note: the unit of setting) [64REF.En_NPCurr] is “A”, and the unit of setting
[64REF.I_Biased] is “In”, so unit conversion is required.)
7. [64REF.t_Op]
It is the time delay for REF protection.

3-96 PCS-9611S Feeder Relay

Date: 2020-12-30
 3 Protection Settings

Its recommended value is 0 if restricted earth fault protection is required to instantaneous tripping.
Otherwise, it can be set as 50~100ms.
8. [64REF.En]
It is a logic setting, which is used to enable or disable REF protection.
9. [64REF.En_NPCurr]
It is a logic setting, which is used to enable or disable neutral current criterion.
It is recommended to be set as “Enabled”.
10. [64REF.En_CTS_Blk]
It is a logic setting, which is used to enable or disable blocking REF protection during CT circuit
failure.
11. [64REF.En_Dir_Blk]
It is the logic setting for enabling or disabling the function of direction criterion blocking REF
protection. It is recommended to be enabled when the CT transient characteristics is not well. If it
is enabled, the operation time of REF will have a relay of about 10~20ms.
3

When REF is enabled, if the maximum CT ratio to the minimum CT ratio

related to the protection is greater than 128, this will be considered
abnormal and wrong setting alarm will be issued.

3.22.2 Setting Example

Basic Parameters
Model SFP-60000/330 Winding connection mode Dyn1
Rated capacity 60MVA Rated voltage 330/132kV
Tap regulation range ±10% Impedance voltage percentage 13.92%
Zero-sequence impedance 39.99Ω/phase Cooling mode OFAF

Items High-voltage side CT Low-voltage side CT

CT ratio 400/1 400/1
CT class 5P 5P

HV-side minimum short-circuit current under minimum operation mode 1000A

HV-side three-phase short circuit current under maximum operation mode 6000A

1. [64REF.I_Biased]
[64REF. 𝐼_𝐵𝑖𝑎𝑠𝑒𝑑] = 𝐾𝑟𝑒𝑙 × (𝐾𝑒𝑟 + ∆𝑚)𝐼𝑛 = 1.5 × (0.02 + 0.05) = 0.105𝐼𝑛
Considering the maximum short-circuit secondary current is 15A and the error due to the actual
CT characteristic, the pickup current value can be set as “0.3In”.
2. [64REF.I_Alm]
This setting value should be lower than the setting [64REF.I_Biased] (i.e. 0.3In), and greater than
the maximum unbalance current, here, 0.2In can be taken.
3. [64REF.I_Knee]
Takes the recommended value, 0.5In.
4. [64REF.Slope]

PCS-9611S Feeder Relay 3-97

Date: 2020-12-30
 3 Protection Settings

Takes the recommended value, 0.5.

5. [64REF.ROA]
Takes the recommended value, 60°.
6. [64REF.I_NP_OnLoad]
This setting value takes a half of the setting [64REF.I_Biased] (i.e. 0.15In), the rated secondary
current of CT is 1A, so this setting can be set as “0.15A”.
7. [64REF.t_Op]
Because the protection uses the 5P class CT, whose transient characteristic is not well, and the
system short-circuit current is relatively large, so the setting is set as “40ms”.
8. [64REF.En]
Set it as “Enabled” to enable the REF protection.
9. [64REF.En_NPCurr]
3 Set it as “Enabled” to enable the neural current criterion.
10. [64REF.En_CTS_Blk]
Set it as “Disabled” to disable CT circuit failure blocking REF protection.
11. [64REF.En_Dir_Blk]
Considering the protection uses the 5P class CT, the setting is set as “Enabled” to enable the
direction criterion for ensuring the protection reliability.

3.23 Arc Flash Protection (50L/NL)

Access path in device LCD:
MainMenuSettingsProtection SettingsArcFlash Settings
Access path in PCS-Studio configuration tool:
Project NodeIED NodeSettingGroupXProtection_SettingsArcFlash_Settings
No. Settings Range Unit Step
2
1 50L/NL.LgtIncr_Set_Sensor01 5~30 mW/cm 0.1
2
2 50L/NL.LgtIncr_Set_Sensor02 5~30 mW/cm 0.1
2
3 50L/NL.LgtIncr_Set_Sensor03 5~30 mW/cm 0.1
2
4 50L/NL.LgtIncr_Set_Sensor04 5~30 mW/cm 0.1
5 50L/NL.K_Calbr_Sensor01 1~30000 1
6 50L/NL.K_Calbr_Sensor02 1~30000 1
7 50L/NL.K_Calbr_Sensor03 1~30000 1
8 50L/NL.K_Calbr_Sensor04 1~30000 1
9 50L/NL.Map.En_Sensor 0X0~0XF - -
10 50L/NL.I_Set 0.05~200 A 0.001
11 50L/NL.t_Op 0~1 s 0.001
12 50L/NL.En Disabled; Enabled - -
13 50L/NL.En_CCE Disabled; Enabled - -

The device can support up to 4 arc sensors.

1. [50L/NL.LgtIncr_Set_SensorX]
The light increment operating setting of the arc sensor X of arc flash protection. The

3-98 PCS-9611S Feeder Relay

Date: 2020-12-30
 3 Protection Settings

recommended setting range is 5~10 mW/cm2

2. [50L/NL.K_Calbr_SensorX]
The channel coefficient of the arc sensor X of arc flash protection. It is necessary to add an optical
signal for testing via a dedicated test instrument. First, the tester outputs a light intensity of 5 mW,
and observes the corresponding channel coefficient in the menu
MainMenu→Measurements→Function Values→ArcFlash Value, and then inputs the
coefficient as the value of the arc flash protection setting [50L/NL.K_Calbr_SensorX].
3. [50L/NL.Map.En_Sensor]
The logic setting for enabling/disabling each arc sensor, it can be set bit by bit.

Setting value 0X1 0X2 0X4 0X8

Arc sensor 01 02 03 04

If multiple sensors need to be selected at the same time, such as arc sensor 1 and arc sensor 2,
the setting can be set as 0X1+0X2=0X3, and so on. 3
4. [50L/NL.I_Set]
It is the current setting of arc flash protection, generally it should be set according to the maximum
load current. This setting is only valid if the logic setting [50L/NL.En_CCE] is set as “Enabled”.
5. [50L/NL.t_Op]
It is the time delay setting of arc flash protection, it should be set according to the actual needs of
the site, generally it is set as 0.
6. [50L/NL.En]
It is the logic setting for enabling/disabling arc flash protection.
7. [50L/NL.En_CCE]
It is the logic setting for enabling/disabling the current criterion of arc flash protection. If current can
be connected on site, it is recommended to be set as “Enabled”. If it is set as “Enabled”, the arc
flash protection can only operate if the current criterion and the arc criterion are satisfied at the
same time.

3.24 Current Unbalance Protection

Access path in device LCD:
MainMenuSettingsProtection SettingsUnbalCurrSettings
Access path in PCS-Studio configuration tool:
Project NodeIED NodeSettingGroupXProtection_SettingsUnbalCurr_Settings
No. Setting Range Unit Step
1 60/50-1.I_Set 0.02~5.0 A 0.001
2 60/50-1.t_Op 0.05~100 s 0.001
3 60/50-1.En Disabled; Enabled - -
4 60/50-1.Opt_Trp/Alm Trp; Alm - -
5 60/50-2.I_Set 0.02~5 A 0.001
6 60/50-2.t_Op 0.05~100 s 0.001
7 60/50-2.En Disabled; Enabled - -
8 60/50-2.Opt_Trp/Alm Trp; Alm - -

When it is a capacitor bank with double-star connection, the current unbalance protection can be

PCS-9611S Feeder Relay 3-99

Date: 2020-12-30
 3 Protection Settings

adopted. It provides two stages of current unbalance protection with independent logic.
A

52 52 52

Br1 Br2 Br1 Br2 Br1 Br2

3 1CT

60/50
*

1. 60/50-x.I_Set
It is the current setting of stage x of current unbalance protection (x=1, 2).
The current setting should be set to make sure that the subjected voltage of the other single
capacitors (or small capacitance components in a single capacitor) of the faulty phase does not
exceed a certain times of the rated voltage for a long time after some single capacitors (or small
capacitance components in a single capacitor) are cut off or broken down. And it should also
reliably avoid the unbalance current flowing between the neutral points of the capacitor bank
during normal operation.
1) For the capacitor bank that each single capacitor has dedicated fuse
First calculate the maximum number (K) of capacitors allowed to be cut off:
6𝑀𝑁(𝐾𝑣 − 1）
𝐾=
𝐾𝑣 (6𝑁 − 5)
K is an integer. If K is calculated as 10.6, then K=10
Calculate the neutral line current of double-star connection capacitor bank ∆𝐼:
3𝐾𝐼𝑒𝑏
∆𝐼 =
6𝑁(𝑀 − 𝐾) + 5𝐾
The current setting can be set as:
∆𝐼
[60/50-x.I_Set]=𝐾 > 𝐾𝑟𝑒𝑙 𝐼𝑏𝑝
𝑙𝑚

In where:
𝐼𝑏𝑝 is the unbalance current between neutral points during normal operation;
𝐼𝑒𝑏 is the capacitor single branch rated current;
M is the parallel connected capacitor number of each series connected section of each
branch;
N is number of series connected sections of each branch;
K is the capacitor number of the same parallel connected section that cut off due to fault;
𝐾𝑙𝑚 is the sensitivity coefficient, it takes 1.0~1.3;

3-100 PCS-9611S Feeder Relay

Date: 2020-12-30
 3 Protection Settings

𝐾𝑟𝑒𝑙 is the reliability coefficient, it takes 1.3~1.5;

𝐾𝑣 is the overvoltage coefficient, 𝐾𝑣 ≥ 1.1~1.15.
2) For the capacitor bank that each single capacitor doesn’t have dedicated fuse
First calculate the maximum allowable breakdown capacitive element percentage β of a
single capacitor
6𝑀𝑁(𝐾𝑣 − 1）
𝛽=
𝐾𝑣 (6𝑁(𝑀 − 1) + 5)
Calculate the neutral line current of double-star connection capacitor bank ∆𝐼:
3𝛽𝐼𝑒𝑏
∆𝐼 =
6𝑁(𝑀(1 − 𝛽) + 𝛽) − 5𝛽
The current setting can be set as:
∆𝐼
[60/50-x.I_Set]=𝐾 > 𝐾𝑟𝑒𝑙 𝐼𝑏𝑝
𝑙𝑚
3
In where:
𝐼𝑏𝑝 is the unbalance current between neutral points during normal operation;
𝐼𝑒𝑏 is the capacitor single branch rated current;
𝛽 is the maximum allowable breakdown capacitive element percentage β of a single
capacitor
M is the parallel connected capacitor number of each series connected section of each
branch;
N is number of series connected sections of each branch;
K is the capacitor number of the same parallel connected section that cut off due to fault;
𝐾𝑙𝑚 is the sensitivity coefficient, it takes 1.0~1.3;
𝐾𝑟𝑒𝑙 is the reliability coefficient, it takes 1.3~1.5;
𝐾𝑣 is the overvoltage coefficient, 𝐾𝑣 ≥ 1.1~1.15.
2. 60/50-x.t_Op
It is the time delay of stage x of current unbalance protection (x=1, 2). Generally it is set as
0.1~0.2s.
3. 60/50-x.En
It is a logic setting, which is used to enable or disable stage x of current unbalance protection. (x=1,
2)
4. 60/50-x.Opt_Trp/Alm
It is a logic setting, which is used to enable stage x of current unbalance protection operates to trip
or alarm. (x=1, 2)
Trp: for tripping purpose
Alm: for alarm purpose

3.25 Voltage Unbalance Protection

Access path in device LCD:
MainMenuSettingsProtection SettingsUnbalVolt Settings
Access path in PCS-Studio configuration tool:

PCS-9611S Feeder Relay 3-101

Date: 2020-12-30
 3 Protection Settings

Project NodeIED NodeSettingGroupXProtection_SettingsUnbalVolt_Settings

No. Setting Range Unit Step
1 60/59-1.U_Set 1~63.5 V 0.001
2 60/59-1.t_Op 0.1~100 s 0.001
3 60/59-1.En Disabled; Enabled - -
4 60/59-1.Opt_Trp/Alm Trp; Alm - -
5 60/59-2.U_Set 1~63.5 V 0.001
6 60/59-2.t_Op 0.1~100 s 0.001
7 60/59-2.En Disabled; Enabled - -
8 60/59-2.Opt_Trp/Alm Trp; Alm - -

When it is a capacitor bank with double-star connection, the voltage unbalance protection can be
adopted. It provides two stages of voltage unbalance protection with independent logic.

3 A

52 52 52

1VT
60/59

1. 60/59-x.U_Set
It is the voltage setting of stage x of voltage unbalance protection (x=1, 2).
The voltage setting should be set to make sure that the subjected voltage of the other single
capacitors (or small capacitance components in a single capacitor) of the faulty phase does not
exceed a certain times of the rated voltage for a long time after some single capacitors (or small
capacitance components in a single capacitor) are cut off or broken down. And it should also
reliably avoid the unbalance voltage of the capacitor bank during normal operation.
1) For the capacitor bank that each single capacitor has dedicated fuse
First calculate the maximum number (K) of capacitors allowed to be cut off:
3𝑀𝑁(𝐾𝑣 − 1）
𝐾=
𝐾𝑣 (3𝑁 − 2)
K is an integer. If K is calculated as 10.6, then K=10
Calculate the unbalance voltage of double-star connection capacitor bank ∆𝑈:
𝐾𝑈𝑒
∆𝑈 =
3𝑁(𝑀 − 𝐾) + 2𝐾
The voltage setting can be set as:

3-102 PCS-9611S Feeder Relay

Date: 2020-12-30
 3 Protection Settings
∆𝑈
[60/59-x.U_Set]= > 𝐾𝑟𝑒𝑙 𝑈𝑏𝑝
𝐾𝑙𝑚

In where:
𝑈𝑏𝑝 is the unbalance voltage between neutral points during normal operation;
𝑈𝑒 is the capacitor rated voltage;
M is the parallel connected capacitor number of each series connected section of each
branch;
N is number of series connected sections of each branch;
K is the capacitor number of the same parallel connected section that cut off due to fault;
𝐾𝑙𝑚 is the sensitivity coefficient, it takes 1.0~1.3;
𝐾𝑟𝑒𝑙 is the reliability coefficient, it takes 1.3~1.5;
𝐾𝑣 is the overvoltage coefficient, 𝐾𝑣 ≥ 1.1~1.15.
2) For the capacitor bank that each single capacitor doesn’t have dedicated fuse 3
First calculate the maximum allowable breakdown capacitive element percentage β of a
single capacitor
3𝑀𝑁(𝐾𝑣 − 1）
𝛽=
𝐾𝑣 (3𝑀𝑁 − 3𝑁 + 2)
Calculate the neutral line current of double-star connection capacitor bank ∆𝑈:
𝛽𝑈𝑒
∆𝑈 =
3𝑁(𝑀(1 − 𝛽) + 𝛽) − 2𝛽
The current setting can be set as:
∆𝑈
[60/59-x.U_Set]= > 𝐾𝑟𝑒𝑙 𝑈𝑏𝑝
𝐾𝑙𝑚

In where:
𝑈𝑏𝑝 is the unbalance voltage between neutral points during normal operation;
𝑈𝑒 is the capacitor rated voltage;
𝛽 is the maximum allowable breakdown capacitive element percentage β of a single
capacitor
M is the parallel connected capacitor number of each series connected section of each
branch;
N is number of series connected sections of each branch;
K is the capacitor number of the same parallel connected section that cut off due to fault;
𝐾𝑙𝑚 is the sensitivity coefficient, it takes 1.0~1.3;
𝐾𝑟𝑒𝑙 is the reliability coefficient, it takes 1.3~1.5;
𝐾𝑣 is the overvoltage coefficient, 𝐾𝑣 ≥ 1.1~1.15.
2. 60/59-x.t_Op
It is the time delay of stage x of voltage unbalance protection (x=1, 2). Generally it is set as 0.1~0.2s.
3. 60/59-x.En
It is a logic setting, which is used to enable or disable stage x of voltage unbalance protection (x=1,
2).
4. 60/59-x.Opt_Trp/Alm

PCS-9611S Feeder Relay 3-103

Date: 2020-12-30
 3 Protection Settings

It is a logic setting, which is used to enable stage x of voltage unbalance protection operate to trip
or alarm (x=1, 2).
Trp: for tripping purpose
Alm: for alarm purpose

3.26 Automatic Reclosure (79)

Access path in device LCD:
MainMenuSettingsProtection SettingsAR Settings
Access path in PCS-Studio configuration tool:
Project NodeIED NodeSettingGroupXProtection_SettingsAR_Settings

No. Name Range Unit Step

3 1 79.Num 1~4 - 1

2 79.t_Dd_3PS1 0~600 s 0.001

3 79.t_Dd_3PS2 0~600 s 0.001

4 79.t_Dd_3PS3 0~600 s 0.001

5 79.t_Dd_3PS4 0~600 s 0.001

6 79.t_CBClsd 0~600 s 0.001

7 79.t_CBReady 0~600 s 0.001

8 79.t_Wait_Chk 0~600 s 0.001

9 79.t_Reclaim 0~600 s 0.001

10 79.t_DDO_Blk 0~600 s 0.001

11 79.t_PersistTrp 0~600 s 0.001

12 79.t_Fail 0~600 s 0.001

13 79.t_PW 0~600 s 0.001

14 79.En_FailCheck Disabled; Enabled - -

15 79.En_CutPulse Disabled; Enabled - -

16 79.En Disabled; Enabled - -

17 79.Opt_Enable Setting; Setting&Config - -

18 79.En_CBInit Disabled; Enabled - -

19 79.Opt_RSYN_ValidMode Setting; Config - -

20 79.En_SynChk Disabled; Enabled - -

21 79.En_SynDd_RefDd Disabled; Enabled - -

22 79.En_SynLv_RefDd Disabled; Enabled - -

23 79.En_SynDd_RefLv Disabled; Enabled - -

24 79.En_NoChk Disabled; Enabled - -

1. [79.Num]

3-104 PCS-9611S Feeder Relay

Date: 2020-12-30
 3 Protection Settings

It is the maximum number of reclosing attempts.

The AR function could be set as one-shot or multi-shot. Through the setting [79.N_Rcls], the
maximum number of reclosing attempts can be set up to 4 times. Generally, only one-shot AR is
selected.
The table below shows the number of reclose attempts with respect to the settings and AR modes.
1-pole AR 3-pole AR 1/3-pole AR
Setting Value
N-1AR N-3AR N-1AR N-3AR N-1AR N-3AR
1 1 0 0 1 1 1
2 1 0 0 2 1 2
3 1 0 0 3 1 3
4 1 0 0 4 1 4

N-1AR: the reclosing number of 1-pole AR

N-3AR: the reclosing number of 3-pole AR
2. [79.t_Dd_3PS1]
3
It is the dead time of first shot 3-pole reclosing.
The setting should be set according to system stability requirement, arc-extinguishing of
instantaneous fault and insulation recovery ability should also be considered. In addition,
possibility for two-side protection (double power supply) to cut off fault with different time limit
should be taken into consideration.
Its recommended value is 0.6s.
3. [79.t_Dd_3PS2]
It is the dead time of second shot 3-pole reclosing.
It will be active only if the setting [79.Num] is set as more than 1.
Its recommended value is 0.6s.
4. [79.t_Dd_3PS3]
It is the dead time of third shot 3-pole reclosing.
It will be active only if the setting [79.Num] is set as more than 2.
Its recommended value is 0.6s.
5. [79.t_Dd_3PS4]
It is the dead time of fourth shot 3-pole reclosing.
It will be active only if the setting [79.Num] is set as more than 3.
Its recommended value is 0.6s.
6. [79.t_CBClsd]
It is used to set the waiting time needed by the circuit-breaker to obtain the AR ready state after
the circuit breaker is closed.
It is the minimum time delay for circuit breaker in closed position before AR gets ready. The
duration of the circuit breaker in closed position before fault occurrence is not less than the setting
[79.t_CBClsd] for a successful reclosing.
7. [79.t_CBReady]
It is the time delay to wait for CB healthy, and begin to timing when the input signal
[79.CB_Healthy] is de-energized and if it is not energized within this time delay, AR will be
blocked.
The input signal [79.CB_Healthy] must be energized before auto-reclosure gets ready. Because

PCS-9611S Feeder Relay 3-105

Date: 2020-12-30
 3 Protection Settings

most circuit breakers can finish one complete process: open-closed-open, it is necessary that
circuit breaker has enough energy before reclosing. When the dead time delay of AR is exhausted,
if the input signal [79.CB_Healthy] is still not energized within time delay [79.t_CBReady], AR will
be blocked. If this function is not required, the input signal [79.CB_Healthy] can be not to configure,
and its state will be thought as “1” by default.
8. [79.t_Wait_Chk]
It is the maximum wait time for synchronism check.
The setting is the maximum allowable time used for synchronism check. It is valid only if the
synchronism check mode is selected. If the synchronism check condition is not met after the delay
time elapsed, the synchronism check failed and the auto-reclosing will be blocked.
Its recommended value is 10s.
9. [79.t_Reclaim]
It is the reclaim time of AR.

3 The reset time of circuit breaker after auto-reclosing operation. With the assignment of the close
command, the automatic reclosing function goes into the reclaim time state. During this time, it is
decided if the current reclosing cycle was successful or not.
Its recommended value is 15s.
⚫ If during the reclaim time no further tripping occurs, the currently running automatic reclosing
cycle was successful.
⚫ If during the reclaim time another tripping occurred, the currently running automatic reclosing
cycle was not successful. If other automatic reclosing cycles are permitted, one of these
cycles will be used to continue the process. In contrast, if the currently executed cycle was the
last permissible cycle, the automatic reclosing process will end and be reported as
unsuccessful.
10. [79.t_DDO_BlkAR]
It is the drop-off time delay of blocking AR, when blocking signal for AR disappears, AR blocking
condition drops off after this time delay.
AR will be blocked immediately once the blocking condition of AR appears, and the blocking
condition of AR will drop off with a time delay [79.t_DDO_BlkAR] after blocking signal disappears.
11. [79.t_PersistTrp]
It is the time delay of excessive trip signal to block auto-reclosing.
When there is a fault on an overhead line, the concerned circuit breakers will be tripped normally.
After fault is cleared, the tripping command will drop off immediately. In case the circuit breaker is
in failure, etc., and the tripping signal of the circuit breaker maintains and exceeds the time delay
[79.t_PersistTrp], AR will be blocked. This setting should be longer than the longest tripping time
of circuit breaker plus safety margin.
Its recommended value is 0.2s.
12. [79.t_Fail]
It is the time delay waiting for CB close position to conform reclosing successful.
The setting is the time delay from reclosing command sent to unsuccessful reclosing, which shall
be greater than the reclosing operation time of circuit breaker. This time will be valid if the setting
[79.En_FailCheck] is set as "Enabled".
⚫ If during the time CB is closed, the currently running automatic reclosing cycle was
successful.
⚫ If during the time CB remains open, the currently running automatic reclosing cycle was not
successful, the automatic reclosing process will end and be reported as fail.

3-106 PCS-9611S Feeder Relay

Date: 2020-12-30
 3 Protection Settings

If the reclosing is considered as unsuccessful, the device will issue a signal “79.Fail_Rcls” to
indicate that the reclosing is unsuccessful. AR will not enter into the ready state unless the circuit
breaker position drops off, and can only begin to enter into the ready state again after the circuit
breaker is closed.
13. [79.t_PW]
It is the pulse width of AR closing signal
The setting shall be set according to actual requirements, if no tripping latch circuit, then the value
should be greater than the reclosing time of circuit breaker.
For the circuit breaker without anti-pump interlock, the setting [79.En_CutPulse] is available to
control the reclosing pulse. When this function is enabled, if the device operates to trip during
reclosing, the reclosing pulse will drop off immediately, so as to prevent multi-shot reclosing onto
fault.
Its recommended value is 0.12s.
14. [79.En_FailCheck]
It is a logic setting, which is used to enable or disable confirm whether AR is successful by
3
checking CB state.
Whether the reclosing is successful or not, it can be implemented by checking of CB status. If
[79.En_FailCheck] is set as "Enabled", the device will check CB status to confirm whether the
reclosing is successful or not.
15. [79.En_CutPulse]
It is a logic setting, which is used to enable or disable adjust the length of reclosing pulse.
For the circuit breaker without anti-pump interlock, a setting [79.En_CutPulse] is available to
control the reclosing pulse. When this function is enabled, if the device operates to trip during
reclosing, the reclosing pulse will drop off immediately, so as to prevent multi-shot reclosing onto
fault.
16. [79.En]
It is a logic setting, which is used to enable or disable auto-reclosing.
17. [79.Opt_Enable]
It is a logic setting, which is used to enable or disable AR by external input signal besides the logic
setting [79.En].
AR can be enabled or disabled by logic setting or external signal via binary input. If [79.
Opt_Enable] is set as “Setting&Config”, AR can be enabled if following condition satisfied:
⚫ Logic setting: [79.En] is set as "Enabled"
⚫ Binary input: "79.Enable" is energized
⚫ Binary input: "79.Block" is de-energized
If the setting [79.Opt_Enable] is set as “Setting”, AR will be enabled only by the logic setting
[79.En].
18. [79.En_CBInit]
It is a logic setting, which is used to enable or disable AR be initiated by circuit breaker open
position.
This setting is available for selection if AR is initiated by CB state. Under normal conditions, when
AR is ready to reclosing, AR will be initiated if circuit breaker is open and corresponding phase
current is nil.
19. [79.Opt_RSYN_ValidMode]
It is the control option of synchronism check mode for AR.

PCS-9611S Feeder Relay 3-107

Date: 2020-12-30
 3 Protection Settings

Config: select synchronism check mode for AR by configuration signals

Setting: select synchronism check mode for AR by the settings
synchronism check mode can be selected by external signal via input signals or internal logic
settings. If the logic setting [79.Opt_RSYN_ValidMode] set as “Setting”, synchronism check mode
is determined by the internal logic settings (if all corresponding settings are set as "Disabled", the
synchronism check mode for AR is abnormal and the alarm signal will be issued). If the logic
settings [79.Opt_RSYN_ValidMode] set as “Config”, AR mode is determined by the input signals
Logic settings:
No. Logic Setting
1 79.En_SynChk
2 79.En_SynDd_RefDd
3 79.En_SynLv_RefDd
4 79.En_SynDd_RefLv
3 5 79.En_NoChk

Input signals:
No. Input Signal
1 79.Sel_SynChk
2 79.Sel_SynDd_RefDd
3 79.Sel_SynLv_RefDd
4 79.Sel_SynDd_RefLv
5 79.Sel_NoChk

20. [79.En_SynChk]
It is a logic setting which is used for enabling/disabling synchronism check for AR.
It is valid only if the setting [79.Opt_RSYN_ValidMode] is set as "Setting".
21. [79.En_SynDd_RefDd]
It is a logic setting which is used for enabling/disabling dead synchronization voltage and dead
reference voltage check for AR.
It is valid only if the setting [79.Opt_RSYN_ValidMode] is set as "Setting".
22. [79.En_SynLv_RefDd]
It is a logic setting which is used for enabling/disabling live synchronization voltage and dead
reference voltage check for AR.
It is valid only if the setting [79.Opt_RSYN_ValidMode] is set as "Setting".
23. [79.En_SynDd_RefLv]
It is a logic setting which is used for enabling/disabling dead synchronization voltage and live
reference voltage check for AR.
It is valid only if the setting [79.Opt_RSYN_ValidMode] is set as "Setting".
24. [79.En_NoChk]
It is a logic setting which is used for enabling/disabling no check for AR.
It is valid only if the setting [79.Opt_RSYN_ValidMode] is set as "Setting".

3-108 PCS-9611S Feeder Relay

Date: 2020-12-30
 3 Protection Settings

3.27 Another Group of Phase Overcurrent Protection (S2.50/51P)

Access path in device LCD:
MainMenuSettingsProtection SettingsOC2 Settings
Access path in PCS-Studio configuration tool:
Project NodeIED NodeSettingGroupXProtection_SettingsOC2_Settings

No. Name Range Unit Step

1 S2.50/51P1.I_Set 0.05~200 A 0.001

2 S2.50/51P1.t_Op 0 ~100 s 0.001

3 S2.50/51P1.t_DropOut 0 ~100 s 0.001

4 S2.50/51P1.En Disabled; Enabled - -

5 S2.50/51P1.Opt_Trp/Alm Trp; Alm - - 3

ANSIE; ANSIV; ANSIN; ANSIM;
ANSIDefTime; ANSILTE; ANSILTV;
6 S2.50/51P1.Opt_Curve ANSILT; IECN; IECV; IEC; IECE; - -
IECST; IECLT; IECDefTime; Resv;
UserDefine

7 S2.50/51P1.Opt_Curve_DropOut Inst; DefTime; IDMT - -

8 S2.50/51P1.TMS 0.04~ 20 - 0.001

9 S2.50/51P1.tmin 0 ~10 s 0.001

10 S2.50/51P1.K 0.001~120 - 0.0001

11 S2.50/51P1.Alpha 0.01 ~3 - 0.0001

12 S2.50/51P1.C 0 ~1 - 0.0001

13 S2.50/51P2.I_Set 0.05~200 A 0.001

14 S2.50/51P2.t_Op 0 ~100 s 0.001

15 S2.50/51P2.t_DropOut 0 ~100 s 0.001

16 S2.50/51P2.En Disabled; Enabled - -

17 S2.50/51P2.Opt_Trp/Alm Trp; Alm - -

ANSIE; ANSIV; ANSIN; ANSIM;

ANSIDefTime; ANSILTE; ANSILTV;
18 S2.50/51P2.Opt_Curve ANSILT; IECN; IECV; IEC; IECE; - -
IECST; IECLT; IECDefTime; Resv;
UserDefine
19 S2.50/51P2.Opt_Curve_DropOut Inst; DefTime; IDMT - -

20 S2.50/51P2.TMS 0.04~ 20 - 0.001

21 S2.50/51P2.tmin 0 ~10 s 0.001

22 S2.50/51P2.K 0.001~120 - 0.0001

23 S2.50/51P2.Alpha 0.01 ~3 - 0.0001

24 S2.50/51P2.C 0 ~1 - 0.0001

PCS-9611S Feeder Relay 3-109

Date: 2020-12-30
 3 Protection Settings

25 S2.50/51P3.I_Set 0.05~200 A 0.001

26 S2.50/51P3.t_Op 0 ~100 s 0.001

27 S2.50/51P3.t_DropOut 0 ~100 s 0.001

28 S2.50/51P3.En Disabled; Enabled - -

29 S2.50/51P3.Opt_Trp/Alm Trp; Alm - -

ANSIE; ANSIV; ANSIN; ANSIM;

ANSIDefTime; ANSILTE; ANSILTV;
30 S2.50/51P3.Opt_Curve ANSILT; IECN; IECV; IEC; IECE; - -
IECST; IECLT; IECDefTime; Resv;
UserDefine
31 S2.50/51P3.Opt_Curve_DropOut Inst; DefTime; IDMT - -

32 S2.50/51P3.TMS 0.04~ 20 - 0.001

3 33 S2.50/51P3.tmin 0 ~10 s 0.001

34 S2.50/51P3.K 0.001~120 - 0.0001

35 S2.50/51P3.Alpha 0.01 ~3 - 0.0001

36 S2.50/51P3.C 0 ~1 - 0.0001

37 S2.50/51P4.I_Set 0.05~200 A 0.001

38 S2.50/51P4.t_Op 0 ~100 s 0.001

39 S2.50/51P4.t_DropOut 0 ~100 s 0.001

40 S2.50/51P4.En Disabled; Enabled - -

41 S2.50/51P4.Opt_Trp/Alm Trp; Alm - -

ANSIE; ANSIV; ANSIN; ANSIM;

ANSIDefTime; ANSILTE; ANSILTV;
42 S2.50/51P4.Opt_Curve ANSILT; IECN; IECV; IEC; IECE; - -
IECST; IECLT; IECDefTime; Resv;
UserDefine
43 S2.50/51P4.Opt_Curve_DropOut Inst; DefTime; IDMT - -

44 S2.50/51P4.TMS 0.04~ 20 - 0.001

45 S2.50/51P4.tmin 0 ~10 s 0.001

46 S2.50/51P4.K 0.001~120 - 0.0001

47 S2.50/51P4.Alpha 0.01 ~3 - 0.0001

48 S2.50/51P4.C 0 ~1 - 0.0001

49 S2.50/51P5.I_Set 0.05~200 A 0.001

50 S2.50/51P5.t_Op 0 ~100 s 0.001

51 S2.50/51P5.t_DropOut 0 ~100 s 0.001

52 S2.50/51P5.En Disabled; Enabled - -

53 S2.50/51P5.Opt_Trp/Alm Trp; Alm - -

54 S2.50/51P5.Opt_Curve ANSIE; ANSIV; ANSIN; ANSIM; - -

3-110 PCS-9611S Feeder Relay

Date: 2020-12-30
 3 Protection Settings

ANSIDefTime; ANSILTE; ANSILTV;

ANSILT; IECN; IECV; IEC; IECE;
IECST; IECLT; IECDefTime; Resv;
UserDefine
55 S2.50/51P5.Opt_Curve_DropOut Inst; DefTime; IDMT - -

56 S2.50/51P5.TMS 0.04~ 20 - 0.001

57 S2.50/51P5.tmin 0 ~10 s 0.001

58 S2.50/51P5.K 0.001~120 - 0.0001

59 S2.50/51P5.Alpha 0.01 ~3 - 0.0001

60 S2.50/51P5.C 0 ~1 - 0.0001

61 S2.50/51P6.I_Set 0.05~200 A 0.001

62 S2.50/51P6.t_Op 0 ~100 s 0.001

3
63 S2.50/51P6.t_DropOut 0 ~100 s 0.001

64 S2.50/51P6.En Disabled; Enabled - -

65 S2.50/51P6.Opt_Trp/Alm Trp; Alm - -

ANSIE; ANSIV; ANSIN; ANSIM;

ANSIDefTime; ANSILTE; ANSILTV;
66 S2.50/51P6.Opt_Curve ANSILT; IECN; IECV; IEC; IECE; - -
IECST; IECLT; IECDefTime; Resv;
UserDefine
67 S2.50/51P6.Opt_Curve_DropOut Inst; DefTime; IDMT - -

68 S2.50/51P6.TMS 0.04~ 20 - 0.001

69 S2.50/51P6.tmin 0 ~10 s 0.001

70 S2.50/51P6.K 0.001~120 - 0.0001

71 S2.50/51P6.Alpha 0.01 ~3 - 0.0001

72 S2.50/51P6.C 0 ~1 - 0.0001

It is another group of phase overcurrent protection which can be used when the device is used as
the backup protection of a transformer if there are two branches on the low-voltage side of the
transformer.
The setting principle is the same as that of phase overcurrent protection (without the settings
related to voltage control element, direction control element, harmonic control element), please
refer to Section 3.1 for details.

3.28 Fault Location (FL)

Access path in device LCD:
MainMenuSettingsProtection SettingsLine Settings
Access path in PCS-Studio configuration tool:
Project NodeIED NodeSettingGroupXProtection_SettingsLine_Settings
No. Settings Range Unit Step
1 X1L 0~600 Ω 0.001

PCS-9611S Feeder Relay 3-111

Date: 2020-12-30
 3 Protection Settings

No. Settings Range Unit Step

2 R1L 0~600 Ω 0.001
3 X0L 0~600 Ω 0.001
4 R0L 0~600 Ω 0.001
5 LineLength 0~500 km 0.01

The device can support up to 4 arc sensors.

1. [X1L]
It is the positive-sequence reactance of the whole line (secondary value), it is used for the
calculation of fault location, it should be set according to the actual line parameter on site.
2. [R1L]
It is the positive-sequence resistance of the whole line (secondary value), it is used for the
calculation of fault location, it should be set according to the actual line parameter on site.
3 3. [X0L]
It is the zero-sequence reactance of the whole line (secondary value), it is used for the calculation of
fault location, it should be set according to the actual line parameter on site.
4. [R0L]
It is the zero-sequence resistance of the whole line (secondary value), it is used for the calculation
of fault location, it should be set according to the actual line parameter on site.
5. [LineLength]
It is the length of the whole line, it is used for the calculation of fault location, it should be set
according to the actual line parameter on site.

3-112 PCS-9611S Feeder Relay

Date: 2020-12-30
 4 Measurement and Control Settings

4 Measurement and Control Settings

Table of Contents

4.1 Function Settings ............................................................................................ 4-1

4.2 Synchronism Check Settings ......................................................................... 4-2

4.3 Double Point Status Settings.......................................................................... 4-4

4.4 Control Settings ............................................................................................... 4-5

4.5 Interlocking Logic Settings ............................................................................. 4-6

4.6 DC Analogue Output Settings ........................................................................ 4-7

PCS-9611S Feeder Relay 4-a

Date: 2020-12-30
 4 Measurement and Control Settings

4-b PCS-9611S Feeder Relay

Date: 2020-12-30
 4 Measurement and Control Settings

4.1 Function Settings

Settings for different bays or other measurement objects (XXXX) may be

available.
Access path in device LCD:
MainMenuSettingsMeas Control Settings Function Settings
Access path in PCS-Studio configuration tool:
Project NodeIED NodeSettingGlobalMeas_Control_SettingsFunction_Settings

No. Name Range Step Unit

1 XXXX.Opt_CT_Measmt Ia-Ib-Ic or Ia-Ic

2 XXXX.ZeroDrift_U 0.00~1.00 0.01 %

3 XXXX.ZeroDrift_I 0.00~1.00 0.01 %

4 XXXX.ZeroDrift_PQ 0.00~1.00 0.01 %

5 XXXX.ZeroDrift_U 0.00~1.00 0.01 %

6 B**.ZeroDrift 0.00~1.00 0.01 %

1. [XXXX.Opt_CT_Measmt]
4
The option of the measurement CT connection mode.
Ia-Ib-Ic: three-phase mode;
Ia-Ic: Ib is calculated according to Ia and Ic, → = −(→ + →).
𝐼𝑏 𝐼𝑎 𝐼𝑐

2. [XXXX.ZeroDrift_U]
The zero-drift threshold (in percentage of the rated voltage) of the three-phase voltage sampling
Due to temperature or other environmental factors, a sampled value that is less than this setting
will be regarded as a zero drift and ignored.
The recommended value is 0.20%.
3. [XXXX.ZeroDrift_I]
The zero-drift threshold (in percentage of the rated current) of the three-phase current sampling
Due to temperature or other environmental factors, a sampled value that is less than this setting
will be regarded as a zero drift and ignored.
The recommended value is 0.20 %.
4. [XXXX.ZeroDrift_PQ]
The zero-drift threshold (in percentage of the rated power) of the calculated active and reactive
power
Due to temperature or other environmental factors, a calculated value that is less than this setting
will be regarded as a zero drift and ignored.
The recommended value is 0.50%.
5. [Syn.ZeroDrift_U]
The zero-drift threshold (in percentage of the rated voltage) of the single-phase voltage sampling

PCS-9611S Feeder Relay 4-1

Date: 2020-12-30
 4 Measurement and Control Settings

Due to temperature or other environmental factors, a sampled value that is less than this setting
will be regarded as a zero drift and ignored.
The recommended value is 0.20%.
6. [B**.ZeroDrift]
The zero-drift threshold (in percentage of the upper limit of the DC input range, i.e. 20mA or 10V)
of the DC analogue sampling by the DCAI module in the No.xx slot.
Due to temperature or other environmental factors, a sampled value less than this setting will be
regarded as a zero drift and ignored.
The recommended value is 0.20%.

4.2 Synchronism Check Settings

Access path in device LCD:
MainMenuSettingsMeas Control SettingsSyn Settings
Access path in PCS-Studio configuration tool:
Project NodeIED NodeSettingGlobalMeas_Control_SettingsSyn_Settings

No. Name Range Step Unit

1 25.Opt_ValidMode Setting; Config - -

4 2 25.En_SynChk Disabled; Enabled - -

3 25.En_DdChk Disabled; Enabled - -

4 25.U_UV 0~100 0.01 %

5 25.U_OV 100~170 0.01 %

6 25.f_UF 45~65 0.001 Hz

7 25.f_OF 45~65 0.001 Hz

8 25.Opt_U_SynChk Ua, Ub, Uc, Uab, Ubc, Uca - -

9 25.U_Diff_Set 0~100 0.01 V

10 25.En_f_Diff_Chk Disabled; Enabled - -

11 25.f_Diff_Set 0~2 0.01 Hz

12 25.En_df/dt_Chk Disabled; Enabled - -

13 25.df/dt_Set 0~2 0.01 Hz/s

14 25.phi_Diff_Set 0~180 0.01 °

15 25.phi_Comp 0~360 0.01 °

SynDdRefDd; SynLvRefDd
SynDdRefLv; RefDd; SynDd
16 25.Opt_Mode_DdChk SynLvRefDd/SynDdRefLv - -
AnySideDd

17 25.U_DdChk 0~100 0.01 V

18 25.U_LvChk 0~100 0.01 V

19 25.t_Reset 0~60 1 s

20 25.t_Close_CB 0~2000 1 ms

4-2 PCS-9611S Feeder Relay

Date: 2020-12-30
 4 Measurement and Control Settings

1. [25.Opt_ValidMode]
The option of the decision mode of synchronism check.
⚫ Setting: the mode depends on the setting values of [25.En_SynChk] and [25.En_DdChk];
⚫ Config: the mode depends on the input signal values of "in_syn_chk" and "in_vol_chk" in
the functional bloc via the configuration tool PCS-Studio.
2. [25.En_SynChk]
It is the logic setting for enabling/disabling the synchro-check mode (valid when
[25.Opt_ValidMode] = Setting).
3. [25.En_DdChk]
It is the logic setting for enabling/disabling the dead charge check mode (valid when
[25.Opt_ValidMode] = Setting).
4. [25.U_UV]
The lower limit (in percentage) of voltage to block CB synchronous closing.
The recommended value is 80.00%Un.
5. [25.U_OV]
The upper limit (in percentage) of voltage to block CB synchronous closing.
The recommended value is 170.00%Un.
6. [25.f_UF]
The lower limit of frequency to block CB synchronous closing.
4
The recommended value is 45.000Hz.
7. [25.f_OF]
The upper limit of frequency to block CB synchronous closing.
The recommended value is 65.000Hz.
8. [25.Opt_U_SynChk]
The option of single-phase or phase-phase voltage in synchronism check (valid when the
synchronization side or the reference side voltage is three-phase).
9. [25.U_Diff_Set]
The threshold of the voltage difference in synchro-check.
The recommended value is 10.00V.
10. [25.En_f_Diff_Chk]
It is the logic setting for enabling/disabling the frequency difference check.
11. [25.f_Diff_Set]
The threshold of the frequency difference in synchro-check.
The recommended value is 0.50Hz.
12. [25.En_df/dt_Chk]
It is the logic setting for enabling/disabling the frequency variation difference check.
13. [25.df/dt_Set]
The threshold of the frequency variation in synchro-check.
The recommended value is 1.00Hz/s.
14. [25.phi_Diff_Set]

PCS-9611S Feeder Relay 4-3

Date: 2020-12-30
 4 Measurement and Control Settings

The threshold of the phase difference in synchro-check.

The recommended value is 15.00degree.
15. [25.phi_Comp]
The compensation angle of phase difference in synchro-check.
16. [25.Opt_Mode_DdChk]
The option of the dead charge check mode.

Setting Value Dead charge check mode

SynDdRefDd Dead check for both the reference and the synchronous sides

SynLvRefDd Live check for synchronous side and dead check for reference side

SynDdRefLv Dead check for synchronous side and live check for reference side

RefDd Dead check for reference side

SynDd Dead check for synchronous side

SynLvRefDd/SynDdRefLv Option 2 or 3

AnySideDd Option 1, 2 or 3

17. [25.U_DdChk]

4 The threshold of the dead voltage in dead charge check.

The recommended value is 17.32V.
18. [25.U_LvChk]
The threshold of the live voltage in dead charge check.
The recommended value is 34.64V.
19. [25.t_Reset]
The time window to check the synchronous closing criteria.
The window starts from the receiving moment of synchronous closing command and ends when
all synchronous closing criteria are met or timeout. The timeout causes the synchronism check
failure.
The recommended value is 5 seconds.
20. [25.t_Close_CB]
The time window to check the CB closing operation.
The window starts from the receiving moment of synchronous closing command and ends when
CB status changes to be closing.
Set according to the CB mechanism operating time.
The recommended value is 20ms.

4.3 Double Point Status Settings

Access path in device LCD:
MainMenuSettingsMeas Control SettingsDPS Settings
Access path in PCS-Studio configuration tool:
Project NodeIED NodeSettingGlobalMeas_Control_SettingsDPS_Settings

4-4 PCS-9611S Feeder Relay

Date: 2020-12-30
 4 Measurement and Control Settings

No. Name Range Step Unit

1 CB.DPS.t_DPU 0~60000 1 ms

2 CB.DPS.En_Alm Disabled or Enabled - -

3 CB.DPS.t_Alm 0~60000 1 ms

4 DS**.DPS.t_DPU 0~60000 1 ms

5 DS**.DPS.En_Alm Disabled or Enabled - -

6 DS**.DPS.t_Alm 0~60000 1 ms

1. [CB.DPS.t_DPU]
The Delay PickUp (DPU) time, i.e. debounce time, of CB DPS.
The setting value should be greater than the CB operating time to avoid the intermediate state in
the process of CB opening or closing.
The recommended value is 500ms.
2. [CB.DPS.En_Alm]
It is the logic setting for enabling/disabling alarm when CB DPS_BAD or DPS_INT appears.
3. [CB.DPS.t_Alm]
The delay of CB DPS alarm
The recommended value is 500ms. 4
4. [DS**.DPS.t_DPU]
The Delay PickUp (DPU) time, i.e. debounce time, of DS DPS.
The setting value should be greater than the DS operating time to avoid the intermediate state in
the process of DS opening or closing.
The recommended value is 500ms.
5. [DS**.DPS.En_Alm]
It is the logic setting for enabling/disabling alarm when DS DPS_BAD or DPS_INT appears.
6. [DS**.DPS.t_Alm]
The delay of DS DPS alarm.
The recommended value is 500ms.

4.4 Control Settings

Access path in device LCD:
MainMenuSettingsMeas Control SettingsControl Settings
Access path in PCS-Studio configuration tool:
Project NodeIED NodeSettingGlobalMeas_Control_SettingsControl_Settings

No. Name Range Step Unit

1 CB.t_PW_Opn 0~60000 1 ms

2 CB.t_PW_Cls 0~60000 1 ms

3 DS**.t_PW_Opn 0~60000 1 ms

PCS-9611S Feeder Relay 4-5

Date: 2020-12-30
 4 Measurement and Control Settings

4 DS**.t_PW_Cls 0~60000 1 ms

5 DirCtrl**.t_PW_Opn 0~60000 1 ms

6 DirCtrl**.t_PW_Cls 0~60000 1 ms

1. [CB.t_PW_Opn]
The Pulse Width (PW), i.e. holding time, of CB opening output.
The setting value should be long enough to start the relay in the CB opening circuit.
The recommended value is 500ms.
2. [CB.t_PW_Cls]
The Pulse Width (PW), i.e. holding time, of CB closing output.
The setting value should be long enough to start the relay in the CB closing circuit.
The recommended value is 500ms.
3. [DS**.t_PW_Opn]
The Pulse Width (PW), i.e. holding time, of DS opening output.
The setting value should be long enough to start the relay in the DS opening circuit.
The recommended value is 500ms.
4. [DS**.t_PW_Cls]
4 The Pulse Width (PW), i.e. holding time, of DS closing output.
The setting value should be long enough to start the relay in the DS closing circuit.
The recommended value is 500ms.
5. [DirCtrl**.t_PW_Opn]
The Pulse Width (PW), i.e. holding time, of direct control opening output.
The setting value should be long enough to start the relay in the direct control opening circuit.
The recommended value is 500ms.
6. [DirCtrl**.t_PW_Cls]
The Pulse Width (PW), i.e. holding time, of direct control closing output.
The setting value should be long enough to start the relay in the direct control closing circuit.
The recommended value is 500ms.

4.5 Interlocking Logic Settings

Access path in device LCD:
MainMenuSettingsMeas Control SettingsInterlock Settings
Access path in PCS-Studio configuration tool:
Project NodeIED NodeSettingGlobalMeas_Control_SettingsInterlock_Settings

No. Name Range Step Unit

1 CB.En_CILO_Opn Disabled; Enabled - -

2 CB.En_CILO_Cls Disabled; Enabled - -

3 DS**.En_CILO_Opn Disabled; Enabled - -

4-6 PCS-9611S Feeder Relay

Date: 2020-12-30
 4 Measurement and Control Settings

4 DS**.En_CILO_Cls Disabled; Enabled - -

5 DirCtrl**.En_CILO_Opn Disabled; Enabled - -

6 DirCtrl**.En_CILO_Cls Disabled; Enabled - -

1. [CB.En_CILO_Opn]
It is the logic setting for enabling/disabling interlocking logic control of CB opening output.
2. [CB.En_CILO_Cls]
It is the logic setting for enabling/disabling interlocking logic control of CB closing output.
3. [DS**.En_CILO_Opn]
It is the logic setting for enabling/disabling interlocking logic control of DS opening output.
4. [DS**.En_CILO_Cls]
It is the logic setting for enabling/disabling interlocking logic control of DS closing output.
5. [DirCtrl**.En_CILO_Opn]
It is the logic setting for enabling/disabling interlocking logic control of direct control opening
output.
6. [DirCtrl**.En_CILO_Cls]
It is the logic setting for enabling/disabling interlocking logic control of direct control closing output.

4.6 DC Analogue Output Settings 4

Settings for different DC analogue output modules (B**) may be available.

Access path in device LCD:
MainMenuSettingsMeas Control SettingsDCAO Settings
Access path in PCS-Studio configuration tool:
Project NodeIED NodeSettingGlobalMeas_Control_SettingsDCAO_Settings

No. Name Range Step Unit

1 B**.DCAO**.Opt_Type_Regu 4~20mA; 0~10V; 0~5V; 0~20mA - -

2 B**.DCAO**.Min_Regu -60000~60000 1 -

3 B**.DCAO**.Max_Regu -60000~60000 1 -

1. [B**.DCAO**.Opt_Type_Regu]
The option of the DC analogue output type.
Set according to regulated object type.
2. [B**.DCAO**.Min_Regu, B**.DCAO**.Max_Regu]
The lower and the upper limits of the DC analogue output range corresponding to the regulated
physical quantity.
User may define the maximal and the minimal values of each DC analogue output channel to
create a characteristic curve that connects the physical quantities to DC analogue output values.
So as to simply the physical signification understanding. The following figure shows an example.

PCS-9611S Feeder Relay 4-7

Date: 2020-12-30
 4 Measurement and Control Settings

Output (mA)

20mA
P
DC output value

4mA

Regulation value
0
Min. Object Max.

In the example, the output range is defined as 4~20mA. The lower limit 4mA is related to the
minimal regulation value which is defined by the setting [B**.DCAO**.Min_Regu] while the upper
limit 20mA is related to the maximal regulation value which is defined by the setting
[B**.DCAO**.Max_Regu]. Thus, the regulation value can be converted into a corresponding DC
analogue output value between 4~20mA for the object point P.

4-8 PCS-9611S Feeder Relay

Date: 2020-12-30
 5 PMU Settings

5 PMU Settings
Table of Contents

7.1 General Communication Settings .................................................................. 7-1

7.2 IEC61850 Communication Settings................................................................ 7-5

7.3 DNP Communication Settings ........................................................................ 7-7

7.4 IEC103 Communication Settings.................................................................. 7-16

7.5 Modbus Communication Settings ................................................................ 7-18

7.6 SV Communication Settings......................................................................... 7-18

PCS-9611S Feeder Relay 5-a

Date: 2020-12-30
 5 PMU Settings

5-b PCS-9611S Feeder Relay

Date: 2020-12-30
 5 PMU Settings

5.1 PMU Global Settings

Access path in device LCD:
MainMenuSettings PMU SettingsPMU Global Settings
Access path in PCS-Studio configuration tool:
Project NodeIED NodeSettingGlobalPMU_SettingsPMU_Global_Settings

No. Name Range Unit Step

1 En_PMU Disabled; Enabled - -

2 Opt_Class_PMU P_Class; M_Class - -

3 DataRate 10~120 fps 1

4 Substation_PMU Max. 16 characters - -

5 N_Chgd_CFG 0~65535 - 1

6 Port_TCP 0~65535 - 1

7 Port_UDP 1024~65535 - 1

1. [Opt_Class_PMU]
To select the calculation method of synchrophasor data.
⚫ P_Class: this algorithm adopts a short time window, has fast response speed and is suitable
for fast protection and control applications, but it has poor ability to suppress the out-of-brand
signals.
⚫ M_Class: the algorithm adopts a long time window, has high accuracy for steady and dynamic
signal measurement and has the ability to suppress the out-of-brand signals, but its response
speed is slower than that of P_Class.
According to the application requirements to set this setting.
5
If the response speed is concerned, set it as “P_Class”, if the measurement accuracy is concerned,
set it as “M_Class”.
2. [DataRate]
To set the rate of PMU reporting synchrophasor data to the parent IEDs (such as, PDC or PMU
master station), the rate is generally equal to or less than the rated frequency of power system.
For the 50Hz system, the selectable rates are 100, 50, 25, 10 frames per second.
For the 60Hz system, the selectable rates are 120, 60, 30, 20, 15, 12, 10 frames per second.
3. [Substation_PMU]
To set the PMU station name, the name will be used in the CFG-1 and CFG-2 frame.
4. [N_Chgd_CFG]
The setting indicates the version of CFG of PMU and it is used to inform the client that the CFG-1
has changed.
The starting value of the setting is 0, and it should increase by 1 every time CFG-1 is adjusted. For
example, changing the branch name or rating will cause the change of CFG-1, so the setting value
should be modified.
5. [Port_TCP]
To set the TCP port number for PMU based on IEEE C37.118 standard.
There are three kinds of communication modes available for PMU, TCP, UDP and TCP-UDP

PCS-9611S Feeder Relay 5-1

Date: 2020-12-30
 5 PMU Settings

mode. When adopting the TCP or TCP-UDP mode, the TCP port will be used. It is a global setting,
and the port values of all TCP clients should be consistent with the setting value.
The default port number of TCP is 4712, and it is invalid when adopting UDP communication.
6. [Port_UDP]
To set the UDP port number for PMU based on IEEE C37.118 standard.
There are three kinds of communication modes available for PMU, TCP, UDP and TCP-UDP.
When adopting the UDP or TCP-UDP mode, the UDP port will be used. It is a global setting, and
the port values of all UDP receivers should be consistent with the setting value.
The default port number of UDP is 4713, and it is invalid when adopting TCP communication.

5.2 PMU Bay Settings

Access path in device LCD:
MainMenuSettings PMU SettingsPMUBay_Settings
Access path in PCS-Studio configuration tool:
Project NodeIED NodeSettingGlobalPMU_SettingsPMUBay Settings

No. Name Range Unit Step

1 Name_PMUBay Max. 12 characters - -

2 xx.U1n 0.001~1000.000 kV 0.001

3 xx.I1n 0.1~20000.0 A 0.1

4 xx.Opt_UnitType None; Bay; Bus(U_3P); Bus(U_1P) - -

5 xx.Opt_U_MeasFreq U1; Ua; Ub; Uc - -

6 xx.En_TrigDFR Disabled; Enabled - -

5 7 xx.Up_UpLmt 0.010~2.000 Un 0.001

8 xx.U1_UpLmt 0.010~2.000 Un 0.001

9 xx.U2_UpLmt 0.010~2.000 Un 0.001

10 xx.U0_UpLmt 0.010~2.000 Un 0.001

11 xx.Up_LowLmt 0.010~2.000 Un 0.001

12 xx.U1_LowLmt 0.010~2.000 Un 0.001

13 xx.Ip_UpLmt 0.010~2.000 In 0.001

14 xx.I1_UpLmt 0.010~2.000 In 0.001

15 xx.I2_UpLmt 0.010~2.000 In 0.001

16 xx.I0_UpLmt 0.010~2.000 In 0.001

17 xx.f_Diff_Lmt 0.01~10.00 Hz 0.01

18 xx.df/dt_Lmt 0.01~50.00 Hz/s 0.01

The prefix ”xx.” in the above settings is determined by the setting

[Name_PMUBay] in the submenu PMUBay Settings.
1. [Name_PMUBay]

5-2 PCS-9611S Feeder Relay

Date: 2020-12-30
 5 PMU Settings

The setting indicates the name of PMU bay. This setting [Name_PMUBay] and the type name of
measurement [Name_XXXX] (in submenu PMU Label Settings), together form a complete
measurement name with a total length of no more than 16 characters.
The name of PMU bay is generally composed of station code and bay name, with a total length of
no more than 12 characters, and it is recommended to set the name according to 12 characters.
2. [xx.Opt_UnitType]
To set the application scenario of AC bay, the different option corresponds to the different type of
measurement.
⚫ None: the measuring function is not enabled.
⚫ Bay: measuring three-phase voltage and three-phase current.
⚫ Bus(U_3P): measuring three-phase voltage, the current and power quantities are not
measured and can’t be displayed.
⚫ Bus(U_1P): measuring single phase voltage, the current and power quantities are not
measured and can’t be displayed. Besides, the calculation of zero- and negative-sequence
voltage are disabled, their values are fixed as “0”.
Set the setting according to the actual AC bay application. When adopting “Bus(U_1P)” type, it is
recommended to use the phase-A voltage.
3. [xx.Opt_U_MeasFreq]
To set the base voltage for frequency measurement.
⚫ U1: positive sequence voltage
⚫ Ua: phase-A voltage
⚫ Ub: phase-B voltage
⚫ Uc: phase-C voltage
It is recommended to set it as “U1”, because the frequency measurement function will not be
affected in case of single-phase or two-phase VT failure.
4. [xx.En_TrigDFR]
5
The logic setting of enabling or disabling triggering DFR function.
If the setting is set as “enabled” and the triggering condition is met, the triggering flag will be
mapped in “STAT” field of PMU data frame with a time delay of four power frequency cycles. For
an independent PMU device, the recording will be performed in the case, but for an IED with PMU
function, this case will not affect the recording function, the IED starts the DFR according to its
own criterion.
Set the setting according to user’s requirements, generally it is set as “enabled”.
5. [xx.Up_UpLmt], [xx.U1_UpLmt] ... [xx.df/dt_Lmt]
These settings indicate the threshold values of triggering DFR, including [xx.Up_UpLmt],
[xx.U1_UpLmt], [xx.U2_UpLmt], [xx.U0_UpLmt], [xx.Up_LowLmt], [xx.U1_LowLmt], [xx.Ip_UpLmt],
[xx.I1_UpLmt], [xx.I2_UpLmt], [xx.I0_UpLmt], [xx.f_Diff_Lmt] and [xx.df/dt_Lmt].
Set these settings according to the requirements of users. The default value is usually used. For
some special AC bay, such as the load with frequent fluctuation, the threshold value can be raised
appropriately.

5.3 PMU BI Settings

Access path in device LCD:
MainMenuSettings PMU SettingsPMU BI Settings

PCS-9611S Feeder Relay 5-3

Date: 2020-12-30
 5 PMU Settings

Access path in PCS-Studio configuration tool:

Project NodeIED NodeSettingGlobalPMU_SettingsPMU_BI_Settings

No. Name Range Unit Step

1 Name_BI_** Max. 16 characters - -

2 Link_BI_TrigDFR Disabled; Enabled - -

3 BI_**.En_TrigDFR Disabled; Enabled - -

1. [Name_BI_**]
The setting indicates the name of binary input**, it is generally composed of station name and
binary input name.
According to the actual measurement name, set the binary input name, and the total length should
not exceed 16 characters.
2. [Link_BI_TrigDFR]
The total logic link for enabling or disabling binary change triggering DFR function.
If the setting is set as “enabled”, some binary input state has changed and its corresponding logic
setting [BI_**.En_TrigDFR] is set as “enabled”, the triggering flag will be mapped in “STAT” field of
PMU data frame. For an independent PMU device, the recording will be performed in the case, but
for an IED with PMU function, this case will not affect the recording function, the IED starts the
DFR according to its own criterion.
Set the setting according to the actual requirements.
3. [BI_**.En_TrigDFR]
The logic setting of enabling or disabling BI** change triggering DFR function.
If the setting [Link_BI_TrigDFR] is set as “enabled”, the state of binary input ** has changed and
its corresponding logic setting [BI_**.En_TrigDFR] is set as “enabled”, the triggering flag will be
mapped in “STAT” field of PMU data frame. For an independent PMU device, the recording will be
5 performed in the case, but for an IED with PMU function, this case will not affect the recording
function, the IED starts the DFR according to its own criterion.
Set the setting according to the actual requirements. For a binary input which changes frequently,
it is recommended to disable the function.

5.4 PMU Label Settings

Access path in device LCD:
MainMenuSettings PMU SettingsPMU Label Settings
Access path in PCS-Studio configuration tool:
Project NodeIED NodeSettingGlobalPMU_SettingsPMU_Label_Settings

No. Name Range Unit Step

1 Name_Amp_Ua Max. 4 characters - -

2 Name_Amp_Ub Max. 4 characters - -

3 Name_Amp_Uc Max. 4 characters - -

4 Name_Amp_U0 Max. 4 characters - -

5 Name_Amp_U1 Max. 4 characters - -

6 Name_Amp_U2 Max. 4 characters - -

5-4 PCS-9611S Feeder Relay

Date: 2020-12-30
 5 PMU Settings

7 Name_Amp_Ia Max. 4 characters - -

8 Name_Amp_Ib Max. 4 characters - -

9 Name_Amp_Ic Max. 4 characters - -

10 Name_Amp_I0 Max. 4 characters - -

11 Name_Amp_I1 Max. 4 characters - -

12 Name_Amp_I2 Max. 4 characters - -

13 Name_Ang_Ua Max. 4 characters - -

14 Name_Ang_Ub Max. 4 characters - -

15 Name_Ang_Uc Max. 4 characters - -

16 Name_Ang_U0 Max. 4 characters - -

17 Name_Ang_U1 Max. 4 characters - -

18 Name_Ang_U2 Max. 4 characters - -

19 Name_Ang_Ia Max. 4 characters - -

20 Name_Ang_Ib Max. 4 characters - -

21 Name_Ang_Ic Max. 4 characters - -

22 Name_Ang_I0 Max. 4 characters - -

23 Name_Ang_I1 Max. 4 characters - -

24 Name_Ang_I2 Max. 4 characters - -

25 Name_f Max. 4 characters - -

26 Name_df/dt Max. 4 characters - -

27 Name_P Max. 4 characters - - 5

28 Name_Q Max. 4 characters - -

1. [Name_XXXX]
The settings indicate the name of each measurement type, such as, phasor amplitude, phasor
angle, frequency and power, etc. Generally, the measurement type name is normally composed of
one connector and three characters of measurement type. If the setting has been changed, it will
affect all of the measurements’ name with the same measurement type.
Set the setting according to user’s demands, it is recommended to adopt the form “connector +
measurement type”.

5.5 PMU Comm Settings

Access path in device LCD:
MainMenuSettings PMU Settings PMU Comm SettingsPDC** Settings
Access path in PCS-Studio configuration tool:
Project NodeIED NodeSettingGlobalPMU_Comm_SettingsPDC**_Settings

No. Name Range Unit Step

1 PDC**.Name Max. 20 characters - -

PCS-9611S Feeder Relay 5-5

Date: 2020-12-30
 5 PMU Settings

2 PDC**.IP_TCP 0.0.0.0~255.255.255.255 - -

3 PDC**.IP_UDP_Dest 0.0.0.0~255.255.255.255 - -

4 PDC**.IP_MulticastSrc 0.0.0.0~255.255.255.255 - -

5 PDC**.Opt_Protocol None; TCP; UDP; TCP-UDP - -

6 PDC**.Opt_UDP Unicast; Broadcast; Multicast - -

7 PDC**.IDCODE 1~65534 - 1

1. [PDC**.Name]
The setting indicates the name of PDC**, for distinguishing each PDC manully.
The name length should not exceed 20 characters.
2. [PDC**.IP_TCP]
The setting indicates the IP address of connected PDC** using TCP communication protocol, this
IP address will be used when the communication mode adopts TCP or TCP-UDP. The
communication of PMU is based on whitelisting, only when the IP address of the TCP client has
been set in the PMU, the client has the right to communicate with PMU using TCP communication
protocol.
According to the actual situation, set the IP address. If the PDC does not exist or the TCP (or
TCP-UDP) mode is not adopted, the IP address can be set to as “0.0.0.0”.
3. [PDC**.IP_UDP_Dest]
The setting indicates the destination IP address of connected PDC** using UDP communication
protocol, the address will be used when the communication mode adopts UDP or TCP-UDP. The
PMU transmits the UDP message to this address.
According to the actual situation, set the address, it may be unicast address, broadcast address or
multicast address. It is noted that the IP address should match with the setting [PDC**.Opt_UDP].
4. [PDC**.IP_MulticastSrc]
5 This setting indicates the multicast source IP address of PDC** using UDP communication
protocol, it is consistent with some network interface IP address of the IED. This network interface
uses this IP address to transmit UDP message to multicast group. Since the IP addresss of the
muticast group and any network interface of the IED have the different network segments, this
setting essentially informs the PMU which network interface to send UDP multicast message.
Set the setting [PDC**.IP_MulticastSrc] as the IP address of the network interface used for
tranmitting UDP multicast message.
5. [PDC**.Opt_Protocol]
To select the communication protocol of PDC**,
⚫ None: no communication between PDC and PMU.
⚫ TCP: TCP for the transmission of configuration frame, command frame and data frame.
⚫ UDP: UDP for the transmission of configuration frame, command frame and data frame.
⚫ TCP-UDP: TCP for the transmission of configuration frame, command frame, and UDP for the
transmission of data frame.
The setting should be set according to the actual demands and be consistent with that of the
opposite end PDC. The most frequently used mode is TCP.
6. [PDC**.Opt_UDP]
The setting indicates the transmission type using UDP communication protocol, it should be set
correctly when the UDP or TCP-UDP mode is adopted.

5-6 PCS-9611S Feeder Relay

Date: 2020-12-30
 5 PMU Settings

⚫ Unicast
⚫ Broadcast
⚫ Multicast
Set the setting according to the actual demands. For the communication between PMU and
PCS-996S-G PDC of NR, the TCP mode is used generally. For the communication between the
PMU and the PDCs of other companies, the multicast type is mostly used.
7. [PDC**.IDCODE]
This setting indicates the PDC** ID number, used for the protocol to identify each PDC.
Set the setting according to the site IDCODE planning, and it should be consistent with the
IDCODE of the PDC at the opposite end.

PCS-9611S Feeder Relay 5-7

Date: 2020-12-30
 5 PMU Settings

5-8 PCS-9611S Feeder Relay

Date: 2020-12-30
 6 Supervision Settings

6 Supervision Settings
Table of Contents

6.1 VT Circuit Supervision .................................................................................... 6-1

6.2 CT Circuit Supervision .................................................................................... 6-1

PCS-9611S Feeder Relay 6-a

Date: 2020-12-30
 6 Supervision Settings

6-b PCS-9611S Feeder Relay

Date: 2020-12-30
 6 Supervision Settings

6.1 VT Circuit Supervision

Access path in device LCD:
MainMenuSettingsGlobal SettingsSuperv Settings
Access path in PCS-Studio configuration tool:
Project NodeIED NodeSettingGlobalGlobal_SettingsSuperv_Settings
No. Settings Range Unit Step
1 VTS.U1_Set 0.00~100.00V V 0.01
2 VTS.3U0_Set 0.00~100.00V V 0.01
3 VTS.U2_Set 0~100 0.01 V
4 VTS.t_DPU 0.200~30.000s s 0.001
5 VTS.t_DDO 0.200~30.000s s 0.001
6 VTS.En Disabled; Enabled - -
7 VTS.Opt_VT Bus; Bay - -

1. [VTS.U1_Set]
It is the positive-sequence voltage threshold for VT circuit supervision. The recommended value is
30V.
2. [VTS.3U0_Set]
It is the zero-sequence voltage (calculated) threshold for VT circuit supervision. The
recommended value is 8V.
3. [VTS.U2_Set]
It is the negative-sequence voltage setting of VT circuit supervision function. The recommended
value is 8V.
4. [VTS.t_DPU]
It is the delay pickup setting for the alarm of VT circuit supervision. The recommended value is
1.25s.
5. [VTS.t_DDO]
It is the delay drop off setting for the alarm of VT circuit supervision. The recommended value is
10s.
6. [VTS.En]
6
It is the logic setting used to enable or disable the alarm function of VT circuit supervision
7. [VTS.Opt_VT]
It is the setting used to select the VT which is used by the device: bay VT or bus VT.

6.2 CT Circuit Supervision

Access path in device LCD:
MainMenuSettingsGlobal SettingsSuperv Settings
Access path in PCS-Studio configuration tool:
Project NodeIED NodeSettingGlobalGlobal_SettingsSuperv_Settings

PCS-9611S Feeder Relay 6-1

Date: 2020-12-30
 6 Supervision Settings

No. Settings Range Unit Step

1 CTS.3I0_Set 0~200 A 0.001
2 CTS.3U0_Set 0~200 V 0.001
3 CTS.t_DPU 0~100 s 0.001
4 CTS.t_DPO 0~100 s 0.001
5 CTS.En Disabled; Enabled - -
6 64REF.En_AutoRecov_Alm_CTS Disabled; Enabled - -

1. [CTS.3I0_Set]
It is the calculated residual current setting of CT circuit supervision function.
It should be greater than the maximum unbalance current and less than the load current, at the
same time, it should make sure the sensitivity.
2. [CTS.3U0_Set]
It is the calculated residual voltage setting of CT circuit supervision function.
It should be greater than the maximum unbalance voltage, and it should make sure the sensitivity.
3. [CTS.t_DPU]
It is the delay pick-up time setting for CT circuit failure.
4. [CTS.t_DDO]
It is the delay drop-out time setting of CT circuit supervision.
5. [CTS.En]
It is used to set enable/disable CT circuit supervision.
6. [En_AutoRecov_Alm_CTS]
It is the logic setting for enabling/disabling the CT circuit failure alarm signal being automatically
reset after the CT circuit returns to normal condition.
If the setting is set as “Enabled”, the CT circuit failure alarm will be reset automatically after the
abnormality is cleared, if the setting is set as “Disabled”, the alarm signal should be reset
manually.

6-2 PCS-9611S Feeder Relay

Date: 2020-12-30
 7 Communication Settings

7 Communication Settings
Table of Contents

7.1 General Communication Settings .................................................................. 7-1

7.2 IEC61850 Communication Settings................................................................ 7-5

7.3 DNP Communication Settings ........................................................................ 7-7

7.4 IEC103 Communication Settings.................................................................. 7-16

7.5 Modbus Communication Settings ................................................................ 7-18

7.6 SV Communication Settings ......................................................................... 7-18

PCS-9611S Feeder Relay 7-a

Date: 2020-12-30
 7 Communication Settings

7-b PCS-9611S Feeder Relay

Date: 2020-12-30
 7 Communication Settings

7.1 General Communication Settings

Access path in device LCD:
MainMenuSettingsGlobal SettingsComm SettingsGeneral Comm Settings
Access path in PCS-Studio configuration tool:
Project NodeIED NodeSettingGlobalComm_SettingsGeneral_Comm_Settings
No. Settings Range Unit Step
1 IP_LAN1 0.0.0.0~255.255.255.255 - -
2 Mask_LAN1 0.0.0.0~255.255.255.255 - -
3 En_LAN1 Disabled; Enabled - -
4 IP_LAN2 0.0.0.0~255.255.255.255 - -
5 Mask_LAN2 0.0.0.0~255.255.255.255 - -
6 En_LAN2 Disabled; Enabled - 1
7 IP_LAN3 0.0.0.0~255.255.255.255 - -
8 Mask_LAN3 0.0.0.0~255.255.255.255 - -
9 En_LAN3 Disabled; Enabled - 1
10 IP_LAN4 0.0.0.0~255.255.255.255 - -
11 Mask_LAN4 0.0.0.0~255.255.255.255 - -
12 En_LAN4 Disabled; Enabled - 1
13 Gateway 0.0.0.0~255.255.255.255 - -
14 IP_SyslogServer01 000.000.000.000~255.255.255.255 - -
15 IP_SyslogServer02 000.000.000.000~255.255.255.255 - -
16 IP_SyslogServer03 000.000.000.000~255.255.255.255 - -
17 IP_SyslogServer04 000.000.000.000~255.255.255.255 - -
18 Baud_Printer 4800; 9600; 19200; 38400; 57600; 115200 bps -
19 En_AutoPrint Disabled; Enabled - -
20 Protocol_RS485-1 IEC103; Modbus - -
21 Protocol_RS485-2 IEC103; Modbus - -
22 Baud_RS485-1 4800; 9600; 19200; 38400; 57600; 115200 bps -
23 Baud_RS485-2 4800; 9600; 19200; 38400; 57600; 115200 bps -
24 Addr_RS485-1 1~254 - 1
25 Addr_RS485-2 1~254 - 1
26 Cfg_NetPorts_Bond 0~255 - -
Normal; 7
1-2:Normal,3-4:HSR;
27 B01.Opt_NetMode - -
1-2:Normal,3-4:PRP;
1-2:Normal,3-4:RSTP
28 En_IP_Whitelist Disabled; Enabled - -
29 IP**_Whitelist 0.0.0.0~255.255.255.255 - -

1. [IP_LAN*] (*=1, 2, 3, 4)

PCS-9611S Feeder Relay 7-1

Date: 2020-12-30
 7 Communication Settings

It is designed to configure the IP address of No.* Ethernet port of the CPU module.
This setting adopts dotted-decimal notation of IPv4.
If the setting [En_LAN*] is configured as “Disabled”, this setting will be unnecessary to be
configured.
Please configure this setting according to actual requirements.
2. [Mask_LAN*] (*=1, 2, 3, 4)
It is designed to configure the subnet mask of No.* Ethernet port of the CPU module.
This setting adopts dotted-decimal notation of IPv4.
If the setting [En_LAN*] is configured as “Disabled”, this setting will be unnecessary to be
configured.
Please configure this setting according to actual requirements.
3. [En_LAN*] (*=1, 2, 3, 4)
It is designed to enable/disable No.* Ethernet port of the CPU module.
If No.* Ethernet port of the CPU module is required to be used, please configure this setting as
“Enabled”. Otherwise, please configure this setting as “Disabled”.
Please configure this setting according to actual requirements.
4. [Gateway]
It is designed to configure the IP address of the gateway. If there is no gateway, please configure
this setting as “0.0.0.0”.
This setting adopts dotted-decimal notation of IPv4.
5. [IP_SyslogServer**] (**=01, 02, 03, 04)
“Syslog” is a communication protocol for message logging, it is used for security auditing in this
device.
This setting is designed to configure the IP address of syslog server **, and the device can upload
audit log to the syslog server. The setting is available only when cyber security is configured in the
device.
This setting adopts dotted-decimal notation of IPv4.
6. [Baud_Printer]
It is designed to configure the baud rate of the print port.
Value of this setting must be the same as the baud rate of the printer that is connected to this
device.
7. [En_AutoPrint]
It is designed to enable/disable automatic printing function.
If automatic printing function is required when printing events (e.g.: disturbance records,
supervision events, IO events, etc.) are generated, please configured this setting as “Enabled”.
Otherwise, please configure this setting as “Disabled”.
7 8. [Protocol_RS485-*] (*=1, 2)
It is designed to configure the communication protocol of No.* RS-485 serial port at the rear side of
this device.
2 setting value options are available:
IEC103: IEC60870-5-103 protocol
Modbus: Modbus protocol

7-2 PCS-9611S Feeder Relay

Date: 2020-12-30
 7 Communication Settings

Value of this setting must be the same as corresponding setting value of the communication client
(e.g.: local SCADA system, etc.).
9. [Baud_RS485-*] (*=1, 2)
It is designed to configure the communication baud rate of No.* RS-485 serial port at the rear side
of this device.
Value of this setting must be the same as corresponding setting value of the communication client
(e.g.: local SCADA system, etc.).
10. [Addr_RS485-*] (*=1, 2)
It is designed to configure the communication address of No.* RS-485 serial port at the rear side of
this device.
Value of this setting must be the same as corresponding setting value of the communication client
(e.g.: local SCADA system, etc.).
11. [Cfg_NetPorts_Bond]
It is designed to configure the Ethernet ports that are used as hot standby each other.
The setting is used to configure dual-networks switching, and it means that no dual-networks
switching is created when the setting is set as “0”. The device supports a bond between any two
Ethernet ports, and the bond among three or above Ethernet ports is impermissible.
The devices communicate with SAS by station level network. In order to ensure reliable
communication, dual networks (i.e., network 1 and network 2) are adopted. Another special
communication mode based on dual networks is that Ethernet port 1 and Ethernet port 2 of the
device own the same IP address and MAC address, and network 1 and network 2 are used as hot
standby each other. When both network 1 and network 2 are normal, any of them is used to
communicate between the device and SAS. The device will automatically switch to the other
healthy network when one network is abnormal, which will not affect normal communication.
Taking a CPU module with four Ethernet ports as an example, each bit is corresponding with an
Ethernet port, i.e., Bit0, Bit1, Bit2 and Bit3 are corresponding with Ethernet port 1, Ethernet port 2,
Ethernet port 3 and Ethernet port 4 respectively. If a bond between Ethernet port 1 and Ethernet 2
is created, the setting [Cfg_NetPorts_Bond] is set as “3”. The specific setting is shown in the
following figure.

Ethernet port 1

Port 4 Port 3 Port 2 Port 1 Setting Port 4 Port 3 Port 2 Port 1 Setting
Binary Bonding Bonding Binary
Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Value Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Value
0 0 1 1 0011 3 1 0 0 1 1001 9
Ethernet port 2

Port 4 Port 3 Port 2 Port 1 Setting Port 4 Port 3 Port 2 Port 1 Setting
Binary Bonding Bonding Binary
Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Value Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Value
0 1 0 1 0101 5 0 1 1 0 0110 6
Ethernet port 3

Port 4 Port 3 Port 2 Port 1 Setting Port 4 Port 3 Port 2 Port 1 Setting
Binary Bonding Bonding Binary
Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Value Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Value
1 0 1 0 1010 10 1 1 0 0 1100 12
Ethernet port 4
7
CPU Module

The switching logic of Active-Standby mode is:

Take the device's Ethernet ports 1 & 2 for example and assume that Port 1 and Port 2 are bonded,
and Port 1 is connected to NET 1 while Port 2 is connected to NET 2.
⚫ After the device is powered on, only Port 1 is activated when both NET 1 and NET 2 are
normal.

PCS-9611S Feeder Relay 7-3

Date: 2020-12-30
 7 Communication Settings

⚫ If NET 1 is abnormal, Port 2 will be activated if NET 2 is normal.

⚫ If NET1 is abnormal, Port 2 cannot be activated if NET 2 is also abnormal. The device will
keep trying on Port 1.
⚫ If Port 2 is working, the device will maintain this state even if NET 1 has been restored to
normal. It will be switched to Port 1 only if NET 2 is abnormal.
Please configure this setting according to actual requirements.
12. [B01.Opt_NetMode]
It is designed to configure the networking method of the CPU module located in No.1 slot.
4 setting value options are available as shown in the following table. Please configure this setting
according to actual requirements.
No. Setting value option Description

If this option is selected:

1 Normal
No.1 ~ No.4 Ethernet ports of the CPU module adopt “Normal” mode.

If this option is selected:

No.1 and No.2 Ethernet ports of the CPU module adopt “Normal” mode.
In the “Normal” mode, there is no data redundancy mechanism.
No.3 and No.4 Ethernet ports of the CPU module adopt “HSR” (IEC 62439-3
2 1-2:Normal, 3-4:HSR High-availability Seamless Redundancy) mode to realize data redundancy.
In the “HSR” mode, the principle of parallel operation to a single ring is applied to
realize data redundancy. For each message sent, the node sends two frames,
one through each port. Both the 2 frames circulate in opposite directions over the
ring. Every node forwards the frames it receives from one port to another to reach
the next node. When the originating sender node receives the frame it sent, the
sender node discards the frame to avoid loops.

If this option is selected:

No.1 and No.2 Ethernet ports of the CPU module adopt “Normal” mode.
No.3 and No.4 Ethernet ports of the CPU module adopt “PRP” (IEC 62439-3
Parallel Redundancy Protocol) mode to realize data redundancy.
3 1-2:Normal, 3-4:PRP
In the “PRP” mode, the data redundancy is realized in this way: the
communication is performed in parallel, i.e.: the same data package is transmitted
on both channels simultaneously. The received package identity from one channel
is compared with data package identity from the other channel. If they are the
same, the last package will be discarded.

If this option is selected:

No.1 and No.2 Ethernet ports of the CPU module adopt “Normal” mode.
No.3 and No.4 Ethernet ports of the CPU module adopt “RSTP” (Rapid Spanning
4 1-2:Normal, 3-4:RSTP Tree Protocol) mode.
In the “RSTP” mode, the data redundancy is realized in this way: RSTP serves for
the reorganization of the network structure in case of network path error. In other
7 words, RSTP reroutes the data to another path after the failure of a network path.

13. [En_IP_Whitelist]
It is designed to enable/disable the whitelist function of this device.
A whitelist is a list of IP addresses that are granted access to a certain system or protocol.
If all IP addresses are forbidden to connect to this device (except those included in the whitelist),
please configure this setting as “Enabled”.

7-4 PCS-9611S Feeder Relay

Date: 2020-12-30
 7 Communication Settings

If all IP addresses are permitted to be connected to this device, please configure this setting as
“Disabled”.
Please configure this setting according to actual requirements.
14. [IP**_Whitelist] (**=01, 02...16)
It is designed to configure No.** IP address of the whitelist.
This setting adopts dotted-decimal notation of IPv4.
If the setting [En_IP_Whitelist] is configured as “Disabled”, this setting will be unnecessary to be
configured.
Please configure this setting according to actual requirements.

7.2 IEC61850 Communication Settings

Access path in device LCD:
MainMenuSettingsGlobal SettingsComm SettingsIEC61850 Settings
Access path in PCS-Studio configuration tool:
Project NodeIED NodeSettingGlobalComm_SettingsIEC61850_Settings
No. Settings Range Unit Step
1 IEDNAME - - -
2 Pcnt_Deadband 0~100.00 % 0.01
3 Threshold_ZeroDrift 0.001~0.5 - 0.001
4 En_Send_MMS_Qual_Chg Disabled; Enabled - -
5 Opt_DualNetMode_MMS IEC61850; GB32890 - -
6 En_IEC62351_TCP_Port Disabled; Enabled - -
7 En_IEC61850_TCP_Port Disabled; Enabled - -

1. [IEDNAME]
It is designed to configure the IED name of this device in IEC 61850 protocol.
It cannot be an empty string and shall be unique within an SCD file.
It is recommended to configure this setting by SCD configuration in the PCS-Studio configuration
tool, and then download the new CID file to this device, i.e.: it is not recommended to modify this
setting directly, so as to avoid inconsistence between “IEDName” in the CID file and the “IEDName”
in the SCD file.
If this setting is modified, the IED name in the CID file of this device will be changed
simultaneously and vice versa.
All the allowed characters in this setting are listed as below:
“A”|“a”|“B”|“b”|“C”|“c”|“D”|“d”|“E”|“e”|“F”|“f”|“G”|“g”|“H”|“h”|“I”|“i”|“J”|“j”|“K”|“k”|“L”|“l”|“M”|“m”
|“N”|“n”|“O”|“o”|“P”|“p”|“Q”|“q”|“R”|“r”|“S”|“s”|“T”|“t”|“U”|“u”|“V”|“v”|“W”|“w”|“X”|“x”|“Y”|“y”|“Z”
|“z”|“_”|“0”|“1”|“2”|“3”|“4”|“5”|“6”|“7”|“8”|“9” 7
This setting must start with an alpha character, and it is case sensitive.
The length of the setting [IEDNAME] should be less than 20 characters.
As shown in the following figure, the length of the setting [IEDNAME] is also limited by the length
of “LDName”:
In IEC 61850 Ed1: the length of “LDName” must be <= 32 characters.

PCS-9611S Feeder Relay 7-5

Date: 2020-12-30
 7 Communication Settings

In IEC 61850 Ed2: the length of “LDName” must be <= 64 characters.

LDName

Attribute “Inst”of the

The setting [IEDNAME] element “LDevice” in the
CID file of this device

Please configure this setting according to actual requirements.

2. [Pcnt_Deadband]
Only the measurement value change which is greater than this setting will be sent to the
communication client (e.g.: local SCADA system, etc.) via the device's Ethernet port by using IEC
61850. It is expressed as a percentage value.
If the measurement values sent to the communication client changed within a small range too
frequently, but the communication client needs to ignore these frequent changes, please set this
setting to a bigger value.
If the measurement values sent to the communication client are required to be more precise,
please set this setting to a smaller value.
If the setting [En_IEC61850_TCP_Port] is configured as “Disabled”, this setting will be
unnecessary to be configured.
Please configure this setting according to actual requirements.
3. [Threshold_ZeroDrift]
For any measurement value which is sent to the communication client (e.g.: local SCADA system,
etc.) via the device's Ethernet port by using IEC 61850, if it is smaller than this setting, it will be
processed as “0”.
If the measurement values sent to the communication client are relatively big, please set this
setting to a big value, so as to eliminate influence of zero drift.
If the measurement values sent to the communication client are relatively small, please set this
setting to a small value, so as to avoid too many measurement values being processed as “0”
mistakenly.
If the setting [En_IEC61850_TCP_Port] is configured as “Disabled”, this setting will be
unnecessary to be configured.
Please configure this setting according to actual requirements.
4. [En_Send_MMS_Qual_Chg]

7 If IEC 61850 MMS (Manufacturing Message Specification) quality change report function is
required, please configure this setting as “Enabled”.
If the setting [En_IEC61850_TCP_Port] is configured as “Disabled”, this setting will be
unnecessary to be configured.
Please configure this setting according to actual requirements.
5. [Opt_DualNetMode_MMS]
It is designed to select the MMS network communication mode with the IEC 61850 communication
client (e.g.: local SCADA system, etc.) via network A and B of this device.

7-6 PCS-9611S Feeder Relay

Date: 2020-12-30
 7 Communication Settings

2 setting value options are available as shown in the following table.

No. Setting value option Description

Network mode with IEC 61850 protocol. In this mode, the instances of Report
Control Block (RCB) cannot be shared, so different clients should use different
1 IEC61850
report instances to send reports. The “IEC61850” mode is preferred in most
overseas projects.

Network mode with GB32890 standard. In this mode, for different clients meeting
the redundancy conditions of A and B networks, if one client enables an RCB
instance, the device will only send a report to the enabled client. When the
2 GB32890 enabled client is interrupted, another redundant client will cancel and re-enable
the RCB instance, and the device will send a report to the re-enabled redundant
client. The “GB32890” mode is a special mode widely used in China, which needs
to be used with clients supporting.

If the setting [En_IEC61850_TCP_Port] is configured as “Disabled”, this setting will be

unnecessary to be configured.
Please configure this setting according to actual requirements.
6. [En_IEC62351_TCP_Port]
It is designed to enable/disable the TCP port for IEC 62351 protocol.
To realize the station level IEC 62351 cyber security communication, please enable this setting
and configure certificate, private key, etc. of this device and corresponding IEC 62351 client.
If station level IEC 62351 cyber security communication is not required, please configure this
setting as “Disabled” to close the listening port of IEC 62351 protocol.
Please configure this setting according to actual requirements.
7. [En_IEC61850_TCP_Port]
It is designed to enable/disable the TCP port for IEC 61850 protocol.
If station level IEC 61850 communication is not required, please configure this setting as “Disabled”
to close the MMS listening port of IEC 61850 protocol.
Please configure this setting according to actual requirements.

7.3 DNP Communication Settings

Access path in device LCD:
MainMenuSettingsGlobal SettingsComm SettingsDNP Settings
Access path in PCS-Studio configuration tool:
Project NodeIED NodeSettingGlobalComm_SettingsDNP_Settings
No. Settings Range Unit Step
1 En_TCP1_DNP Disabled; Enabled - -
2
3
Addr_Slave_TCP1_DNP
Addr_Master_TCP1_DNP
0~65519
0~65519
-
-
1
1
7
4 IP_Master_TCP1_DNP 0.0.0.0~255.255.255.255 - -
5 Opt_Map_TCP1_DNP 0~4 - 1
6 t_AppLayer_TCP1_DNP 1~5 s 1
7 t_KeepAlive_TCP1_DNP 0~7200 s 1
8 En_UR_TCP1_DNP Disabled; Enabled - -

PCS-9611S Feeder Relay 7-7

Date: 2020-12-30
 7 Communication Settings

No. Settings Range Unit Step

9 En_MsgCtrlUR_TCP1_DNP Disabled; Enabled - -
10 Num_URRetry_TCP1_DNP 2~10 - 1
11 t_UROfflRetry_TCP1_DNP 1~5000 s 1
12 Class_BI_TCP1_DNP 0~3 - 1
13 Class_AI_TCP1_DNP 0~3 - 1
14 t_Select_TCP1_DNP 0~240 s 1
15 t_TimeSynIntvl_TCP1_DNP 0~3600 s 1
16 Obj01DefltVar_TCP1_DNP 1-BISingleBit; 2-BIWithStatus - -
1-BIChWoutT
17 Obj02DefltVar_TCP1_DNP 2-BIChWithAbsTime - -
3-BIChWithRelTime
1-AI32Int
2-AI16Int
18 Obj30DefltVar_TCP1_DNP 3-AI32IntWoutF - -
4-AI16IntWoutF
5-AI32Flt
1-AI32IntEvWoutT
19 Obj32DefltVar_TCP1_DNP 2-AI16IntEvWoutT - -
5-AI32FltEvWoutT
1-AO32Int
20 Obj40DefltVar_TCP1_DNP 2-AO16Int - -
3-AO32Flt
21 En_TCP2_DNP Disabled; Enabled - 1
22 Addr_Slave_TCP2_DNP 0~65519 - 1
23 Addr_Master_TCP2_DNP 0~65519 - 1
24 IP_Master_TCP2_DNP 0.0.0.0~255.255.255.255 - -
25 Opt_Map_TCP2_DNP 0~4 - 1
26 t_AppLayer_TCP2_DNP 1~5 s 1
27 t_KeepAlive_TCP2_DNP 0~7200 s 1
28 En_UR_TCP2_DNP Disabled; Enabled - -
29 En_MsgCtrlUR_TCP2_DNP Disabled; Enabled - -
30 Num_URRetry_TCP2_DNP 2~10 - 1
31 t_UROfflRetry_TCP2_DNP 1~5000 s 1
32 Class_BI_TCP2_DNP 0~3 - 1
33 Class_AI_TCP2_DNP 0~3 - 1
7 34 t_Select_TCP2_DNP 0~240 s 1
35 t_TimeSynIntvl_TCP2_DNP 0~3600 s 1
36 Obj01DefltVar_TCP2_DNP 1-BISingleBit; 2-BIWithStatus - -
1-BIChWoutT
37 Obj02DefltVar_TCP2_DNP 2-BIChWithAbsTime - -
3-BIChWithRelTime

7-8 PCS-9611S Feeder Relay

Date: 2020-12-30
 7 Communication Settings

No. Settings Range Unit Step

1-AI32Int
2-AI16Int
38 Obj30DefltVar_TCP2_DNP 3-AI32IntWoutF - -
4-AI16IntWoutF
5-AI32Flt
1-AI32IntEvWoutT
39 Obj32DefltVar_TCP2_DNP 2-AI16IntEvWoutT - -
5-AI32FltEvWoutT
1-AO32Int
40 Obj40DefltVar_TCP2_DNP 2-AO16Int - -
3-AO32Flt
41 En_TCP3_DNP Disabled; Enabled - 1
42 Addr_Slave_TCP3_DNP 0~65519 - 1
43 Addr_Master_TCP3_DNP 0~65519 - 1
44 IP_Master_TCP3_DNP 0.0.0.0~255.255.255.255 - -
45 Opt_Map_TCP3_DNP 0~4 - 1
46 t_AppLayer_TCP3_DNP 1~5 s 1
47 t_KeepAlive_TCP3_DNP 0~7200 s 1
48 En_UR_TCP3_DNP Disabled; Enabled - -
49 En_MsgCtrlUR_TCP3_DNP Disabled; Enabled - -
50 Num_URRetry_TCP3_DNP 2~10 - 1
51 t_UROfflRetry_TCP3_DNP 1~5000 s 1
52 Class_BI_TCP3_DNP 0~3 - 1
53 Class_AI_TCP3_DNP 0~3 - 1
54 t_Select_TCP3_DNP 0~240 s 1
55 t_TimeSynIntvl_TCP3_DNP 0~3600 s 1
56 Obj01DefltVar_TCP3_DNP 1-BISingleBit; 2-BIWithStatus - -
1-BIChWoutT
57 Obj02DefltVar_TCP3_DNP 2-BIChWithAbsTime - -
3-BIChWithRelTime
1-AI32Int
2-AI16Int
58 Obj30DefltVar_TCP3_DNP 3-AI32IntWoutF - -
4-AI16IntWoutF
5-AI32Flt
1-AI32IntEvWoutT
59 Obj32DefltVar_TCP3_DNP 2-AI16IntEvWoutT - - 7
5-AI32FltEvWoutT
1-AO32Int
60 Obj40DefltVar_TCP3_DNP 2-AO16Int - -
3-AO32Flt
61 En_TCP4_DNP Disabled; Enabled - 1
62 Addr_Slave_TCP4_DNP 0~65519 - 1

PCS-9611S Feeder Relay 7-9

Date: 2020-12-30
 7 Communication Settings

No. Settings Range Unit Step

63 Addr_Master_TCP4_DNP 0~65519 - 1
64 IP_Master_TCP4_DNP 0.0.0.0~255.255.255.255 - -
65 Opt_Map_TCP4_DNP 0~4 - 1
66 t_AppLayer_TCP4_DNP 1~5 s 1
67 t_KeepAlive_TCP4_DNP 0~7200 s 1
68 En_UR_TCP4_DNP Disabled; Enabled - -
69 En_MsgCtrlUR_TCP4_DNP Disabled; Enabled - -
70 Num_URRetry_TCP4_DNP 2~10 - 1
71 t_UROfflRetry_TCP4_DNP 1~5000 s 1
72 Class_BI_TCP4_DNP 0~3 - 1
73 Class_AI_TCP4_DNP 0~3 - 1
74 t_Select_TCP4_DNP 0~240 s 1
75 t_TimeSynIntvl_TCP4_DNP 0~3600 s 1
76 Obj01DefltVar_TCP4_DNP 1-BISingleBit; 2-BIWithStatus - -
1-BIChWoutT
77 Obj02DefltVar_TCP4_DNP 2-BIChWithAbsTime - -
3-BIChWithRelTime
1-AI32Int
2-AI16Int
78 Obj30DefltVar_TCP4_DNP 3-AI32IntWoutF - -
4-AI16IntWoutF
5-AI32Flt
1-AI32IntEvWoutT
79 Obj32DefltVar_TCP4_DNP 2-AI16IntEvWoutT - -
5-AI32FltEvWoutT
1-AO32Int
80 Obj40DefltVar_TCP4_DNP 2-AO16Int - -
3-AO32Flt

1. [En_TCP*_DNP] (*=1, 2, 3, 4)
It is designed to enable/disable the No.* TCP port for DNP protocol.
If network DNP communication is not required, please configure this setting as “Disabled” to close
the network DNP protocol listening port.
Please configure this setting according to actual requirements.
2. [Addr_Slave_TCP*_DNP] (*=1, 2, 3, 4)
It is designed to configure the DNP address of the slave (i.e.: this device) of No.* network DNP
7 session.
Value of this setting should be consistent with corresponding setting value of the communication
client (e.g.: local SCADA system, master station in control center, etc.) of No.* network DNP
session.
If the setting [En_TCP*_DNP] is configured as “Disabled”, this setting will be unnecessary to be
configured.
3. [Addr_Master_TCP*_DNP] (*=1, 2, 3, 4)

7-10 PCS-9611S Feeder Relay

Date: 2020-12-30
 7 Communication Settings

It is designed to configure the DNP address of the master (i.e.: the communication client) of No.*
network DNP session.
Value of this setting must be the same as corresponding setting value of the communication client
of No.* network DNP session.
If the setting [En_TCP*_DNP] is configured as “Disabled”, this setting will be unnecessary to be
configured.
4. [IP_Master_TCP*_DNP] (*=1, 2, 3, 4)
It is designed to configure the IP address of the master (i.e.: the communication client) of No.*
network DNP session.
This setting adopts dotted-decimal notation of IPv4.
Value of this setting must be the same as corresponding setting value of the communication client
of No.* network DNP session.
If the setting [En_TCP*_DNP] is configured as “Disabled”, this setting will be unnecessary to be
configured.
5. [Opt_Map_TCP*_DNP] (*=1, 2, 3, 4)
It is designed to configure the DNP communication point map of No.* network DNP session.
5 setting value options (“0”, “1”, “2”, “3”, “4”) are available, each of them corresponds to a
communication point map pre-configured by the PCS-Studio configuration tool.
If the setting [En_TCP*_DNP] is configured as “Disabled”, this setting will be unnecessary to be
configured.
Please configure this setting according to actual requirements.
6. [t_AppLayer_TCP*_DNP] (*=1, 2, 3, 4)
It is designed to configure the timeout duration of the application layer of No.* network DNP
session.
Value of this setting must be the same as corresponding setting value of the communication client
of No.* network DNP session.
If the setting [En_TCP*_DNP] is configured as “Disabled”, this setting will be unnecessary to be
configured.
7. [t_KeepAlive_TCP*_DNP] (*=1, 2, 3, 4)
It is designed to configure the heartbeat time interval of No.* network DNP session.
Value of this setting must be the same as corresponding setting value of the communication client
of No.* network DNP session.
If the setting [En_TCP*_DNP] is configured as “Disabled”, this setting will be unnecessary to be
configured.
8. [En_UR_TCP*_DNP] (*=1, 2, 3, 4)
If the communication client of No.* network DNP session requires this device to support sending
UR (Unsolicited Response) messages, please configure this setting as “Enabled”. Otherwise,
please configure this setting as “Disabled”. 7
If the setting [En_TCP*_DNP] is configured as “Disabled”, this setting will be unnecessary to be
configured.
9. [En_MsgCtrlUR_TCP*_DNP] (*=1, 2, 3, 4)
If this setting is configured as “Disabled”, this device will send Class 1, 2, 3 events spontaneously
to the communication client of No.* network DNP session.
If this setting is configured as “Enabled”, the communication client must activate UR reporting by

PCS-9611S Feeder Relay 7-11

Date: 2020-12-30
 7 Communication Settings

enabling unsolicited application function (Function code: 20). After activation, No.* network DNP
session of this device begins to send Class 1, 2, 3 events to the communication client
spontaneously.
If the setting [En_TCP*_DNP] or [En_UR_TCP*_DNP] is configured as “Disabled”, this setting will
be unnecessary to be configured.
Please configure this setting according to actual requirements.
10. [Num_URRetry_TCP*_DNP] (*=1, 2, 3, 4)
It is designed to configure the online retransmission number for sending the UR messages to the
communication client of No.* network DNP session.
Value of this setting must be the same as corresponding setting value of the communication client
of No.* network DNP session.
If the setting [En_TCP*_DNP] or [En_UR_TCP*_DNP] is configured as “Disabled”, this setting will
be unnecessary to be configured.
11. [t_UROfflRetry_TCP*_DNP] (*=1, 2, 3, 4)
It is designed to configure the offline retransmission interval for sending the UR messages to the
communication client of No.* network DNP session.
Value of this setting must be the same as corresponding setting value of the communication client
of No.* network DNP session.
If the setting [En_TCP*_DNP] or [En_UR_TCP*_DNP] is configured as “Disabled”, this setting will
be unnecessary to be configured.
12. [Class_BI_TCP*_DNP] (*=1, 2, 3, 4)
It is designed to select the default event class generated by the binary input points to the
communication client of No.* network DNP session.
4 setting value options are available as shown in the following table.
No. Setting value option Description

If this option is selected, all the binary input points of this device will NOT generate
1 0
any event to the communication client of No.* network DNP session.

If this option is selected, all the binary input points of this device will generate
2 1
class 1 events to the communication client of No.* network DNP session.

If this option is selected, all the binary input points of this device will generate
3 2
class 2 events to the communication client of No.* network DNP session.

If this option is selected, all the binary input points of this device will generate
4 3
class 3 events to the communication client of No.* network DNP session.

Value of this setting must be the same as corresponding setting value of the communication client
of No.* network DNP session.
If the setting [En_TCP*_DNP] is configured as “Disabled”, this setting will be unnecessary to be
7 configured.
13. [Class_AI_TCP*_DNP] (*=1, 2, 3, 4)
It is designed to select the default event class generated by the analog input points to the
communication client of No.* network DNP session.
4 setting value options are available as shown in the following table.
No. Setting value option Description
1 0 If this option is selected, all the analog input points of this device will NOT

7-12 PCS-9611S Feeder Relay

Date: 2020-12-30
 7 Communication Settings

No. Setting value option Description

generate any event to the communication client of No.* network DNP session.

If this option is selected, all the analog input points of this device will generate
2 1
class 1 events to the communication client of No.* network DNP session.

If this option is selected, all the analog input points of this device will generate
3 2
class 2 events to the communication client of No.* network DNP session.

If this option is selected, all the analog input points of this device will generate
4 3
class 3 events to the communication client of No.* network DNP session.

Value of this setting must be the same as corresponding setting value of the communication client
of No.* network DNP session.
If the setting [En_TCP*_DNP] is configured as “Disabled”, this setting will be unnecessary to be
configured.
14. [t_Select_TCP*_DNP] (*=1, 2, 3, 4)
It is designed to configure the selection timeout duration of the remote control and the remote
regulation of No.* network DNP session
Value of this setting must be the same as corresponding setting value of the communication client
of No.* network DNP session.
If the setting [En_TCP*_DNP] is configured as “Disabled”, this setting will be unnecessary to be
configured.
15. [t_TimeSynIntvl_TCP*_DNP] (*=1, 2, 3, 4)
It is designed to configure the time interval of the time synchronization function of No.* network
DNP session
Value of this setting must be the same as corresponding setting value of the communication client
of No.* network DNP session.
If the setting [En_TCP*_DNP] is configured as “Disabled”, this setting will be unnecessary to be
configured.
16. [Obj01DefltVar_TCP*_DNP] (*=1, 2, 3, 4)
It is designed to select the default variation for object group 1 (“Obj01”) of No.* network DNP
session.
2 setting value options are available as shown in the following table.
No. Setting value option Description

Binary Input (Single Bit)– packet format

1 1-BISingleBit If this option is selected, “Object group 1, variation 1” will be adopted to report
the current value of a binary input point. Variation 1 objects contain a single-bit
binary input state without status flags.

Binary Input – With Status flags

2 2-BIWithStatus If this option is selected, “Object group 1, variation 2” will be adopted to report 7
the current value of a binary input point. Variation 2 objects contain a status octet
that includes the state of the binary input.

Value of this setting must be the same as corresponding setting value of the communication client
of No.* network DNP session.
If the setting [En_TCP*_DNP] is configured as “Disabled”, this setting will be unnecessary to be
configured.

PCS-9611S Feeder Relay 7-13

Date: 2020-12-30
 7 Communication Settings

17. [Obj02DefltVar_TCP*_DNP] (*=1, 2, 3, 4)

It is designed to select the default variation for object group 2 (“Obj02”) of No.* network DNP
session.
3 setting value options are available as shown in the following table.
No. Setting value option Description

Binary Input status Change event – Without Time

1 1-BIChWoutT If this option is selected, “Object group 2, variation 1” will be adopted to report
events related to a binary input point. Variation 1 objects contain an octet for
reporting the state of the input and status flags.

Binary Input status Change event – With Absolute Time

If this option is selected, “Object group 2, variation 2” will be adopted to report
2 2-BIChWithAbsTime events related to a binary input point. Variation 2 objects contain an octet for
reporting the state of the input and status flags, and the absolute time when the
event occurred.

Binary Input status Change event – With Relative Time

If this option is selected, “Object group 2, variation 3” will be adopted to report
3 3-BIChWithRelTime events related to a binary input point. Variation 3 objects contain an octet for
reporting the state of the input and status flags, and the relative time when the
event occurred. A preceding common time-of-occurrence (CTO) object, group 51,
establishes the basis of the relative time.

Value of this setting must be the same as corresponding setting value of the communication client
of No.* network DNP session.
If the setting [En_TCP*_DNP] is configured as “Disabled”, this setting will be unnecessary to be
configured.
18. [Obj30DefltVar_TCP*_DNP] (*=1, 2, 3, 4)
It is designed to select the default variation for object group 30 (“Obj30”) of No.* network DNP
session.
5 setting value options are available as shown in the following table.
No. Setting value option Description

Analog Input – 32-bit Integer with flag

1 1-AI32Int If this option is selected, “Object group 30, variation 1” will be adopted to report
the current value of an analog input point. Variation 1 objects contain a flag octet
and a 32-bit, signed integer value.

Analog Input – 16-bit Integer with flag

If this option is selected, “Object group 30, variation 2” will be adopted to report
7 2 2-AI16Int
the current value of an analog input point. Variation 2 objects contain a flag octet
and a 16-bit, signed integer value.

Analog Input – 32-bit Integer Without Flag

3 3-AI32IntWoutF If this option is selected, “Object group 30, variation 3” will be adopted to report
the current value of an analog input point. Variation 3 objects contain a 32-bit,
signed integer value.

4 4-AI16IntWoutF Analog Input – 16-bit Integer Without Flag

7-14 PCS-9611S Feeder Relay

Date: 2020-12-30
 7 Communication Settings

No. Setting value option Description

If this option is selected, “Object group 30, variation 4” will be adopted to report
the current value of an analog input point. Variation 4 objects contain a 16-bit,
signed integer value.

Analog Input – 32-bit single-precision, Floating-point with flag

5 5-AI32Flt If this option is selected, “Object group 30, variation 5” will be adopted to report
the current value of an analog input point. Variation 5 objects contain a flag octet
and a 32-bit single-precision, floating-point value.

Value of this setting must be the same as corresponding setting value of the communication client
of No.* network DNP session.
If the setting [En_TCP*_DNP] is configured as “Disabled”, this setting will be unnecessary to be
configured.
19. [Obj32DefltVar_TCP*_DNP] (*=1, 2, 3, 4)
It is designed to select the default variation for object group 32 (“Obj32”) of No.* network DNP
session.
3 setting value options are available as shown in the following table.
No. Setting value option Description

Analog Input – 32-bit Integer Event Without Time

1 1-AI32IntEvWoutT If this option is selected, “Object group 32, variation 1” will be adopted to report
events related to an analog input point. Variation 1 objects contain a flag octet and
a 32-bit, signed integer value.

Analog Input – 16-bit Integer Event Without Time

2 2-AI16IntEvWoutT If this option is selected, “Object group 32, variation 2” will be adopted to report
events related to an analog input point. Variation 2 objects contain a flag octet and
a 16-bit, signed integer value.

Analog Input – 32-bit single-precision, Floating-point Event Without Time

3 5-AI32FltEvWoutT If this option is selected, “Object group 32, variation 5” will be adopted to report
events related to an analog input point. Variation 5 objects contain a flag octet and
a 32-bit single-precision, floating-point value.

Value of this setting must be the same as corresponding setting value of the communication client
of No.* network DNP session.
If the setting [En_TCP*_DNP] is configured as “Disabled”, this setting will be unnecessary to be
configured.
20. [Obj40DefltVar_TCP*_DNP] (*=1, 2, 3, 4)
It is designed to select the default variation for object group 40 (“Obj40”) of No.* network DNP
session. 7
3 setting value options are available as shown in the following table.
No. Setting value option Description
Analog Output status – 32-bit Integer with flag

1 1-AO32Int If this option is selected, “Object group 40, variation 1” will be adopted to report
the status of an analog output point. Variation 1 objects contain a flag octet and a
32-bit, signed integer value.

PCS-9611S Feeder Relay 7-15

Date: 2020-12-30
 7 Communication Settings

No. Setting value option Description

Analog Output status – 16-bit Integer with flag

2 2-AO16Int If this option is selected, “Object group 40, variation 2” will be adopted to report
the status of an analog output point. Variation 2 objects contain a flag octet and a
16-bit, signed integer value.

Analog Output status – 32-bit single-precision, Floating-point with flag

3 3-AO32Flt If this option is selected, “Object group 40, variation 3” will be adopted to report
the status of an analog output point. Variation 3 objects contain a flag octet and a
32-bit single-precision, floating-point value.

Value of this setting must be the same as corresponding setting value of the communication client
of No.* network DNP session.
If the setting [En_TCP*_DNP] is configured as “Disabled”, this setting will be unnecessary to be
configured.

7.4 IEC103 Communication Settings

Access path in device LCD:
MainMenuSettingsGlobal SettingsComm SettingsIEC103 Settings
Access path in PCS-Studio configuration tool:
Project NodeIED NodeSettingGlobalComm_SettingsIEC103_Settings
No. Settings Range Unit Step
1 En_Broadcast_LAN1 Disabled; Enabled - 1
2 En_Broadcast_LAN2 Disabled; Enabled - 1
3 En_Broadcast_LAN3 Disabled; Enabled - 1
4 En_Broadcast_LAN4 Disabled; Enabled - 1
5 Format_Wave_Sent DisturbData; File - -
6 Pcnt_Deadband_Net 0~100.00 % 0.01
7 Period_Measmt_Net 0~65535 s 1
Current Language;
8 Opt_Caption_103 Fixed Chinese; - -
Fixed English
9 En_IEC103_TCP&UDP_Port Disabled; Enabled - -

1. [Opt_Caption_103]
The standard application of IEC 60870-5-103 protocol adopts a twisted pair EIA-485 connection
over a distance up to 500m. This device also supports the NR network 103 protocol that is an
alternative to IEC 60870-5-103 and is applicable through Ethernet network.
The setting [Opt_Caption_103] is designed to select the language of group caption of IEC
7 60870-5-103 protocol and NR network 103 protocol.
Please configure this setting according to actual requirements.
2. [En_Broadcast_LAN*] (*=1, 2, 3, 4)
This setting is only used for NR network 103 protocol.
Only when NR network 103 protocol is used for the No.* Ethernet port of the CPU module, this
setting must be set as “Enabled”. Now this device will send UDP (User Datagram Protocol)
messages through the No.* Ethernet port of the CPU module.

7-16 PCS-9611S Feeder Relay

Date: 2020-12-30
 7 Communication Settings

If the setting [En_103_TCP&UDP_Port] is configured as “Disabled”, this setting will be

unnecessary to be configured.
3. [Format_Wave_Sent]
It is designed to configure the data format for sending waveform list by using NR network 103
protocol.
2 setting value options are available as shown in the following table.
No. Setting value option Description

1 DisturbData Send the waveform list in ASDU23 mode

2 File Send the waveform list in ASDU222 mode

If both ASDU23 mode and ASDU222 mode are supported onsite, it is recommended to configure
this setting as “File”, because the waveform list can be transmitted faster.
If the setting [En_103_TCP&UDP_Port] is configured as “Disabled”, this setting will be
unnecessary to be configured.
4. [Pcnt_Deadband_Net]
Only the measurement value change which is greater than this setting will be sent to the
communication client (e.g.: local SCADA system, etc.) via the device's Ethernet port using NR
network 103 protocol. It is expressed as a percentage value.
If the measurement values sent to the communication client changed within a small range too
frequently, but the communication client needs to ignore these frequent changes, please set this
setting to a bigger value.
If the measurement values sent to the communication client are required to be more precise,
please set this setting to a smaller value.
If the measurement value change is not required to be sent to the communication client, please
configure this setting as “0”.
If the setting [En_103_TCP&UDP_Port] is configured as “Disabled”, this setting will be
unnecessary to be configured.
Please configure this setting according to actual requirements.
5. [Period_Measmt_Net]
It is designed to configure the time period for sending the measurement value to the
communication client (e.g.: local SCADA system, etc.) via the device's Ethernet port by using NR
network 103 protocol.
If this device is not required send all measurement values to the communication client
spontaneously based on the integrity period, please configure this setting as “0”.
If the setting [En_103_TCP&UDP_Port] is configured as “Disabled”, this setting will be
unnecessary to be configured.
Please configure this setting according to actual requirements.
6. [En_103_TCP&UDP_Port] 7
It is designed to enable/disable the TCP port & UDP port for NR network 103 protocol.
If NR network 103 communication is not required, please configure this setting as “Disabled” to
close the network NR network 103 protocol listening port.
Please configure this setting according to actual requirements.

PCS-9611S Feeder Relay 7-17

Date: 2020-12-30
 7 Communication Settings

Please refer to the following table for the relevant settings of NR network
103 protocol and IEC 60870-5-103 protocol.
No. Protocol name Communication mode Relevant settings

All the settings in the submenu

NR network 103
1 Network mode “MainMenuSettingsGlobal SettingsComm
protocol
SettingsIEC103 Settings” in device LCD.

The setting [Opt_Caption_103] in the submenu

“MainMenu  Settings  Global Settings  Comm
Settings IEC103 Settings” in device LCD.
The following settings in the submenu “MainMenu 
IEC 60870-5-103 Settings  Global Settings  Comm Settings 
2 Serial connection mode General Comm Settings” in device LCD:
protocol
[Protocol_RS485-1], [Protocol_RS485-2],
[Baud_RS485-1], [Baud_RS485-2],
[Addr_RS485-1], [Addr_RS485-2].

7.5 Modbus Communication Settings

Access path in device LCD:
MainMenuSettingsGlobal SettingsComm SettingsModbus Settings
Access path in PCS-Studio configuration tool:
Project NodeIED NodeSettingGlobalComm_SettingsModbus_Settings
No. Name Range Unit Step
1 En_Modbus_TCP_Port Disabled; Enabled - -

1. [En_Modbus_TCP_Port]
It is designed to enable/disable the TCP port for Modbus protocol.
If network Modbus communication is not required, please configure this setting as “Disabled” to
close the network Modbus protocol listening port.
Please configure this setting according to actual requirements.

7.6 SV Communication Settings

Access path in device LCD:
MainMenuSettingsGlobal SettingsComm SettingsSV Settings
Access path in PCS-Studio configuration tool:

7 Project NodeIED NodeSettingGlobalComm_SettingsSV_Settings

No. Settings Range Unit Step
1 Bxx.SampleRate_SV 0~65535 - 1
2 Bxx.t_Dly_Interp_Net_SV 1500~15000 μs 1
3 Bxx.t_Dly_Interp_P2P_SV 600~1500 μs 1
4 Bxx.Opt_RecvMode_SV NetMode; P2P; Resv - -

7-18 PCS-9611S Feeder Relay

Date: 2020-12-30
 7 Communication Settings

1. [SampleRate_SV]
It is designed to configure the sampling rate of the received SV data from the merging units.
Value of this setting must be the same as the sampling rate of the transmitted SV data of the
merging units.
2. [t_Dly_Interp_Net_SV]
It is designed to configure the backward time delay of SV interpolation for networking mode. This
backward time delay is used to meet the data quantity & quality requirements by the SV
interpolation.
Base on engineering experience, value of this setting is recommended to be kept as the default
value “2000μs”. Please consult our engineer if modification is required.
3. [t_Dly_Interp_P2P_SV]
It is designed to configure the backward time delay of SV interpolation for peer-to-peer (P2P)
mode. This backward time delay is used to meet the data quantity & quality requirements by the
SV interpolation.
Base on engineering experience, value of this setting is recommended to be kept as the default
value “850μs”. Please consult our engineer if modification is required.
4. [Opt_RecvMode_SV]
It is designed to select the SV receiving mode.
3 setting value options are available as shown in the following table.
No. Setting value option Description

Networking mode will be adopted.

If there is communication equipment (e.g.: Ethernet switch, etc.) in the SV
3 NetMode
communication link, please select “NetMode”.
If “NetMode” is selected, all the devices must share the same clock source.

Peer-to-peer (P2P) mode will be adopted.

4 P2P If there is no communication equipment in the SV communication link, please
select “P2P”.

5 Resv Reserved

Please configure this setting according to actual requirements.

If there is no “SV_Settings” submenu in the PCS-Studio configuration tool,

please access the path “Project NodeIED NodeDevice
SetupGlobal ConfigMOT” as shown in the following figure, configure
the “Sampling Mode” (S4) to “Non-conventional instrument
transformer”. Save and close this project, and then open this project again
to enable the “SV_Settings” submenu to be visible.
7

PCS-9611S Feeder Relay 7-19

Date: 2020-12-30
 7 Communication Settings

7-20 PCS-9611S Feeder Relay

Date: 2020-12-30
 8 Logic Links

8 Logic Links
Table of Contents

8.1 Function Links ................................................................................................. 8-1

8.2 GOOSE Sending Links .................................................................................... 8-1

8.3 GOOSE Receiving Links ................................................................................. 8-1

8.4 SV Receiving Links.......................................................................................... 8-2

8
PCS-9611S Feeder Relay 8-a
Date: 2020-12-30
 8 Logic Links

8
8-b PCS-9611S Feeder Relay
Date: 2020-12-30
 8 Logic Links

8.1 Function Links

Access path in device LCD:
MainMenuSettingsLogic LinksFunction Links
Access path in PCS-Studio configuration tool:
Project NodeIED NodeSettingLogic_LinksFunction_Links
No. Settings Range Unit Step
1 Link_** Disabled; Enabled - -

1. [Link_**] (**=01, 02...08)

It is designed to provide function link ** for logic programming via PCS-Studio configuration tool: if
it is configured as “Enabled”, it can be used as “1” to enable a functional element, if it is configured
as “Disabled”, it can be used as “0” to disable a functional element.
This logic link setting can also be configured by remote control command from local SCADA
system, master station in control center, etc.
Please configure this setting according to actual requirements.

8.2 GOOSE Sending Links

Access path in device LCD:
MainMenuSettingsLogic LinksGOOSE Send Links
Access path in PCS-Studio configuration tool:
Project NodeIED NodeSettingLogic_LinksGOOSE_Send_Links
No. Settings Range Unit Step
1 @Bx.Name_**_GCommLink.GLink_Send Disabled; Enabled - -

1. [@Bx.Name_**_GCommLink.GLink_Send] (**=00~07)
It is designed to enable/disable corresponding GOOSE sending link.
@Bx.Name_**_GCommLink is the set value of the label setting of [Bx.Name_**_GCommLink],
E.g.: if the set value of [B01.Name_00_GCommLink] is “GOOSE_Link0”, then the displayed name
of “@B01.Name_00_GCommLink.GLink_Send” will be “GOOSE_Link0.GLink_Send”, please refer
to Section 2.4 for more details.
If this logic link setting is configured as “Disabled”, all the sent GOOSE data will be cleared to 0.
Please configure this setting according to actual requirements.

8.3 GOOSE Receiving Links

Access path in device LCD:
MainMenuSettingsLogic LinksGOOSE Recv Links
Access path in PCS-Studio configuration tool:
Project NodeIED NodeSettingLogic_LinksGOOSE_Recv_Links
No. Settings Range Unit Step
1 @Bx.Name_**_GCommLink.GLink_Recv Disabled; Enabled - -
2 GLink_RecvSim Disabled; Enabled - -
8
PCS-9611S Feeder Relay 8-1
Date: 2020-12-30
 8 Logic Links

1. [@Bx.Name_**_GCommLink.GLink_Recv] (**=00~07)
It is designed to enable/disable corresponding GOOSE receiving link.
@Bx.Name_**_GCommLink is the set value of the label setting of [Bx.Name_**_GCommLink],
E.g.: if the set value of [B01.Name_00_GCommLink] is “GOOSE_Link0”, then the displayed name
of “@B01.Name_00_GCommLink.GLink_Recv” will be “GOOSE_Link0.GLink_Recv”, please refer
to Section 2.4 for more details.
If this logic link setting is configured as “Disabled”, the alarm signals “GAlm_ADisc”,
“GAlm_BDisc”, “GAlm_Maint_Unmatched” of this GOOSE communication link will NOT be
processed and issued.
Please configure this setting according to actual requirements.
2. [GLink_RecvSim]
It is designed to enable/disable the allowance to accept simulated GOOSE messages.
If this device is required to accept simulated GOOSE messages, please configure this setting as
“Enabled”.
If this device is required to accept real GOOSE messages, please configure this setting as
“Disabled”.

8.4 SV Receiving Links

Access path in device LCD:
MainMenuSettingsLogic LinksSV Recv Links
Access path in PCS-Studio configuration tool:
Project NodeIED NodeSettingLogic_LinksSV_Recv_Links
No. Settings Range Unit Step
1 @Bxx.Name_**_SVCommLink.SVLink_Recv Disabled; Enabled - -
2 SVLink_RecvSim Disabled; Enabled - -

1. [@Bx.Name_**_SVCommLink.SVLink_Recv] (**=00~11)
It is designed to enable/disable corresponding SV receiving link.
@Bx.Name_**_SVCommLink is the set value of the label setting of [Bx.Name_**_SVCommLink],
E.g.: if the set value of [B01.Name_00_SVCommLink] is “SV_Link0”, then the displayed name of
“@[email protected]_Recv” will be “SV_Link0.SVLink_Recv”, please refer
to Section 2.4 for more details.
If this logic link setting is configured as “Disabled”, the alarm signals “SVAlm_ADisc”,
“SVAlm_BDisc”, “SVAlm_Maint_Unmatched” of this SV communication link will NOT be
processed and issued.
Please configure this setting according to actual requirements.
2. [SVLink_RecvSim]
It is designed to enable/disable the allowance to accept simulated SV messages.
If this device is required to accept simulated SV messages, please configure this setting as
“Enabled”.
If this device is required to accept real SV messages, please configure this setting as “Disabled”.

8
8-2 PCS-9611S Feeder Relay
Date: 2020-12-30